JP7426139B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that can execute a display performance using a display device when a game ball enters a winning opening (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Such gaming machines can perform display effects using character images, symbols, and the like.

JP2016-202930A Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of technology for increasing the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the interest of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later to aid understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine equipped with an accessory,
The accessory can visually recognize an image displayed on the display means located on the back side of the accessory through the accessory,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
The specific image can transition between a first state in shape and a second state in which the length in a predetermined direction is longer than the first state,
When the specific image is displayed on the display means, a portion of the specific image on one side in the predetermined direction becomes visible through the accessory, and a portion of the specific image on the other side in the predetermined direction becomes visible. It is possible to perform a first effect in which at least a portion of the remaining part of the specific image located at is visible without using the accessory,
In the first effect, the shape of the specific image changes from the first state to the second state, so that the specific image extends toward one side in the predetermined direction, and extends through the accessory. The area of the part that becomes visible through the accessory changes, and the area of the part that becomes visible without the aid does not change .
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application example 2]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine equipped with an accessory,
The accessory can visually recognize an image displayed on the display means located on the back side of the accessory through the accessory,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
The specific image can transition between a first state in shape and a second state in which the length in a predetermined direction is longer than the first state,
When the specific image is displayed on the display means, a portion of the specific image on one side in the predetermined direction becomes visible through the accessory, and a portion of the specific image on the other side in the predetermined direction becomes visible. It is possible to perform a first effect in which at least a portion of the remaining part of the specific image located at is visible without using the accessory,
In the first effect, the shape of the specific image changes from the first state to the second state, so that the specific image expands toward one side in the predetermined direction, and the accessory object After the area of the part that becomes visible through increases, the shape of the specific image changes from the second state to the first state, so that the specific image moves toward the other side in the predetermined direction. By shrinking, the area of the part that becomes visible through the accessory decreases.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of display devices. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining various types of random numbers used in gaming machines. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4. It is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in a non-time saving state. It is an explanatory diagram of fluctuation pattern judgment table T6 in a time saving state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is an explanatory diagram of the big prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of starting port sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior judgment processing. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of pending ball number processing. 3 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a preliminary determination information storage area. It is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating production start process. It is an explanatory diagram of a basic performance pattern determination table T52. It is an explanatory diagram of a chance up performance pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of processing during a fluctuation performance. It is a flowchart of display control processing. It is an explanatory view illustrating a first mode of a first movable accessory. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination effect of the first and second movable accessories. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a pending image transparent visual recognition effect A; FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a pending image transparent visual recognition effect B; FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a pending image transparent visual recognition effect C; FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a transparent visual recognition effect A of an accessory. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a transparent visual recognition effect B of an accessory. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a transparent visual recognition effect C of an accessory. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a specific image transparent visual recognition effect A. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining specific image transparent visual recognition effect B; FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a specific image transparent visual recognition effect C; FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a suggested image transparent visual recognition effect A; FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining suggested image transparent visual recognition effect B; FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a suggested image transparent visual recognition effect C; FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern transparent visual recognition effect. It is a diagram for explaining a performance content display transparent visual recognition performance. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a transparent visual recognition effect of displaying the number of acquired pitches. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a role-playing linked reach performance A. It is a diagram for explaining the role-playing object cooperation reach effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a role-playing linked reach effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining specific image covering effect A; 7 is a diagram for explaining specific image covering effect B. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining specific image covering effect C. It is a diagram for explaining remaining time suggestion effect A. It is a diagram for explaining remaining time suggestion effect B. It is a diagram for explaining remaining time suggestion effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining specific image change effect A. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining specific image change effect B. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a specific image change effect C. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining meter effect A. It is a diagram for explaining meter effect B. It is a diagram for explaining meter effect C. It is a diagram for explaining meter countdown effect A. It is a diagram for explaining meter countdown effect B. It is a diagram for explaining meter countdown effect C. It is a diagram for explaining rewind effect A. It is a diagram for explaining rewind effect B. It is a diagram for explaining rewind effect C. It is a diagram for explaining reach effect A. It is a diagram for explaining reach effect B. It is a diagram for explaining reach effect C. It is a diagram for explaining jackpot confirmation suggestion performance A. It is a diagram for explaining jackpot confirmation suggestion performance B. It is a diagram for explaining jackpot confirmation suggestion performance C. It is a diagram for explaining pseudo-continuous reach effect A. It is a diagram for explaining pseudo-continuous reach performance B. It is a diagram for explaining a pseudo-continuous reach effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a hold icon display effect A. It is a figure for explaining pending icon display performance B. It is a diagram for explaining a hold icon display effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a hold icon visibility difficulty rendering A; FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a hold icon difficult to visually recognize effect B; It is a figure for explaining the hold icon visibility difficulty production C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern variation display performance A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern variation display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern variation display performance C. It is a diagram for explaining a hold corresponding performance A. It is a diagram for explaining a hold corresponding performance B. It is a diagram for explaining a hold corresponding effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a hold jumping performance A. It is a diagram for explaining hold jumping effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a hold jumping effect C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern display effect C. It is a figure for explaining the winning type suggestion image display performance A. It is a diagram for explaining winning type suggestion image display performance B. It is a figure for explaining the winning type suggestion image display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining two-reach performance A. It is a diagram for explaining two-reach performance B. It is a diagram for explaining two-reach performance C. It is a diagram for explaining special symbol variation effect A. It is a diagram for explaining special symbol variation effect B. It is a diagram for explaining special symbol variation effect C. It is a figure for explaining the non-miss suggestion effect A. It is a figure for explaining the non-miss suggestion effect B. It is a figure for explaining the non-miss suggestion effect C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern variation effect A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern variation effect B. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern variation effect C. It is a diagram for explaining special pseudo-continuous effect A. It is a diagram for explaining special pseudo-continuous effect B. It is a diagram for explaining special pseudo-continuous effect C. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a normal pseudo-connection performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a production A using a pseudo-connected suggestive image. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining production B using pseudo-linked suggestive images. It is a diagram for explaining full rotation performance A. It is a diagram for explaining full rotation effect B. It is a diagram for explaining full rotation effect C. It is a diagram for explaining countdown variation effect A. It is a diagram for explaining countdown variation effect B. It is a diagram for explaining countdown variation effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an operation unit image superimposition effect A. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining operation unit image superimposition effect B; FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an operation unit image superimposition effect C. It is a diagram for explaining character appearance effect A. It is a diagram for explaining character appearance effect B. It is a diagram for explaining character appearance effect C. It is a figure for explaining pending connection suggestion performance A. It is a figure for explaining pending connection suggestion performance B. It is a figure for explaining the suspension connection suggestion performance C. It is a diagram for explaining area display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining area display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining area display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining time-saving mode effect A. It is a diagram for explaining time-saving mode performance B. It is a diagram for explaining normal mode performance. It is a diagram for explaining a performance without a pending series. It is a diagram for explaining a performance with a series of suspensions. It is a diagram for explaining the revival effect. It is a diagram for explaining a right-handed play holding performance A. It is a diagram for explaining right-handed play reservation performance B. It is a diagram for explaining right-handed play holding performance C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an instruction image effect A. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining instruction image performance B. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining instruction image production C. It is a diagram for explaining V winning remaining time notification effect A. It is a figure for explaining V prize winning remaining time notification effect B. It is a diagram for explaining V winning remaining time notification effect C. It is a diagram for explaining jackpot symbol display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining jackpot symbol display performance B. It is a diagram for explaining jackpot symbol display performance C.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained so as to correspond to the left-right direction as seen from the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires game balls based on a player's firing operation, and when a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to a front frame (front frame part) 53, an outer frame (base frame part) that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. We are prepared. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and an excess ball tray (lower tray). ) 62, a performance button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the gaming area 3 of the gaming board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, and causes the game ball to be launched at a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit disposed near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player during a performance performed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation part imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the sword handle, and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. Ru. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward, and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs a light emitting effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform sound production during games and the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be movable from a stored state in which it is stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state in which it projects above the front frame 53.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (belly button) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electronic chew) 22. , the gate (through chucker) 28, the first grand prize device (first attacker) 31, the second grand prize device (second attacker) 36, the general prize opening 27 (normal prize opening 27), and the general prize winning device It has an opening 29 (normal winning opening 29), an out opening 16, and display devices 40.

The game area 3 is an area where game balls shot by operating the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided protrudingly. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by operating the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and emits light from the back side of the game area 3.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the gaming area 3, and includes a first image display device 7A and a second image display device 7B. The first image display device 7A includes a display screen 7a. The second image display device 7B includes a display screen 7b. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screens 7a and 7b of the image display device 7 include a first effect pattern display area in which effect patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a effect pattern (decorative pattern) 8L, A second effect pattern display area in which decorative symbols different from 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, a pending image display area in which pending images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a pending digest image display in which a pending digest image 9C is displayed. It has an area. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also called hold icons 9A and 9B. The pending digested image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also referred to as the pending image 9C. The first hold icon and the second hold icon are collectively referred to as simply hold icons.

The first performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas: "left", "middle", and "right". A left presentation pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium performance pattern (medium decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the medium pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, by a combination of effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

For example, in the case of winning a jackpot, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed as a zero number such as "777". If it is a miss, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with a miss such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result not only on the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b but also on the image display device 7. Note that the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Furthermore, the manner in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner may be a manner in which they are scrolled in the vertical direction, or may be in any other manner. The combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the performance that displays the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will also be referred to as a "variable performance of performance symbols," a "variable display of decorative symbols," or simply a "variable performance." It should be noted that the variation performance of this decorative pattern is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance) during the period from when the special symbol starts changing until it stops (also referred to as a special symbol variation period). Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts changing until it stops, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern.

Further, the second performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas: "left", "middle", and "right". A left presentation pattern (left decorative pattern), not shown, is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium effect pattern (medium decorative pattern), not shown, is displayed in the medium pattern display area. A right production pattern (right decorative pattern), not shown, is displayed in the right pattern display area. The effect patterns displayed in the second effect pattern display area are similar to the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first effect pattern display area, and are smaller than the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is displayed.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screens 7a and 7b, in addition to the performance symbol variation performance, a jackpot performance that is performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc. . In the performance symbol variation performance, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed in addition to the performance symbols. In addition to the production pattern, the image display device 7 also includes an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can indicate that the special pattern is changing or indicate the lottery result of the special pattern. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that the identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area includes a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of stored first special figures reserved, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B, which displays reserved images 9B according to the number of stored second special figures reserved, which will be described later. and a second hold display area. By displaying the holding images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure holdings displayed on the first special figure holding display 43a (described later) and the number of second special figure holding displayed on the second special figure holding display 43b are determined. The number of memories can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays the pending digest image 9C. The pending digesting image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and depending on the display of the pending digesting image 9C, the first special symbol pending or the first special symbol is displayed. 2. It is possible to clearly display to the player that the reserved special drawings are extinguished ("extinguishment of reserved special drawings" to be described later).

A first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided on both the left and right sides of the image display device 7. The first movable accessory 14 includes a left side plate member 14L having transparency and a right side plate member 14R having transparency. The left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R are movable left and right, respectively, and transition between a closed state that covers the entire image display device 7 and an open state that does not cover the center portion of the image display device 7, as described later. configured to be possible.

The center decoration 10 is located near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decoration body 10. A stage part 11 is formed at the lower part of the center decoration body 10. The stage part 11 has a shape that can guide a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage part 11 to a first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decorative body 10. The warp section 12 includes an inlet section through which game balls flow in and an outlet section through which game balls flow out, and causes the game balls that flowed in through the inlet section to flow out to the stage section 11 through the exit section.

The fixed winning device (belly button) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3, and is located in a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball entering hole) where the ease of entering the game ball always remains constant. (fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is a trigger for obtaining a jackpot random number and the like and determining a jackpot.

The normal variable prize winning device (electronic chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting hole 20 in the gaming area 3, and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entering hole, variable starting hole) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 is an opportunity for a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. Note that the electric chew 22 only needs to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible for the ball to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big prize winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to release the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for obtaining a normal symbol random number (a winning random number) and determining a winning number.

Here, "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and this acquired random number is used as a predetermined random number. It is a process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot by comparing it with the value corresponding to the "jackpot". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but a variable display of special symbols is performed on a first special symbol display 41a or a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is performed. When the time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game is performed in which performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of special symbols, and the jackpot lottery result is more effectively notified to the player by this pattern matching game.

In addition, "normal symbol lottery" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining a normal symbol is obtained, and this obtained random number is compared with a predetermined value corresponding to a "win". It is a process of determining whether or not it is a hit by doing so. Regarding the lottery result of this normal symbol, the lottery result is not announced immediately after the game ball passes through the gate 28, but the normal symbol is displayed fluctuating on the regular symbol display 42, which will be described later, and a predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed (lit or extinguished) and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged at the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the gaming area 3, and is connected to the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , a V region 39, a non-V region 70, and a V opening/closing member 71. The first big prize opening 30 includes an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or inhibits reception of game balls through a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big prize opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big prize opening 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 includes a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first big prize opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas through which the game ball that has passed through the first grand prize opening 30 can pass inside the first grand prize winning device 31. . The first big winning hole sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the winning of a game ball into the first big winning hole 30. The V area sensor 39a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to move the game ball. It is in the first state (rotating state) in which it distributes to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in the second state (stopping state) in which it is located at the origin and distributes game balls to the non-V area 70. . In addition, the V opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, but may have the function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, for example, It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V area 39 in a retracted state (first state), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70 in the advancing state. (Second state). In addition, in the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 is an opportunity for transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. In other words, the V area 39 serves as a variable probability operation opening. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 does not serve as a variable probability operation opening. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31. The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big prize winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged at the upper right of the first big winning hole 30 in the gaming area 3, and the second big winning hole (second special winning hole) 35 It is equipped with The second big prize opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or allows reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second big prize opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The second grand prize opening 35 is
When the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball can enter.

The general winning hole 27 is provided at the lower part of the gaming area 3. The out port 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the display devices 40 will be described later.
The general winning hole 29 is located at the lower right of the gaming area 3, adjacent to the right side of the first big winning hole 30.

The gaming area 3 includes a left gaming area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right gaming area 3B on the right side. A hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, a hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called "right-handed hitting." In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning in the first starting opening 20 by playing left-handed. On the other hand, it is configured so that by hitting right, you can aim to pass through the gate 28 and win a prize in the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display 43b. , and a general figure reservation display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The first special symbol reservation display 43a displays the number of stored operation reservations (first special symbol reservation) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reservation display 43b displays the number of stored operation reservations (second special symbol reservation) of the second special symbol display 41b. The normal symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of stored operation reservations (common symbol reservations) of the ordinary symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the second starting port 21. Below, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as a "special symbol." In addition, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as the "special symbol display 41." In addition, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b are also collectively referred to as the "special figure holding display 43."

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (fluctuates) the special symbol (identification information) and then stops displaying the special symbol (identification information) to draw a lottery based on winning in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (special symbol winning lottery). , jackpot lottery) results. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stopping pattern, the first jackpot 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that was won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) in which the second big prize opening 35 is opened is played. In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 and second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you can select one or two from the left as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display jackpot symbols. If it is a loss, a losing symbol such as "●●●●●●●○" with only the rightmost LED lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. For example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all the LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers obtained for that winning are , is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is in the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special drawing holding, and if it is winning in the second starting opening 21, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5). , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as a second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit in this embodiment is for both the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are 4 pieces. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when variable display of special symbols based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Extinguishing the special symbol reservation" refers to determining the jackpot random number etc. corresponding to the special symbol reservation and executing a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during execution of a medium or special game, the right to draw a jackpot for that prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number of prizes. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. The first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b each include, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure reservation display 43 displays the number of special symbols reserved by lighting up LEDs corresponding to the number of special symbols reserved.

The variable display of the normal symbols is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stop displaying them. The normal pattern that is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern that is stopped and the normal pattern that is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one normal pattern that is selected from among a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stopping pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (normal pattern with a predetermined stopping pattern, that is, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. will be held. Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off), is displayed. If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol such as "●○" with only the right LED lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a normal losing symbol. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. As for the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be lit alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (winning random number) obtained for the passage is stored as a normal symbol in the normal symbol retention storage area 86 (FIG. 5). Once it is memorized. There is an upper limit to the number of regular symbols that can be stored in the regular symbol reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four. The general symbol reservation stored in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of the reserved ordinary symbol means to determine the ordinary symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol reserved, and to execute a variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of normal symbols based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passing of the game ball, in other words, when the variable display of the normal symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed, winnings may be won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right to draw a normal symbol lottery for the passing of the symbols, up to a predetermined number. The number of general drawings on hold is displayed on the general drawing holding display 44. The common picture reservation display 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common pictures pending by lighting up the LEDs for the number of common pictures pending.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls gaming profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effects to be executed as the game progresses, and together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the audio control board 106, constitutes a sub-control unit. Note that the sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs a signal to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first starting port sensor 20a, the second starting port sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning port sensor 30a, the second big winning port sensor 35a, and the V area. The sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal winning opening sensors 27a and 29a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chew solenoid 24, the first big winning hole solenoid 33, the second big winning hole solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The first starting port sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting port 20, and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big winning hole sensor 30a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30, and detects a game ball that has won in the first big winning hole 30. The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35, and detects the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big prize opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big prize opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning hole sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the normal winning hole 27. The normal winning hole sensor 29a detects the game ball that has passed into the normal winning hole 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31.

Display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol pending display 43a, a second special symbol pending display 43b, and a normal symbol pending. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for monitoring payout. A prize ball payout device 120, a rental ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and a shooting device 112 is connected via a shooting control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the rental ball payout device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out rental balls. The paid-out rental balls are detected by the rental ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the firing device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

A sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The production control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the production of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub-ROM that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. It includes a CPU 92. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The production control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the production control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 , and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub-control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 (first image display device 7A and second image display device 7B) according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to programs for display control, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data displayed on the image display device 7, including characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. image data such as background images, etc.) are stored. RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. CPU 102 executes a program stored in ROM 103. The production control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. etc. is output. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. Note that the voice control board 106 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and may store acoustic data in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

A frame lamp 66, a board lamp 5, a first movable accessory 14, and a second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and controls these. The production control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, light emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and creates a light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The production control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The first movable accessory 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on both the left and right sides of the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decoration body 10. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and controls the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory according to the motion pattern data. 2. Controls the operation of the movable accessory 15. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to control the lighting of the lamp and control the operation of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

A performance button detection switch 63a and a frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The production control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch that detects when the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is pressed, a touch sensor that is provided on the front frame 53, and outputs a detection signal when a human body comes into contact with it. May be connected.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a fluctuation pattern. A determination table T6, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, a big prize opening pattern determination table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) that the game control microcomputer 81 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reservation storage area 85, and a general figure reservation memory. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main processing (described later), and includes advance determination commands, pending pitch count commands, A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the status of the gaming machine and the gaming status are set in the main control main processing (described later), and include a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, The V flag, variable probability flag, time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in main control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variable counter, a time saving counter, and the like. The special operation status setting area 84d is an area where a status in special operation processing, which will be described later, is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which a first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which a second special figure reservation is stored. The first special figure reservation storage area 85a stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storage. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b has a first memory area for storing random value groups (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal symbol reservation storage area 86 stores a group of random values (reservation information) such as normal symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth symbols of the ordinary symbol reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for. In addition, in the main RAM 84, in addition to the above-mentioned area, a winning type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 are set. A drive data buffer and the like are provided.

The sub ROM93 (FIG. 6(A)) stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51, a basic performance pattern determination table T52, a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These decision tables are referred to by the production control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) that the production control microcomputer 91 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6(B)) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a preliminary determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in sub-control main processing (described later), including advance judgment commands, pending pitch count commands, fluctuation start commands, and fluctuation commands. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area where commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub-control main processing (described later). It is an output buffer) in which a variable performance start command, a fluctuation before end command, a variable performance end command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, an ending performance start command, etc. are set. The preliminary determination information storage area 94c stores preliminary determination information in sub-control main processing (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a first special symbol reservation performance counter, a second special symbol reservation performance counter, and a regular symbol reservation performance counter. , a variable performance counter, a time saving performance counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7(A) shows the random number obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7(B) shows the random number obtained by the performance control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number," a "jackpot type random number," a "reach random number," a "fluctuation pattern random number," and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at timings described later. It is configured as follows. The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for lottery of the winning jackpot type (jackpot type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. "Reach Random Number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the performance symbol variation performance that indicates the result when the jackpot judgment is a loss, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one fluctuating performance symbol remaining among multiple performance symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the fluctuating performance symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a state in which a combination of performance symbols indicates a jackpot (for example, a state of "7↓7"). Note that the performance symbols that are displayed in a stopped state in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if they are shaking within the display screen 7a. The "variation pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chew 22. Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range from 0 to 255. The “jackpot random number,” “jackpot type random number,” “reach random number,” and “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on the ball entering the starting hole (first starting hole 20 or second starting hole 21). The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (winning random number)” is obtained based on passing through the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the ordinary symbol retention storage area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "pre-read performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at timings to be described later. The "pre-read effect random number" is a random number used to determine the pre-read effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during the variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "pre-read effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a preliminary determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The obtained random number group is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a fluctuation start command being output from the main control section to the sub control section. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8(A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8(B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8(C) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the regular symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

In the jackpot determination table T1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the obtained jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss" in the main control main processing (described later). This table is referred to for determination. In FIG. 8(A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random number value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random number value is "a number other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65,535 )”, it is shown that it is determined to be a “lose”. In addition, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random number is "0 to 649", it will be determined as a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)", it will be judged as a "jackpot". It is shown that this is determined to be a "loss". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach determination table T2 indicates whether the reach random value (one of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to "reach exists" or "reach does not exist". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In FIG. 8(B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127), it is determined that there is no reach. In addition, in the "time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is determined that there is a reach. It is shown that it is determined that there is no reach. The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is harder to reach in the event of a loss in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because in the time-saving state, more no-reach losses with short fluctuation times are selected, thereby speeding up the processing speed of special symbol reservations.

The normal symbol winning determination table T3 indicates whether the normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to a "win" or a "loss". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In FIG. 8(C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 2 (3 255)", it is determined that the result is a "loss". In addition, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254", it will be determined as a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)", it will be determined as a "win". , it is shown that it is determined to be a "lose".

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine how many seconds the normal symbol fluctuation time is according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table that is referenced to do this. In FIG. 8(D), when in the "non-time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and when in the "time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second". It has been shown that

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is composed of "jackpot type" and "special symbol This is a table that is referenced to determine the type. In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing planned jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 3". When the jackpot type random number is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 4". When the jackpot type random number is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, if you win in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), regardless of the random number of the jackpot type (any number from 0 to 127), the jackpot type will be determined as "16 RV passing planned jackpot", It is shown that the stop symbol of special figure 2 (special figure stop symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". In addition, by referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special pattern stop pattern data" corresponding to the special pattern stop pattern, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED)" of the special game can be determined. "command" can also be specified. Regarding the specific contents of "16RV passing planned jackpot", "16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot", and "16R (actually 13R) V not planning jackpot" This will be explained later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127). . In FIG. 10, for example, a prize is won in the first starting slot 20 in a non-time saving state, it is determined as a "lose" in the jackpot determination table T1, it is determined as "reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~2'', and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is between "0 and 60", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, a prize is won in the second starting port 21 in the time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines that it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type determination table T5 determines that it is a "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Furthermore, when reaching a reach, it is also determined whether the reach is a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect where the fluctuation time after reach is longer than normal reach. Here, three types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3) with different variation times are set. The length of the fluctuation time is SP3>SP2>SP1. SP1-3 are progressively executed after normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP3 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-association.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the gaming control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 12(A), in the "non-time saving state", the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11", and in the "time saving state", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12". It has been shown that FIG. 12(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 11 and the open pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, each opening time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) is 1.0 seconds. However, the opening of this electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular winning number, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening pattern determination table T8. The big winning hole opening pattern determination table T8 is based on the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole according to the special pattern stop symbol data (FIG. 9), in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs main control main processing (described later). This table is referred to in order to determine 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21". ”, when the special pattern stop symbol data is “14H” or “15H”, the opening pattern is determined to be “open pattern 22”, and when the special pattern stop symbol data is “13H”, the opening pattern is “open pattern 22” Pattern 23" is determined. FIG. 13(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 21, the open pattern 22, and the open pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening), and in the 14th and 16th R, the opening is performed once, The second big prize opening 35 is opened for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened (long opening) for 1 time and 29.5 seconds, and in the 14th and 16th R, the opening is 1 time and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. Open the second grand prize opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th R, open the first grand prize opening 30 once for the number of openings and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening). . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened (long opening) for 1 opening time and 29.5 seconds, and in the 14th R, the opening number is 1 time and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. Open the second grand prize opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and in the 16th R, open the second grand prize opening 35 once for the number of openings and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the first grand prize opening 30 and the second grand prize opening 35 will be opened even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular number of prizes, maximum 9). Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special pattern stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table being referenced. In FIG. 14(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol When the data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 33", and the special figure stopping symbol data is determined to be "opening pattern 33". It is shown that when "15H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34". FIG. 14(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 10th and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 8th and 10th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and the second prize is won. When this happens, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. .

4. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "losses" as a result of jackpot drawings (special symbol drawings). In the case of a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When you win a jackpot, the jackpot game opens the jackpot (first jackpot 30 and second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed (jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. A jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types: "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V-not-passing planned jackpot." "V passing planned jackpot" operates the opening/closing member 32, opening/closing member 37, and V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 (V passing scheduled opening pattern) during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the jackpot where the special symbol stop symbol data is 11H to 14H or 21H corresponds to the "V passing planned jackpot". The combinations of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 are (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33) ) or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), the game ball can pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. "V non-passing expected jackpot" is an opening pattern (opening pattern not expected to pass through V) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game (opening pattern not expected to pass V), opening/closing member 32, opening/closing member 37, and V opening/closing member 71. It is a jackpot that activates the . Here, the jackpot with the special figure stop symbol data of 17H corresponds to the "V non-passing planned jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V area is 39 becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves as both the V passing scheduled opening pattern and the V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The “V passing planned jackpot” includes “16RV passing planned jackpot”, “16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot”, and “16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot”. The actual total number of rounds in the "16 RV jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second big prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In the "16R (actually 13R) V jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the jackpot opening is extremely short, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass expected jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, in 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R The second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) jackpot expected to pass through V", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short and no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V-non-passing planned jackpot", the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: Opening pattern 34), and the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is opened. It is almost impossible for game balls to pass through.

As is clear from the above explanation, the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass through V" and the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is scheduled to pass V" are the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening patterns of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 are the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). In other words, in the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot not expected to pass through V", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass through V", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy, high base state). For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass" and a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass", and the gaming state after the jackpot is uncertain. It becomes difficult to determine whether the state will be a time-saving state (low-accuracy, high-base state) or a high-accuracy, time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state). That is, the gaming state after the "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30. ) but with a high probability is a latent state (latent probability variable state).

In addition, as shown in Figure 9, the distribution ratio of jackpots in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V and 60/128 (approximately 53%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V not. 128 (approximately 47%). On the other hand, all of the jackpots won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are jackpots that are scheduled to pass through V. That is, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on a prize entered into the second starting port 21 which becomes possible to enter by executing the electric support control described later, it will always be a V-passing planned jackpot. In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 is more popular than the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 (first special symbol lottery). The lottery (the lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Description of gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can perform "probability variation control" and "variation time reduction control" on the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, a state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs probability fluctuation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "high probability state", and a state in which no probability fluctuation control is performed is simply referred to as a "normal probability state". (non-high probability state, low probability state). The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is greater in a high probability state than in a normal probability state, as probability fluctuation control for special symbols. A high probability state is achieved by making a jackpot determination. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of hitting the jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, The probability that the display result (stopping symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a jackpot symbol is increased.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 to shorten the fluctuation time is referred to as a "time-saving state", and the state in which the fluctuation time is not controlled to shorten is simply referred to as a "non-time-saving state". That's what it means. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variable display to the time of derivation and display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 executes a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often in a time-saving state than in a non-time-saving state. Determine the variation pattern used. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the variable time reduction control is not executed, the variation of the special symbol A short variation time is more likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings in the starting opening (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) are more likely to occur. This allows players to aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 81 may perform probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control simultaneously, or only one of them, for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols in the time-saving state, but does not perform them in the non-time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs normal symbol probability fluctuation control by creating a normal symbol hit determination table T3 (where the number of normal symbol random numbers (random winning numbers) that are determined to be hits is greater in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. Hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed using FIG. 8(C)). Therefore, in the time saving state, the winning probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, the normal symbol display 42 The probability that the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol (stopped symbol) becomes a winning symbol is increased. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but it is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control on the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes control to increase the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, and control for extending the opening time and increasing number of openings for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball enters the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, a state where these controls are being executed is called a "high base state", and a state where these controls are not being executed is called a "low base state". In a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not need to execute all of the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the control for increasing the number of openings for the electric chew 22. It is only necessary that the electric chew 22 is opened more easily by executing one or more controls than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after a jackpot game due to winning the V passing scheduled jackpot is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the player passes to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. . This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high-accuracy, high-base state" or a "high-accuracy, time-saving state." The high probability/high base state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (in this case, 160 times) or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after a jackpot game due to winning a jackpot scheduled to not pass V will be a normal probability state (non-high probability (that is, a state of low probability), a short-time state, and a high-base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state." The low probability/high base state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability, low-base state is sometimes referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low-probability non-time-saving state (also simply referred to as a non-time-saving state)." Further, the state in which a special game (big hit game) is being executed will be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Furthermore, a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a "specific gaming state."

In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, the game can be progressed more advantageously if the game ball enters the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. Due to the electric support control, the electric chew 22 is opened more easily than in the low base state, and it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 21 than to win a prize in the first starting port 20. be. Therefore, in the high base state, the game ball is hit to the right in order to enter the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery. This allows you to get more starting prizes (winning into the starting hole) than if you hit left-handed. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, even during the jackpot game, the game is played with the right hand. On the other hand, in the low base state, the game can proceed more advantageously if the game ball enters the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the ball to the left. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric chew 22 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, and it is easier to win a prize in the first starting port 20 than to win a prize in the second starting port 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, the game ball is hit to the left in order to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 20. This allows you to win more starting prizes than if you hit right-handed.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be explained based on FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the validity determining means (FIG. 23) and the preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). Initial settings include, for example, setting the main CPU 82 and resetting various flags, statuses, counters, and the like. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial settings are executed only once after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupt processing (step S002), and performs normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, fluctuation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , normal symbol random number value) is updated by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, main side timer interrupt processing (step S005) can be executed. The main side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined period (for example, a 4 msec period). That is, the main side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, every 4 msec). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing ends and until the next main side timer interrupt processing starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing is repeatedly executed. . Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main side timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. In other words, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and other periods (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing until the next main side timer interrupt processing starts). It is carried out both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data to the main RAM 84 for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning opening. Set in buffer. The various sensors include, for example, the first starting hole sensor 20a, the second starting hole sensor 21a, the first big winning hole sensor 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the normal winning hole sensor 27a, and the normal winning hole sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs starting port sensor detection processing (step S103), normal operation processing (step S104), special operation processing (step S105), V area sensor detection processing (step S106), and hold ball detection processing. The numerical processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processes, for example, the second special figure holding display 43b is controlled to display the number based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 2, which will be described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 1. The hold display 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: Step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If no game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal symbols reserved is the number of normal symbols reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of regular symbols reserved. If the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbols reserved balls (step S203), a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label -TRND-H), and stores the obtained random value in the first to Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbols reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 or not. This determination is made depending on whether or not a game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a. If no game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "4 (
(upper limit value)" (step S206). The number of special symbols 2 reserved balls is the number of reserved 2nd special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved 2nd special symbols. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: Label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: Value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: Label-TRND-AS value), -TRND-RC value) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label -TRND-T1). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the second special figure holding storage area 85b for special figure 2 advance determination processing (FIG. 18), which will be described later. to be memorized (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). Details of the special figure 2 advance determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or not. This determination is made depending on whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor 20a. If no game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "4 (upper limit)" ( Step S211). The number of reserved special symbols 1 is the number of reserved first special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved first special symbols. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is ended. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, similarly to the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are obtained. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for special figure 1 advance determination processing (FIG. 19), which will be described later. to be memorized (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). Details of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, no preliminary determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot judgment with reference to the high probability state table of the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value that is temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through special drawing 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: Step S208). do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) and the jackpot random number value to pre-determine whether or not it is a jackpot. Here, since it is a high probability state (the probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the high probability state table (the jackpot judgment value is "0") out of the jackpot judgment table T1.
” to “649”) to determine in advance whether or not it is a jackpot. That is, when the jackpot random number value is between "0" and "649", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is a "loss". In addition, in this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, a preliminary determination table T1 different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. A preliminary determination may be made using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the preliminary jackpot determination is "lose" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type preliminary determination (step S305). In the jackpot type preliminary determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first uses the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random number is any one of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance that it is a "16RV passing planned jackpot". In this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later; however, in other embodiments, a preliminary determination different from the jackpot type determination table T5 may be used. A preliminary determination may be made using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a fluctuating pattern random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the preliminary judgment buffer by the special drawing 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And obtain the reach random value. Next, since the time-saving state is here (the time-saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state, and determines the jackpot preliminary determination result in step S304. A fluctuation pattern is identified from the preliminary judgment result of reach/absence obtained from the reach random value and the fluctuation pattern random value. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of reserved pitches. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected depending on the difference in the number of reserved pitches are selected. For example, if a loss with a reach is determined in advance from the jackpot preliminary determination result and the preliminary determination result of the presence or absence of a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1 to 2". ”, the variation pattern “P64” is selected, and the number of reserved pitches is “3 to 4”, the variation pattern “P68” is selected. Note that in this embodiment, preliminary determination is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later; however, as another embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 may be used. The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The preliminary determination command includes a jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type preliminary determination result), and a fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created advance determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: Step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 advance judgment process, if the probability change flag is ON (
Step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, no preliminary determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot judgment by referring to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S401: NO). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value that is temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through special drawing 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213). do. Next, since the normal probability state is here (the probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot judgment table T1. ”) to determine whether or not it is a jackpot in advance. That is, when the jackpot random number value is between "0" and "164", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is a "loss". Note that the preliminary jackpot determination may use a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special drawing 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the explanation will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process moves to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbols are changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal symbols are not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbols is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved pitches is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 with the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol being "0", in step S203 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the regular symbol is "1". ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is extinguished and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol becomes “0” immediately. This also applies to the number of reserved balls in the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of pending special symbols becomes "1", and then in step S1404 and step S212 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), which will be described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first inputs the normal symbol random number value ( Read out the winning random value). Then, it is determined whether or not it is a hit using the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether it is a time saving state or not), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3. For example, in a non-time saving state, if the normal symbol random value is between "0" and "2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random value is other than that, it is determined to be a "lose". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the gaming state determination result and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol fluctuation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see Figure 8 (D)) . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern to start variable display of the normal symbols (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). If the variable time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols continues. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is a "loss", (Step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of "win" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and determines the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 using the gaming state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. Select. Here, in the non-time-saving state, "open pattern 11" is selected, and in the time-saving state, "open pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation according to the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, if the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 6 pieces), or the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the time to close the electric chew 22 has arrived. One of the things that has been achieved is that it has been fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (occlusions) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and the main processing finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the grand prize device (the first grand prize device 31 and the second grand prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into "1" of the "special operation status", They are called "2", "3", and "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation processing, output of a fluctuation stop command etc. is executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of an opening command, etc. is executed at the time of a jackpot. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: Step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401). When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), in other words, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting opening 21 is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the fluctuation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the storage location of the reservation information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b from the current position to the side from which it is read. At the same time as shifting by one, the pending information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, if pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the pending information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. Through the above steps, the second special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) are respectively on the left side. Shift by one (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, a variation display of the second special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information regarding fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" ( Step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the first starting slot 20 is stored in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the fluctuation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a from the current position to the side where they are read out. At the same time, the reservation information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). Through the above steps, the first special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (out of the four reserved images 9A, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left)
) are shifted one place to the right (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special symbol reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, a variation display of the first special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information regarding fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by turning on/off a demonstration screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined standby time to elapse, and then sets a customer waiting standby command to display a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the extinguishment of the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol reservation is a jackpot that provides a greater profit for the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol reservation (V-passing expected jackpot) It has become easier to win.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), a jackpot determination is made with reference to the high probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. Here, since it is a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on the table for high probability state (jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") of the jackpot judgment table T1. judge.

In step S1501, if the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value using the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state is here (the probability variable flag is OFF), it is determined whether it is a jackpot based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") of the jackpot judgment table T1. Determine whether or not.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special figure 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special figure 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and the process ends. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the jackpot determination result is "lose", special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) have the same process flow, so they will be explained together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the gaming state is a time saving state (step S1600). Determination as to whether or not the time saving state is present is made based on whether the time saving flag is ON or not. If it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process moves to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process moves to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is the special drawing 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is special map 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type will definitely be a V-passing planned jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. If the jackpot is special map 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is a V-passing planned jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. This is done based on the special figure stop symbol data.

If the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass through V in a non-time-saving state among the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuating pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process for special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process for the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V passing scheduled jackpot, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. ” to “P3” (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is “P21” to “P23”) are referenced (addresses are set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as a fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and one of "P21" to "P23" for special drawing 2 is selected.

If the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, a variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, we will use the portions ("P4" to "P6") corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. ) is referred to. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random values.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach established random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first piece of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure pending) of the first special figure pending storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random value to determine whether or not there is a reach. Here, since it is a non-time saving state, the reach is determined based on the table for the non-time saving state (the part where the reach judgment value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13") of the reach judgment table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random value is a reach establishment random value (step S1607: YES), that is, when there is a reach and there is a loss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time saving state from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for a loss with reach in a non-time saving state, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The "P14" part (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P24" to "P31") is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of "P24" to "P31" is selected as a variation pattern from the readout variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 2. Since the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of balls on hold, a shortening variation function works according to the number of balls on hold. In other words, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short fluctuation patterns are increasingly selected. Thereby, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to increase the speed at which special symbols are reserved.

If the reach random value is not a reach established random value (step S1607: NO), that is, if there is no reach and there is no reach, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time-saving state from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for no-reach loss (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state no reach loss, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state shown in FIG. The "P16" part (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P32" to "P33" part) is referred to. In the special figure 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern from the readout variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 2. Here, too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of balls on hold, so the shortening variation function works according to the number of balls on hold.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 described above, except for the following points, so a description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 that is referenced is different from. Specifically, in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referred to. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. is referred to as "P41" to "P43", and in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P61" to "P63". From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as a fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and one of "P61" to "P63" for special drawing 2 is selected. For example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P44 ” to “P46”) are referenced. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random values.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: Step S108). This starts the variable display of special symbols.

[Special symbol fluctuation processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: Step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the above-mentioned variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the stoppage of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of special symbols at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: Step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs game state management processing (step S1801).
). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time saving times, and the details will be described later. After the gaming state management process, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), The game control microcomputer 81 is An opening pattern for the jackpot and the V opening/closing member is set in accordance with the type of jackpot won (step S1803). in particular, The game control microcomputer 81 is With reference to the big prize opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), Determine the opening pattern of the big winning hole from the special pattern stop pattern data, Set the determined opening pattern. for example, If the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, "Opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big prize opening. Also, The game control microcomputer 81 is With reference to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), Determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop pattern data, Set the determined opening pattern. for example, If the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “Opening pattern 31” is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter along with the opening pattern set of the grand prize opening and the V opening/closing member, Set the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot won. What is a round counter? The number of unit release games (round games) executed during the jackpot game is counted. here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The gaming state reset process is a process for resetting the probability change flag and the time saving flag (returning them to OFF), and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and the present process ends.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: Step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability change flag is ON or not (step S2001). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "160" is set in the probability change counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the probability change counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). If the value of the probability change counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, when transitioning to the time-saving state, the time-saving counter is set to "100" if it is in the low-accuracy/high-base state, and "160" is set to the time-saving counter if it is in the high-accuracy/high-base state. As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). If the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information regarding the current gaming state just set (whether or not it is a probability variable state, a probability variable counter value, whether it is a time saving state or not, a time saving counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: Step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability change flag is ON or not (step S2101). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, while the jackpot game is being executed, the player is in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in a low base state when in a non-time saving state, it is in a low base state while a jackpot game is being executed.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: Step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "jackpot end flag" is a flag indicating that all openings of the jackpot devices (first jackpot device 31 and second jackpot device 36) based on the opening pattern have been completed in the jackpot game being executed. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process moves to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), a V opening/closing member operation process for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of this embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big prize opening 30, and in the V opening/closing member operation process, it is operated according to the V opening/closing member opening pattern T9. When a game ball of a predetermined number wins, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period. Details of the V opening/closing member operation process will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 and second big winning opening 35) is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process moves to step S2210.

If the big winning hole is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time to open the big winning hole (step S2203). The time to open the big winning hole may be, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big winning hole that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. This includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has elapsed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the big prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process moves to step S2220.

If it is the time (timing) to open the big winning hole (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning hole opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning hole (the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) depending on the type of jackpot. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In addition, in this embodiment, the grand prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the big winning opening is opened multiple times during one round of gaming, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the opening of the big winning opening during one round. It may be determined whether it is the first opening or not, and the round designation command may be set only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In step S2202 described above, if the grand prize opening is being opened (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the grand prize opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening in that round game has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or the time has come to close the grand prize opening. (i.e., that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since opening the big prize opening). Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined period of time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the big prize opening is closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether a predetermined interval time has elapsed since closing the big prize opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0" or not. A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (step S2227), and a jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (actually 13R) V-passing planned jackpot" is "16R (actually 13R) V-not-passing planned jackpot". The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass into the V area 39 in "Jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 with a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass through V", a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to not pass through V" will occur to the player. ”, it can be recognized that no game ball has passed into the V area 39. In addition, the ending time when the game ball does not pass to the V area 39 in "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the jackpot ending starts, set the jackpot end flag to ON (step S2229),
Finish this process.

In step S2200 described above, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed and the present process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: Step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the round counter values are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in this round.

If it is an opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first winning flag is ON or not (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball won in the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process moves to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not a winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first big prize opening 30 in this round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-circuits the V opening/closing member 71 and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed when the first ball wins, regardless of whether it is "short opening" or "long opening". This is to allow the short circuit to be opened (in this case, for 0.1 seconds) at the same time. In addition, in the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that enters the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 and is not played. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is open and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, for 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and while the V opening/closing member 71 is open. And 1 second after closing is set as the V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when a jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a (described later in the V area sensor detection processing (see Figure 33)). Further, "determining that the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if a game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (ball brushing period) is because there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This takes into consideration the period until the game ball that enters the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when V passing (passing of a game ball to the V area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is turned ON when V passing is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is assumed that it will not be turned on. Note that when the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see the gaming state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). This prevents the V flag from being turned on and set to a high probability state based on V passing due to fraudulent activity. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and moves to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first grand prize opening 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process moves to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is a long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process moves to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is a long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process moves to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 long and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long when the second ball wins (in this case, a maximum of 31.5 seconds). ). In addition, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (29.5 seconds maximum opening time of the grand prize opening + 2 seconds interval closing time), generally speaking, the second ball will win the prize. The time from the end of the round to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, in the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is relatively long. configured to pass. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening/closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period when the V opening/closing member 71 is closed at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and moves to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V opening/closing member 71 is open. If the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended (step S2550). As mentioned above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended depending on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after closing the big prize opening. Make a judgment.

If the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), and performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and after several seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period starts. Make the settings and finish this process.

If the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). For example, in the case of a short-circuit opening, the condition for closing the V opening/closing member 71 may include that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after opening the V opening/closing member 71. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and the present processing ends. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), this process ends with the V opening/closing member 71 in the open state and the V valid period continuing.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the V flag is ON or not (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the time saving counter is set to "100" (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a "non-high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times, or the player wins the next jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "160" (step S2305), The V flag is turned OFF (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets the time saving counter to "160" (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy, high-base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 160 times, or the player wins the next jackpot.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information regarding the gaming state that has just been set.

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: Step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If no game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V is in the valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds. be done. If it is not within the V validity period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is within the V validity period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets a V pass command (step S2604), and ends this process. .

[Held pitch count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending pitch count process (FIG. 16: Step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls, the special symbol 2 reserved number of balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the number of reserved balls command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the number of reserved balls, and includes information regarding the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1, the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2, and the number of reserved balls for normal symbols. . After setting the number of reserved balls command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the production control microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be explained based on FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, reset of various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the production control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4015), and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding one. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Furthermore, instead of adding up the random numbers one by one, two or more may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 allows the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S40
35) becomes possible. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variable performance (step S4305). The process during variable performance is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variable performance to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display performance, and the details will be described later. After the process during the variable performance, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the production button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 sends various commands set in the production command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 by the received command analysis process to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute display effects according to the received commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes audio production to output audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received the various commands executes a lamp effect that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number updating processing.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a preliminary determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern in the case of executing it. The details of the pre-read effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned prefetch effect determination process is skipped. The look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a jackpot, and is executed during the variable performance.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a command for the number of reserved balls has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the reservation display process, information is set in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 based on the information regarding the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls included in the number of reserved balls command. The values of the first special symbol reservation performance counter, the second special symbol reservation performance counter, and the regular symbol reservation performance counter are updated. Thereby, information on each number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the hold pitch count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variable effect start process is performed (step S4460). "Variation performance start processing" is a process of selecting a fluctuation performance pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. Details of the variable performance start process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variable effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), a variable effect end process is performed (step S4470). "Fluctuation performance end processing" is a process for stopping the fluctuation performance executed during special symbol fluctuation. In the fluctuating performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a counter etc. based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and also sets a fluctuating performance end command for ending the fluctuating performance. As a result, the decorative pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or 2 which is changing is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), opening performance pattern determination processing is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets in the sub-RAM 94 information regarding the special symbol stop pattern data that is included in the opening command and is set at the time of jackpot winning determination. Then, the opening performance start command for starting the selected opening performance is selected in the performance command set area of the sub-RAM 94 by selecting the performance pattern of the opening performance that has been set in advance in accordance with the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores the predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. The image data is read from the image display device 7 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, in step S4475, if the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it has been received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The "round performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening game performance pattern (content) to be executed during opening of the big prize opening or during an interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, select a preset round performance performance pattern corresponding to the winning type and number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and send a round performance start command to the sub-RAM 94 to start the selected round performance. Set it in the command set area 94b.
When the round performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, if the round designation command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it has been received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). The "ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the ending performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, an ending performance pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and an ending performance start command for starting the selected ending performance is set in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-described ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the gaming state designation command, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives information regarding the gaming state included in the gaming state designation command (whether or not it is a high probability state, whether it is a time saving state, counter, time saving counter value, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 causes the sub-RAM 94 to hold information about passing the V when receiving the V passing command. Further, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.) and ends this processing.

[Ahead production decision processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the pre-read effect determination process (FIG. 37: Step S4420). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs advance determination information rewriting processing (step S4601). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the jackpot preliminary judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type preliminary judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c. In addition to the above-mentioned jackpot judgment information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information, the advance judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-read performance pattern information. The pre-read effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the pre-read effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604, which will be described later. FIG. 39(A) shows that the jackpot judgment information “Lose” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third pieces as preliminary judgment results corresponding to the first to third pieces of special drawing 2 pending. A state is shown in which the data is stored in a storage area, and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area. FIG. 39(B) shows that from the state of FIG. 39(A), special drawing 2 has won, and the preliminary judgment information included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80 is added to the fourth special drawing 2 pending. A state in which the data is stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as advance judgment information, jackpot judgment information “Jackpot” and jackpot type information “2
1H" and fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored. In addition, "Pattern A" is added as pre-read performance pattern information to the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth special drawings 2 pending and the area corresponding to the fluctuation. " is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the variation has ended from the state in FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the preliminary determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the corresponding area, the preliminary determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the preliminary determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas. 4. Pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: Step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the performance control microcomputer 91 then determines whether pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the corresponding area of the advance determination information storage area 94c, or any of the first to fourth storage areas. If the prefetch effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, if the pre-read effect pattern information is stored in the corresponding area of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, or any of the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-read effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read performance pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is a "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "reach with reach" (step S4603). Whether it is a "big hit" or "a hit with a reach" can be determined, for example, based on the variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). If the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach loss" (step S4603: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead performance. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-judgment command is "Jackpot" or "Lose with reach" (step S4603: YES), a pre-read effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the pre-read effect; Then, prefetch effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the pre-read performance random number random number, and performs the pre-read performance by referring to the acquired random number value and the pre-read performance pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93. It is determined whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern when performing the pre-reading effect.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-judgment result is "Jackpot" and the pre-read effect random number is "0-55", the pre-read effect is "none", and if the pre-read effect random value is "56-67", the pre-read effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the pre-read effect random number is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-read effect. In addition, if the pre-judgment result is "Less with reach" and the pre-reading effect random number is "0-107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", the pre-reading effect will be When "Pattern A" is selected and the pre-read effect random number is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-read effect. Note that the type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-read effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected pre-read effect pattern is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when storing the pre-read effect pattern in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-judgment command among the first to fourth storage areas but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area are stored. A prefetch effect pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), "pattern A" is not only set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received advance determination command, but also in the first to third storage areas and the corresponding area. Set "Pattern A" to "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effects that are executed before the variable effects corresponding to the fourth storage area (variable effects corresponding to this area and the first to third storage areas). . Note that whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing to execute the pre-read effect has already passed, the pre-read effect will not be executed, but if it is before the timing to execute the pre-read effect, it will be executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. In step S4604, if it is determined that the prefetch effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variable effect start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: Step S4460). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current gaming state, symbol information indicating the symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, and the like. The gaming state information and symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs basic performance pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic performance pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable performance (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display of predetermined characters and their movements, the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67) , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable performance is completed by superimposing additional performances such as chance-up production and look-ahead production on top of this basic production. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the basic performance pattern by referring to the basic performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic performance pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform normal reach performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP1 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP2 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP3 performance, Multiple types of basic performance patterns are set that perform no-reach performance. The type of basic performance pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, if the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic performance pattern for performing the SP1 performance is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", a basic performance pattern that performs a no-reach performance is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up performance pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance up random number counter, and determines the chance up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number and the chance up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only a portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation patterns included in the variation start command are "P1" to "P16". The chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 includes a portion that determines the chance-up performance pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". You may or may not be prepared.

In Figure 43, the chance-up effect patterns are "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", " 4-NO,” “4-SP1,” “4-SP2,” “4-SP3,” and “ANO” are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and determines the combination of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be stopped and displayed. may be determined. Based on these, it is determined what kind of performance will be performed as a variable performance.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized. Step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 starts the variable effect image. The data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a variable production timer (step S5030), and ends this process. A variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", the variation effect timer is set to "40 seconds".

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the process during fluctuation performance (FIG. 36: Step S4305). The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable performance is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the variable performance is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer has reached zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variable performance is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the command before the end of variation in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command from which the production control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 etc. that it is a specific timing during the variation production, and when the image control board 100 receives the variation before end command. In accordance with the information included in the pre-variation end command, the content of the presentation is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc.

If it is not the timing to set the before-variation-end command (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the timing to set the before-variation-end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-read effect pattern information in the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation end command that does not include pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variable effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a prefetch effect that displays a prefetch effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect to fade the preview image.

8. Operation of the image control microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIG. 45. Buffers and the like that appear in the explanation of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of display control processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after CPU initialization processing, display control processing is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variable effect start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If it has been received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts displaying a variable effect (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, reads out a predetermined variable effect image instructed in the variable effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-variation end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts displaying a prefetch effect (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-variation end command, and if the pre-variation end command includes pre-read effect pattern information, reads a predetermined pre-read effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device. 7 on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, even if the pre-variation end command does not include look-ahead effect pattern information, if a preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a preview fade effect that fades the preview image is performed. Let's do it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5003: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variable effect end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If it has been received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads from the ROM 103 the image in which the variable effect is stopped and displayed, and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to display the variable effect stop display. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5005: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, it reads a predetermined opening effect image instructed by the opening effect start command from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a. Further, when a round performance start command is received, a predetermined round performance image instructed in the round performance start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image specified in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a, and this process is ended.

9. Operation of the board movable body (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) Regarding the operation of the board movable body (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) using FIGS. 46 to 49 explain. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the first aspect of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 during game performance (display performance), initial operation at power-on, and the like.

The first movable accessory 14 includes two transparent plate members: a left side plate member 14L and a right side plate member 14R. Here, the term "transparent plate member" means that at least a portion of an image, etc. located on the opposite side of the plate member can be seen through the plate member, and the image on the opposite side can be seen through the plate member. It does not have to be completely transparent; it may be slightly transparent. As shown in FIG. 46, the first movable accessory 14 can be stopped at a first position covering a part of the display screen 7a by the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R (first mode). At this time, the left side plate member 14L is located in front of the left side portion of the display screen 7a and covers a part of the left side portion of the display screen 7a. Further, the right side plate member 14R is located in front of the right side portion of the display screen 7a, and covers a part of the right side portion of the display screen 7a. From the state shown in FIG. 46, the first movable accessory 14 can come to rest at the second position shown in FIG. 47 by moving the left side plate member 14L further to the right and moving the right side plate member 14R further to the left. Yes (second aspect). In this second position, the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R are in contact with each other, and the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R are located in front of the display screen 7a. Thereby, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. On the other hand, by retracting the left side plate member 14L to the left side and retracting the right side plate member 14R to the right side, it is possible to stand still at the third position (home position) shown in FIG. 48 (third mode). In this third position, the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R are in a state where it is difficult for the player to see them. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that the area covering the display screen 7a increases as the first movable accessory 14 changes in order from the third mode to the first mode to the second mode.

The second movable accessory 15 includes a rotating body with a face drawn on it. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 46, the second movable accessory 15 can stand still at a first position (home position) where the rotating body is stored in the center decorative body 10 (first mode). At this time, a portion of the lower side of the rotating body becomes visible. In the second movable accessory 15, the rotating body advances downward from the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 46, and a rotating effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 48 in front of the display screen 7a (second mode) . When the first movable accessory 14 is in the second mode and the second movable accessory 15 is in the second mode, as shown in FIG. 49, the rotating body of the second movable accessory 15 is rotated. becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14. In this way, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can perform a combination effect by combining each other's movements.

10. Production Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Mode Examples of the Present Embodiment Each production example (display production example, role object movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, examples of effects, modifications, and examples of aspects of the production example will also be explained. As mentioned above, the performance that will be described below is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, fluctuation pattern information, preliminary determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, in some display presentation examples, a hold display (hold icon) may be omitted.

The pending image transparent visual recognition performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 50 to 52. This pending image transparent visual recognition performance can be executed during a decorative pattern variation performance, a reach performance (super reach performance), or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the pending image transparent visual recognition effect, reads the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103. This is an effect in which the image is read out and displayed on the display screen 7a, and the movable accessory is made to perform a predetermined action.

[Pending image transparent visualization effect A]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the pending image transparent visual recognition effect A. In the held image transmission visualization effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 50(A), a held image (held icon) 9A and a held digested image (the held image) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the home position (third mode), making it difficult for the player to see the first movable accessory 14. From this state, as shown in FIG. 50(B), the first movable accessory 14 advances and stops at the first position covering a part of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, the left side plate member 14L of the first movable accessory 14 covers a part of the pending image 9C, and the right side plate member 14R of the first movable accessory 14 covers a part of the pending icon 9A. Thereby, a part of the hold image 9C becomes visible through the left side plate member 14L, and a part of the hold icon 9A becomes visible through the right side board member 14R.

Next, the color correspondence effect shown in FIG. 50(C) is executed. In the color-corresponding effect, a specific image IMG is further displayed on the display screen 7a while a pending image (pending icon) 9A and a pending digested image (the pending image) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. The specific image IMG is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of an arrow. Note that a specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, letters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. etc. are also included. A portion of the specific image IMG is displayed on a portion of the display screen 7a covered by the right side plate member 14R of the first movable accessory 14, and is visible through the right side plate member 14R.

The specific image IMG is a linear image, and is displayed so that the base end side protrudes from the display screen 7a. The color of the specific image IMG is the same as the color of the pending image 9C. Here, both the specific image IMG and the pending image 9C are red. Note that the color of the specific image IMG and the color of the pending image 9C do not need to be the same from the time the specific image IMG is displayed, and the color of at least one of the specific image IMG and the pending image 9C has changed. They may be the same color.

Next, the entire transparent visual recognition effect shown in FIG. 50(D) is executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 advances further from the first mode and comes to rest at a second position where the entire display screen 7a is covered by the first movable accessory 14 (second mode). At this time, the left side plate member 14L of the first movable accessory 14 covers the entire pending image 9C, and the right side plate member 14R of the first movable accessory 14 covers the entire pending icon 9A. Further, the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R cover the entire specific image IMG. Thereby, the entire pending image 9C becomes visible via the left side plate member 14L, and the entire pending icon 9A becomes visible via the right side plate member 14R. Moreover, the entire specific image IMG becomes visible via the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R.

[Pending image transparent visualization effect B]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the pending image transparent visual recognition effect B. Compared with the pending image transparent visual recognition performance A in FIG. The operation contents are different. As shown in FIG. 51(A), a hold icon 9A, the hold image 9C, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the home position (third mode), making it difficult for the player to see the first movable accessory 14. From this state, as shown in FIG. 51(B), the first movable accessory 14 advances and stops at the first position covering a part of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, the left side plate member 14L of the first movable accessory 14 covers a part of the pending image 9C, and the right side plate member 14R of the first movable accessory 14 covers a part of the pending icon 9A. Thereby, a portion of the pending image 9C becomes visible via the left side plate member 14L, and a portion of the pending icon 9A becomes visible via the right side panel member 14R. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not covered by the first movable accessory 14.

Next, the color correspondence effect shown in FIG. 51(C) is executed. Here, the first movable accessory 14 advances further and the area covering the display screen 7a increases. Note that even after advancing, the first movable accessory 14 does not cover the entire display screen 7a, but only partially covers the display screen 7a (first mode). On the display screen 7a, a specific image IMG is further displayed in a state where a pending image (pending icon) 9A and a pending digested image (the pending image) 9C are displayed. Here, the direction of the arrow represented by the specific image IMG points toward the hold icon 9A. A portion of the specific image IMG on the distal side is visible through the right side plate member 14R, and a portion on the proximal side of the specific image IMG is visible via the left side plate member 14L.

The specific image IMG is a linear image, and is displayed with the proximal end protruding from the display screen 7a. The color of the specific image IMG is the same color as one of the pending icons 9A. Note that the color of the specific image IMG and the color of one of the pending icons 9A do not need to be the same color from the time the specific image IMG is displayed, and the color of at least one of the specific image IMG and the pending icon 9A may change. They may be the same color. Parts of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are covered by the first movable accessory 14.

Next, the entire transparent visual recognition effect shown in FIG. 51(D) is executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 advances further from the first mode and comes to rest at a second position where the entire display screen 7a is covered by the first movable accessory 14 (second mode). At this time, the left side plate member 14L of the first movable accessory 14 covers the entire pending image 9C, and the right side plate member 14R of the first movable accessory 14 covers the entire pending icon 9A. Thereby, the entire pending image 9C becomes visible via the left side plate member 14L, and the entire pending icon 9A becomes visible via the right side plate member 14R. The specific image IMG is not displayed.

[Pending image transparent visualization effect C]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the pending image transparent visual recognition effect C. The held image transparent visual recognition effect C differs from the held image transparent visual recognition effect A in FIG. 50 in the shape of the specific image IMG. As shown in FIG. 52(A), a hold icon 9A and the hold image 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the home position (third mode), making it difficult for the player to see the first movable accessory 14. From this state, as shown in FIG. 52(B), the first movable accessory 14 advances and stops at the first position covering a part of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, the left side plate member 14L of the first movable accessory 14 covers a part of the pending image 9C, and the right side plate member 14R of the first movable accessory 14 covers a part of the pending icon 9A. Thereby, a portion of the pending image 9C becomes visible via the left side plate member 14L, and a portion of the pending icon 9A becomes visible via the right side panel member 14R. A specific image IMG is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. Here, the specific image IMG has a star shape. The specific image IMG is displayed so that a portion thereof protrudes from the display screen 7a. The color of the specific image IMG is the same as the color of the pending image 9C. Note that the color of the specific image IMG and the color of the pending image 9C do not need to be the same from the time the specific image IMG is displayed, and the color of at least one of the specific image IMG and the pending image 9C has changed. They may be the same color.

Next, a specific image movement effect shown in FIG. 52(C) is executed. Specifically, the specific image IMG appearing from the upper right of the display screen 7a moves toward the lower left. Then, the entire transparent visual recognition effect shown in FIG. 52(D) is executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 advances further from the first mode and comes to rest at a second position where the entire display screen 7a is covered by the first movable accessory 14 (second mode). At this time, the left side plate member 14L of the first movable accessory 14 covers the entire pending image 9C, and the right side plate member 14R of the first movable accessory 14 covers the entire pending icon 9A. Thereby, the entire pending image 9C becomes visible via the left side plate member 14L, and the entire pending icon 9A becomes visible via the right side plate member 14R. Further, the entire specific image IMG becomes visible through the left side plate member 14L.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending image transparent visual recognition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, when the pending image 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a, a part of the pending image 9C is It is possible to perform a visually recognizable performance. Further, when the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a, a part of the hold icon 9A can be made visible through the first movable accessory 14. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the first movable accessory 14 is a movable accessory that can transition between the first mode and the second mode, and the first movable accessory 14 is a movable accessory that can transition from the first mode to the second mode. When transitioning to the second mode, the area covering the front surface of the display screen 7a is configured to increase, and when the first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, a part of the reserved image 9C becomes the first movable accessory 14. When the first movable accessory 14 is in the second mode, the entire pending image 9C becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14. Further, when the first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, a part of the hold icon 9A becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14, and when the first movable accessory 14 is in the second mode, the hold icon 9A The entirety becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 52, it is possible to perform an effect in which a part of the pending image 9C becomes visible via the first movable accessory 14. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, in a state where the pending image 9C or the pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a, the specific image IMG is further displayed on the display screen 7a. displayed, and at least a portion of the specific image IMG becomes visible via the first movable accessory 14. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the color of the specific image IMG corresponds to the color of the pending image 9C or the pending icon 9A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the first movable accessory 14 is a left side plate member 14L that has transparency and is located in front of the display screen 7a, and a right side plate member 14L, which has transparency and is located in front of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9C becomes visible via the front left side plate member 14L, and the specific image IMG becomes visible via the right side plate member 14R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the pending image transparent visual recognition effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the pending digest image 9C and the pending icon 9A are displayed, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the third mode to the first mode, and the pending digest image 9C and the pending icon 9A are moved. A part of the movable accessory 14 is made visible through the first movable accessory 14. However, when the first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, the pending digest image 9C and the pending icon 9A are displayed, or by moving the pending digest image 9C and the pending icon 9A, a portion of these may be displayed. may become visible via the first movable accessory 14.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, a portion of the pending digested image 9C and the pending icon 9A become visible through the first movable accessory 14. However, when the first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, the entirety of at least one of the reserved digested image 9C and the reserved icon 9A may become visible via the first movable accessory 14.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, a part of both the pending digested image 9C and the pending icon 9A becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14. I took it as a thing. However, when the first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, one of the pending digested image 9C and the pending icon 9A does not need to become visible via the first movable accessory 14.

[Modification 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the entire transparent visual recognition effect is executed after the color corresponding effect. However, the overall visual recognition effect may not be performed after the color correspondence effect. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the color of the specific image IMG corresponds to the color of the pending image 9C or the pending icon 9A. However, the color of at least one of the pending image 9C and the pending icon 9A may change to correspond to the color of the specific image IMG. Note that the colors of the pending image 9C and the pending icon 9A do not need to correspond to the color of the specific image IMG. Further, the specific image IMG does not need to be displayed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a transparent accessory,
One of the plurality of types of images is a reserved image,
When the pending image is displayed on the display means, at least a portion of the pending image is visible through the accessory;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
The accessory is a movable accessory that can transition between a first state and a second state, and when the accessory changes from the first state to the second state, the area covering the front surface of the display means increases. is configured to
When the accessory is in the first state, a part of the reserved image becomes visible through the accessory,
When the accessory is in the second state, the entire suspended image becomes visible through the accessory.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2,
The pending image is the pending image corresponding to the pending image,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific object,
In a state in which the reserved image is displayed on the display means, the specific image is further displayed on the display means, and at least a part of the specific image becomes visible through the accessory.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4,
The color of the specific image corresponds to the color of the reserved image,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4,
The accessory includes a first plate member and a second plate member, each of which has transparency and is located in front of the display means,
The held image becomes visible through the first plate member,
The specific image becomes visible through the second plate member,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The accessory transparent visual recognition performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 53 to 55. This role-transparent visual recognition performance can be executed during a variation performance of decorative symbols, a reach performance (super reach performance), or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the role-transparent visual recognition effect, reads out the corresponding drive data from the ROM 103 and starts the movement. This is a performance in which a role model is made to perform a predetermined action.

[Accessory object transparent visual recognition performance A]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the transparent visual recognition effect A of the accessory. In the accessory transparent visual recognition performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 53(A), both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are in the first mode. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at a first position covering a part of the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is at rest at a first position where the rotating body is stored in the center decorative body 10. It is stationary at the 1st position (home position). A specific image IMG is displayed on the display screen 7a. The specific image IMG is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a star. Note that a specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, letters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. etc. are also included. The specific image IMG is not covered by the first movable accessory 14.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(B), the first movable accessory 14 assumes the second mode. Specifically, the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen 7a is covered by the first movable accessory 14. Thereby, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes visible via the first movable accessory 14, and the entire specific image IMG becomes visible via the first movable accessory 14.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(C), the second movable accessory 15 assumes the second mode. Specifically, the rotating body of the second movable accessory 15 moves downward. Thereby, the entire second movable accessory 15 becomes visible via the first movable accessory 14. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(D), a rotation performance using the rotating body of the second movable accessory 15 is performed near the center of the front of the display screen 7a. The rotation of the rotating body of the second movable accessory 15 is visible through the first movable accessory 14.

[Accessory object transparent visual recognition performance B]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the transparent visual recognition effect B of the accessory object. The accessory transparent visual recognition performance B differs from the accessory transparent visual recognition performance A in FIG. 53 in the order in which each of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 transitions to the second mode. As shown in FIG. 54(A), both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are in the first mode. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at a first position covering a part of the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is at rest at a first position where the rotating body is stored in the center decorative body 10. It is stationary at the 1st position (home position). A specific image IMG is displayed on the display screen 7a. The specific image IMG is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a star. Note that a specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, letters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. etc. are also included. The specific image IMG is not covered by the first movable accessory 14.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(B), the second movable accessory 15 assumes the second mode. Specifically, the rotating body of the second movable accessory 15 moves downward. Next, as shown in FIG. 54(C), the first movable accessory 14 assumes the second mode. Specifically, the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen 7a is covered by the first movable accessory 14. Thereby, the entire second movable accessory 15 becomes visible via the first movable accessory 14, and the entire specific image IMG becomes visible via the first movable accessory 14. Then, as shown in FIG. 54(D), a rotation performance using the rotating body of the second movable accessory 15 is performed near the center of the front of the display screen 7a. The rotation of the rotating body of the second movable accessory 15 is visible through the first movable accessory 14.

[Accessory object transparent visibility production C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the accessory transparent visual recognition effect C. The accessory transparent visual recognition effect C differs from the accessory transparent visual recognition effect A in FIG. 53 in the state of the first aspect of the first movable accessory 14. As shown in FIG. 55(A), both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are in the first mode. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at a first position covering a part of the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is at rest at a first position where the rotating body is stored in the center decorative body 10. It is stationary at the 1st position (home position). At this time, the first movable accessory 14 has a larger area covering part of the display screen 7a, and covers a part of the second movable accessory 15, compared to the accessory transparent visual recognition effect A in FIG. . In other words, here, a part of the second movable accessory 15 is visible through the first movable accessory 14. A specific image IMG is displayed on the display screen 7a. The specific image IMG is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a star. Note that a specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, letters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. etc. are also included. The first movable accessory 14 covers a portion of the specific image IMG. In other words, a portion of the specific image IMG is visible via the first movable accessory 14.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(B), the second movable accessory 15 assumes the second mode. Specifically, the rotating body of the second movable accessory 15 moves downward. Also near the center of the front of the display screen 7a, a portion of the second movable accessory 15 is visible via the first movable accessory 14. Next, as shown in FIG. 55(C), the first movable accessory 14 assumes the second mode. Specifically, the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen 7a is covered by the first movable accessory 14. Thereby, the entire second movable accessory 15 becomes visible via the first movable accessory 14, and the entire specific image IMG becomes visible via the first movable accessory 14. Then, as shown in FIG. 55(D), a rotation effect by the rotating body of the second movable accessory 15 is performed near the center of the front of the display screen 7a. The rotation of the rotating body of the second movable accessory 15 is visible through the first movable accessory 14. Further, at this time, the position, size, and color of the specific image IMG change. This change is visible through the first movable accessory 14.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the role object transparent visual recognition effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a first movable accessory 14 having transparency and a second movable accessory 15. A first performance in which a portion of the second movable accessory 15 becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14, and a second performance in which the entire second movable accessory 15 becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14. Configured to be executable. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the first movable accessory 14 can transition between the first mode and the second mode, and from the first mode to the second mode. When the transition occurs, the area covering the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 is configured to increase, and in the first performance, the first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, and in the second performance, the area covering the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 increases. , the first movable accessory 14 is in the second mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the second movable accessory 15 moves between the first position (first aspect) and the second position (second aspect). It is movable, and in the first performance, the second movable accessory 15 is located at the first position, and in the second performance, the second movable accessory 15 is located at the second position. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the second movable accessory 15 is configured to be rotatable, and in the second performance, the second movable accessory 15 is rotated. 15 becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
As shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a display screen 7a capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and the specific image IMG displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the first movable accessory 14. It is possible to execute a third effect that becomes visible through the . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the transparent visual recognition effect of the accessory is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the second movable accessory 15 transitions from the first mode to the second mode, the rotating body moves downward without rotating and is positioned near the center of the display screen 7a. After that, the rotation will start. However, when the second movable accessory 15 transitions from the first mode to the second mode, the rotating body moves downward while rotating, and continues to rotate even after being located near the center of the display screen 7a. It may be.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the first movable accessory 14 is constituted by two plate members, the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R. However, the first movable accessory 14 may be composed of three or more plate members.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is assumed that the specific image IMG is displayed. However, the specific image IMG may not be displayed, or a plurality of specific images IMG may be displayed. Moreover, the shape may change.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A2-1]
a first movable accessory having transparency;
A gaming machine comprising a second movable accessory,
a first effect in which a portion of the second movable accessory becomes visible through the first movable accessory;
A gaming machine capable of executing a second effect in which the entire second movable accessory becomes visible through the first movable accessory.
◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
The first movable accessory is capable of transitioning between a first state and a second state, and when transitioning from the first state to the second state, the front surface of the second movable accessory is It is configured to increase the area covered,
In the first performance, the first movable accessory is in the first state,
In the second performance, the first movable accessory is in the second state,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
The second movable accessory is movable between a first position and a second position,
In the first performance, the second movable accessory is located at the first position,
In the second performance, the second movable accessory is located at the second position,
A gaming machine characterized by:
.
◇[Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
The second movable accessory is configured to be rotatable,
In the second performance, the second movable accessory in a rotated state becomes visible through the first movable accessory,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-4 further includes:
Equipped with display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific object,
capable of executing a third effect in which the specific image displayed on the display means becomes visible via the first movable accessory;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific image transparent visual recognition effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 56 to 58. This specific image transparent visual recognition performance can be executed during a decorative pattern variation performance, a reach performance (super reach performance), or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific image transparent visual recognition effect, reads the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103. This is an effect in which the image is read out and displayed on the display screen 7a, and the movable accessory is made to perform a predetermined action.

[Specific image transparent visual recognition effect A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining specific image transparent visual recognition effect A. In the specific image transmission visualization effect A, first, the first specific image appearance effect shown in FIG. 56(A) is executed. In the first specific image appearance effect, a first specific image IC1, a first character image IW1, and a second character image IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The first specific image IC1 is displayed at a first position near the center of the display screen 7a. The first specific image IC1 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a face. Note that a specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, letters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. etc. are also included. The character images IW1 and IW2 are images composed of characters, and the combination of characters can have any configuration. At this time, the first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode and is stationary at the first position covering a part of the display screen 7a. The first specific image IC1 and the first character image IW1 are not covered by the first movable accessory 14, but a portion of the second character image IW2 is covered by the first movable accessory 14 (left side plate member 14L). It is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (left side plate member 14L). The first character image IW1 and the second character image IW2 are not displayed overlapping the first specific image IC1.

Next, the second specific image appearance effect shown in FIG. 56(B) is executed. Specifically, the first specific image IC1 disappears from the first position on the display screen 7a, and the second specific image IC2 is displayed at the second position on the display screen 7a. The second specific image IC2 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents a larger face shape than the first specific image IC1. A portion of the second specific image IC2 is covered by the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R) and is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R). The first character image IW1 and the second character image IW2 are not displayed overlapping the second specific image IC2.

Next, the third specific image appearance effect shown in FIG. 56(C) is executed. Specifically, the second specific image IC2 disappears from the second position on the display screen 7a, and the third specific image IC3 is displayed at the third position on the display screen 7a. The third specific image IC3 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents a larger face shape than the second specific image IC2. A portion of the third specific image IC3 is covered by the first movable accessory 14 (left side plate member 14L) and is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (left side plate member 14L). The first character image IW1 and the second character image IW2 are displayed in an enlarged manner. The second character image IW2 is displayed overlapping with the third specific image IC3. Next, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 56(D) is executed. Specifically, countdown image ID1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. In the countdown image ID1, the displayed numbers are sequentially decremented. The numbers in the countdown image ID1 can be in any format such as Kanji or Roman characters.

[Specific image transparent visual recognition effect B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining specific image transparent visual recognition effect B. The specific image transparent visual recognition performance B differs from the specific image transparent visual recognition performance A in FIG. 56 in the timing at which the first specific image IC1 and the second specific image IC2 disappear. The first specific image appearance effect in FIG. 57(A) is the same as the specific image transparent visual recognition effect A in FIG. 56. That is, the first specific image IC1 is displayed at the first position of the display screen 7a, and the first character image IW1 and the second character image IW2 are also displayed. A portion of the second character image IW2 is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (left side plate member 14L).

Next, the second specific image appearance effect shown in FIG. 57(B) is executed. Specifically, while the first specific image IC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the second specific image IC2 is displayed at the second position on the display screen 7a. The second specific image IC2 is an image representing a specific object, and is larger than the first specific image IC1. A portion of the second specific image IC2 is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R).

Next, the third specific image appearance effect shown in FIG. 57(C) is executed. Specifically, while the first specific image IC1 and the second specific image IC2 are displayed on the display screen 7a, the third specific image IC3 is displayed at the third position on the display screen 7a. The third specific image IC3 is an image representing a specific object, and is larger than the second specific image IC2. A portion of the third specific image IC3 is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (left side plate member 14L). The first character image IW1 and the second character image IW2 are displayed in an enlarged manner. The second character image IW2 is displayed overlapping with the third specific image IC3. Next, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 57(D) is executed. Specifically, countdown image ID1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. In the countdown image ID1, the displayed numbers are sequentially decremented.

[Specific image transparent visual recognition effect C]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining specific image transparent visual recognition effect C. The specific image transparent visual recognition effect C differs from the specific image transparent visual recognition effect A in FIG. 56 in the manner in which the specific image changes. In the specific image appearance effect shown in FIG. 58(A), a specific image IC1 is displayed at the first position of the display screen 7a, and a first character image IW1 and a second character image IW2 are also displayed. A portion of the second character image IW2 is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (left side plate member 14L).

Next, the specific image first movement effect shown in FIG. 58(B) is executed. Specifically, the specific image IC1 moves from the first position to the second position. A portion of the specific image IC1 after the movement becomes visible via the right side plate member 14R of the first movable accessory 14. Next, the specific image second movement effect shown in FIG. 58(C) is executed. Specifically, the specific image IC1 moves from the second position to the third position. A portion of the specific image IC1 after the movement becomes visible via the first movable accessory 14 (left side plate member 14L). The first character image IW1 and the second character image IW2 are displayed in an enlarged manner. Next, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 58(D) is executed. Specifically, countdown image ID1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. In the countdown image ID1, the displayed numbers are sequentially decremented.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of specific image transparent visual recognition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, a first effect in which the first specific image IC1 is displayed at the first position of the display screen 7a, and after the first effect, A second effect in which the second specific image IC2 is displayed at a second position on the display screen 7a can be executed, and in the second effect, at least a part of the second specific image IC2 is the first movable accessory. It becomes visible through 14. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, after the second effect, a third effect is executed in which the third specific image IC3 is displayed at the third position of the display screen 7a. It is possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, in the third effect, at least a portion of the third specific image IC3 becomes visible via the first movable accessory 14. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the same character images IW1 and IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a in the first effect and the second effect, and the first specific image IC1 and second specific image IC2 are not displayed overlapping character images IW1 and IW2.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, in the third effect, the second character image IW2 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the third specific image IW3 is the second character image IW2. It is displayed overlapping with image IW2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the first movable accessory 14 has a right side plate member 14R and a left side plate member 14R, which have transparency and are located in front of the display screen 7a. A portion of the second specific image IC2 is visible through the right side plate member 14R, and a portion of the third specific image IC3 is visible through the left side plate member 14L. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the specific image transparent visual recognition effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the specific image transmission visualization effect C shown in FIG. 58, it is assumed that the same image (specific image IC1) moves. However, in the specific image transmission visualization effect C in FIG. 58, even if the first specific image IC1 moves and then changes to the second specific image IC2, and the second specific image IC2 moves and changes to the third specific image IC3, good. The mode of change may be arbitrary. For example, the size may change or the color may change. Furthermore, the second specific image IC2 may be displayed by the first specific image IC1 disappearing once during movement. In this case, the first specific image IC1 and the second specific image IC2 may be images in the same manner. The same applies to the third specific image IC3.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the first movable accessory 14 is constituted by two plate members, the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R. However, the first movable accessory 14 may be composed of three or more plate members.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, character images IW1 and IW2 are displayed. However, the character images IW1 and IW2 may not be displayed, or may be displayed at three or more locations.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A3-1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a transparent accessory,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific object,
a first effect in which the first specific image is displayed at a first position of the display means;
After the first performance, a second performance in which a second specific image is displayed at a second position of the display means can be performed;
In the second production, at least a portion of the second specific image becomes visible through the accessory;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
After the second performance, it is possible to perform a third performance in which a third specific image is displayed at a third position of the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-2,
In the third performance, at least a portion of the third specific image becomes visible through the accessory.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
In the first effect and the second effect, the same character image is displayed on the display means, and the first specific image and the second specific image are not displayed in an overlapping manner with the character image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-2 or aspect A3-3,
In the third effect, a character image is displayed on the display means, and the third specific image is displayed in an overlapping manner with the character image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-2 or aspect A3-3,
The accessory includes a first plate member and a second plate member, each of which has transparency and is located in front of the display means,
A portion of the second specific image becomes visible through the first plate member,
A portion of the third specific image becomes visible through the second plate member,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The suggested image transparent visual recognition effects A to C will be described below using FIGS. 59 to 61. This suggestive image transparent visual recognition performance can be executed during a decorative pattern variation performance, a reach performance (super reach performance), or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the suggested image transparent visual recognition effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it. This is a display effect displayed on the screen 7a.

[Suggestive image transparent visualization production A]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the suggested image transparent visual recognition effect A. In the suggested image transparent visual recognition effect A, first, the suggested image display effect shown in FIG. 59(A) is executed. In the suggestion image display performance, a suggestion image IS1 and an acquired pitch count image BA1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Suggestion image IS1 is an image that suggests to the player to play right-handed. The number of balls acquired image BA1 represents the number of balls acquired by the player in a series of winning games. The suggestion image IS1 is configured to include a rectangular portion in which “Right-handling” is written and a triangular portion indicating the right direction. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. A part of the suggested image IS1 (triangular part) is covered by the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R) and is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R). ing.

Next, the suggested image expansion effect shown in FIG. 59(B) is executed. Specifically, the suggested image IS1 is deformed so that the horizontal length of a portion (a triangular portion) becomes longer. As a result, the area of the portion (region) of the suggestion image IS1 that is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R) increases. Next, the suggested image contraction effect shown in FIG. 59(C) is executed. Specifically, the suggested image IS1 is deformed so that the horizontal length of a portion (a triangular portion) is shortened. As a result, the area of the portion (region) of the suggestion image IS1 that is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R) is reduced. In this way, the shape of the suggestion image IS1 changes so that the expansion shown in FIG. 59(B) and the contraction shown in FIG. 59(C) are repeated. As a result, the area of the portion (region) of the suggestion image IS1 that is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R) is increased or decreased multiple times.

After the expansion and contraction of the suggestion image IS1 is repeated a plurality of times as described above, the suggestion image movement effect shown in FIG. 59(D) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image IS1 is displayed in a reduced size and moved toward the upper right. At this time, the suggestion image IS1 is not covered by the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R). Thereafter, the suggested image transparent visual recognition effect shown in FIG. 59(E) is executed. Specifically, by moving the suggestion image IS1 in the upper right direction, a part of the suggestion image IS1 is covered by the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R), and the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R) is covered with the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R). Visible through. Next, the suggested image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 59(F) is executed. Specifically, by moving the suggestion image IS1 upward, the suggestion image IS1 and the acquired pitch count image BA1 are displayed in a superimposed manner. In other words, a portion of the suggestion image IS1 is temporarily covered by the acquired pitch count image BA1, making it difficult to see.

[Suggestive image transparent visual recognition effect B]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining suggested image transparent visual recognition effect B. Suggestive image transparent visual recognition performance B differs from suggested image transparent visual recognition performance A in FIG. 59 in the display mode of the suggested image IS1. In the suggestion image display effect of FIG. 60(A), in addition to the first suggestion image IS1 and the acquired pitch count image BA1, a second suggestion image IS2 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The first suggestion image IS1 and the second suggestion image IS2 are configured to include a rectangular portion in which “Right-handling” is written and a triangular portion indicating the right direction. As shown in FIGS. 60(B) and 60(C), the first suggested image IS1 and the second suggested image IS2 appear from the left end of the display screen 7a and move to the right while maintaining a constant distance. do. Then, the frames are sequentially taken out from the right end of the display screen 7a. As a result, the area of the portion (region) of the first suggestion image IS1 that is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R) increases or decreases. In addition, the area of the portion (region) of the second suggestion image IS2 that is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R) increases or decreases.

After the rightward movement of the first suggestion image IS1 and the second suggestion image IS2 continues for a certain period of time as described above, the suggestion image movement effect shown in FIG. 60(D) is executed. Specifically, the second suggestion image IS2 is displayed in a reduced size and moved toward the upper right. At this time, the second suggestion image IS2 is not covered by the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R). Thereafter, the suggested image transparent visual recognition effect shown in FIG. 60(E) is executed. Specifically, by moving the second suggestion image IS2 in the upper right direction, a part of the second suggestion image IS2 is covered by the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R), and the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R) covers a part of the second suggestion image IS2. It becomes visible through the member 14R). Next, the suggested image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 60(F) is executed. Specifically, by moving the second suggestion image IS2 upward, the second suggestion image IS2 and the acquired pitch count image BA1 are displayed in a superimposed manner. In other words, a portion of the suggestion image IS1 is temporarily covered by the acquired pitch count image BA1, making it difficult to see.

[Suggestive image transparent visualization production C]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the suggested image transparent visual recognition effect C. Suggestive image transparent visual recognition performance C differs from suggested image transparent visual recognition performance A in FIG. 59 in the display mode of the suggested image IS1. In the suggestion image display effect of FIG. 61(A), a suggestion image IS1 and an acquired pitch count image BA1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Suggestion image IS1 includes a text portion that reads “Right-handed” and an arrow portion indicating the right direction. The arrow portion of this suggestion image IS1 repeats the expansion and contraction of FIG. 61(B) and FIG. 61(C). This causes it to expand and contract in the horizontal direction, as shown in . As a result, the area of the portion (region) of the suggestion image IS1 that is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R) is increased or decreased multiple times.

After the expansion and contraction of the suggestion image IS1 is repeated multiple times as described above, the suggestion image movement effect shown in FIG. 61(D) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image IS1 is displayed in a reduced size and moved toward the upper right. At this time, the suggestion image IS1 is not covered by the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R). Thereafter, the suggested image transparent visual recognition effect shown in FIG. 61(E) is executed. Specifically, by moving the suggestion image IS1 in the upper right direction, a part of the suggestion image IS1 is covered by the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R), and the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R) is covered with the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R). Visible through. Next, the suggested image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 61(F) is executed. Specifically, by moving the suggestion image IS1 upward, the suggestion image IS1 and the acquired pitch count image BA1 are displayed in a superimposed manner. In other words, a portion of the suggestion image IS1 is temporarily covered by the acquired pitch count image BA1, making it difficult to see.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the suggested image transparent visual recognition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, when the suggestion image IS1 suggesting to shoot the game ball in a specific direction is displayed on the display screen 7a, the suggestion image IS1 It is possible to perform a first performance in which at least a portion of the first performance is made visible through the first movable accessory 14. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, in the first effect, a part of the suggestion image IS1 is visible through the first movable accessory 14, and part of the suggestion image IS1 is visible through the first movable accessory 14. , the area of the portion (region) that becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14 changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 61, in the first effect, the shape of the suggestion image IS1 changes so that the part that becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14 is Area changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, after the first effect, the image area of the suggestion image IS1 becomes smaller and the second image moves in the first direction within the display screen 7a. It is possible to perform the following. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, in the second effect, when the suggestion image IS1 is moving in the first direction, at least a portion of the first movable accessory 14 becomes visible through. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, in the second effect, an acquired ball number image BA1 representing the number of game balls acquired in the winning game is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the suggested image IS1 is moving in the first direction, a part of the suggested image IS1 is the number of pitches acquired image B.
Covered by A1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the suggested image transparent visual recognition effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the suggestion image IS1 is configured such that a portion thereof is visible through the first movable accessory 14. However, the entire suggestion image IS1 may become visible via the first movable accessory 14.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 is constituted by two plate members, the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R. However, the first movable accessory 14 may be composed of three or more plate members.

[Modification 3]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described on the assumption that the acquired ball count image BA1 is displayed. However, the acquired pitch count image BA1 does not have to be displayed, or a plurality of them may be displayed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A4-1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a transparent accessory,
One of the plurality of types of images is a suggestion image that suggests firing the game ball in a specific direction,
capable of executing a first effect in which at least a portion of the suggestion image becomes visible through the accessory when the suggestion image is displayed on the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
In the first effect, a portion of the suggested image is visible through the accessory, and the area of the portion of the suggested image that becomes visible through the accessory changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-2,
In the first effect, the area of the part that becomes visible through the accessory changes by changing the shape of the suggestion image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-3,
After the first effect, the image area of the suggested image becomes smaller, and a second effect can be executed in which the suggested image moves in the first direction within the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-4,
In the second effect, when the suggestion image is moving in the first direction, at least a portion of the suggestion image becomes visible through the accessory.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-4 or aspect A4-5,
One of the plurality of types of images is an acquired ball number image representing the number of game balls acquired in a winning game,
In the second effect, the acquired pitches image is displayed on the display means, and when the suggested image is moving in the first direction, a portion of the suggested image is covered by the acquired pitches image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The other three transparent visual effects will be described below using FIGS. 62 to 64. These three transparent visual recognition effects can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols, the ready-to-reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the transparent visual effect described later, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it. This is a display effect displayed on the screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern transparent visibility production]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern transparent visual recognition effect. In the decorative pattern transparent visual recognition effect, the decorative pattern stop display shown in FIG. 62(A) is executed. In the decorative pattern stop display, first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, second decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, suggestion image IS1, and acquired ball count image BA1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The suggestion image IS1 is an image that suggests the player to play right-handed. The number of balls acquired image BA1 represents the number of balls acquired by the player in a series of winning games. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. Parts of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible through the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R). Further, a part of the acquired pitch count image BA1 is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R). On the other hand, the second decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r and the suggestion image IS1 are not covered by the first movable accessory 14. That is, the second decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r and the suggestion image IS1 are displayed on the display screen 7a in a portion (area) in front of which the first movable accessory 14 is not located.

Next, the decorative pattern variation display shown in FIG. 62(B) is executed. Specifically, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner. Parts of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are being displayed in a variable manner are visible through the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R). Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the stop display of decorative patterns is started. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in order. Thereafter, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 62(D). Specifically, in the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a stopped state, and in the second decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, all three decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state.

[Performance content display transparent visual performance]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the performance content display transparent visual recognition performance. In the performance content display transparent visual performance, first, the performance content suggestion image transparent visual performance shown in FIG. 63(A) is executed. Here, first, a continuation suggestion image WP and a performance content suggestion image CGN are displayed on the display screen 7a. The continuation suggestion image WP is an image that suggests to the player that RUSH will continue. The performance content suggestion image CGN is an image that suggests to the player the content of a performance pattern that will be started in the future. Here, it is suggested that a production called angel mode will begin. The performance content suggestion image CGN is composed of a combination of a character image and a speech balloon image, and the production content is displayed in the speech balloon portion. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. A portion of the performance content suggestion image CGN (a portion of the speech bubble image) is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (left side plate member 14L).

Next, the effect content suggestion image movement effect shown in FIG. 63(B) is executed. Specifically, the character image portion of the production content suggestion image CGN disappears, and the speech bubble portion moves toward the upper right. Then, the effect content suggestion image transformation effect shown in FIG. 63(C) is executed. Specifically, the balloon portion of the production content suggestion image CGN changes to become a smoke image. At this time, a part of the continuation suggestion image WP is covered by the performance content suggestion image CGN in the smoke state, making it difficult to see. A part of this smoke state performance content suggestion image CGN is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (left side plate member 14L). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(D), the performance content suggestion image CGN clearly indicates the performance content "angel mode". At this time, a part of the performance content suggestion image CGN becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R).

[Transparent visual display of number of pitches acquired]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the transparent visual recognition effect of displaying the number of acquired pitches. In the acquired pitch count display transparent visual recognition performance, first, the first acquired pitch count image transparent visual recognition performance shown in FIG. 64(A) is executed. Here, first, the first acquired pitch count image BA1 and the suggestion image IS1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The first acquired ball number image BA1 represents the number of balls acquired by the player in a series of winning games. Suggestion image IS1 is an image that suggests to the player to play right-handed. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. A portion of the first acquired pitch count image BA1 is visible through the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R).

Next, a second acquired pitch count image transmission visualization effect shown in FIG. 64(B) is executed. Specifically, a second acquired pitch count image BA2 is further displayed on the display screen 7a. The second acquired ball number image BA2 represents that the number of balls acquired by the player in a series of winning games has reached a predetermined value. The second acquired pitch count image BA2 is larger than the first acquired pitch count image BA1. At this time, a portion of the first acquired pitch count image BA1 and a portion of the second acquired pitch count image BA2 are visible via the first movable accessory 14 (right side plate member 14R).

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the above-mentioned transparent visual recognition effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. A first performance that becomes visible through the movable accessory 14 can be executed. According to this configuration, at least a portion of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. can be achieved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, in the first performance, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. At least a portion of it becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14. According to this configuration, at least a portion of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are being displayed in a variable manner can be visually recognized through the first movable accessory 14, so that the player can be visually entertained. You can improve your interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, in the first performance, the second decorative symbols 8l, 8c are placed on the part of the display screen 7a where the first movable accessory 14 is not located in front. , 8r are displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, in the first performance, the acquired ball number image BA1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and at least a part of the acquired ball number image BA1 is displayed on the first movable accessory 14. Visible through. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, in the first performance, a gaming ball is placed in a specific direction on a portion of the display screen 7a where the first movable accessory 14 is not located in front. A suggestion image IS1 is displayed suggesting that the target be fired. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the transparent visual recognition effect described above is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern transparent visual recognition performance of FIG. 62, a portion of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is visible through the first movable accessory 14. However, the entirety of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be visible through the first movable accessory 14. Further, even during the fluctuating display shown in FIG. 62(B), the entirety of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R being fluctuated may be visible via the first movable accessory 14. In addition, in the above-described decorative pattern transparent visual recognition performance, a part of the acquired ball count image BA1 is visible through the first movable accessory 14. However, the entire acquired pitch count image BA1 may be visible through the first movable accessory 14.

[Modification 2]
In the performance content display transparent visual performance shown in FIG. 63, a part of the performance content suggestion image CGN shown in FIGS. 63(A), 63(C), and 63(D) is visible through the first movable accessory 14. It becomes. However, in at least one of these, the entire production content suggestion image CGN may be visible through the first movable accessory 14.

[Modification 3]
FIG. 64 shows a first acquired pitch count image BA1 shown in FIGS. 64(A) and 64(B) and a second acquired pitch count image BA2 shown in FIG. 64(B) in the acquired pitch count display transparent visual recognition effect. A portion of each can be visually recognized through the first movable accessory 14. However, at least one of the first acquired pitch count image BA1 and the second acquired pitch count image BA2 may be visible in its entirety via the first movable accessory 14.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A5-1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a transparent accessory,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern,
When the first decorative pattern is displayed on the display means, at least a portion of the first decorative pattern is visible through the accessory, and a first effect can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
In the first performance, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and at least a portion of the first decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner becomes visible through the accessory.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1 or aspect A5-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern,
In the first performance, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a portion of the display means where the accessory is not located in front.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is an acquired ball number image representing the number of game balls acquired in a winning game,
In the first performance, the acquired pitch number image is displayed on the display means, and at least a portion of the acquired pitch number image is made visible through the accessory.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a suggestion image that suggests firing the game ball in a specific direction,
In the first performance, the suggestion image is displayed in a portion of the display means where the accessory is not located in front.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The accessory linked reach performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 65 to 67. This role-linked ready-to-reach presentation can be executed during a decorative pattern variation presentation, a ready-to-reach presentation (super ready-to-reach presentation), or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the role-playing linked reach production, it reads the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103. This is an effect in which the image is read out and displayed on the display screen 7a, and the movable accessory is made to perform a predetermined action.

[Accessory collaboration reach production A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the accessory collaboration reach effect A. In the accessory linked ready-to-win performance A, first, the decorative symbol ready-to-win performance shown in FIG. 65(A) is executed. In the decorative symbol ready-to-win effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a ready-to-reach state on the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not covered by the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a portion (area) of the display screen 7a where the first movable accessory 14 is not located in front.

Next, the decorative pattern movement effect shown in FIG. 65(B) is executed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move within the display screen 7a. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the left, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right. As a result, the decorative pattern transparent visual recognition effect shown in FIG. 65(C) is executed. In the decorative pattern transparent visual recognition performance, by moving the left decorative pattern 8L, a part of the left decorative pattern 8L becomes visible through the left side plate member 14L, and by moving the right decorative pattern 8R, a part of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes visible through the right side plate member 14L. It becomes visible through the member 14R. A first specific image IC1 is displayed between the left side plate member 14L and the right decorative pattern 8R. The first specific image IC1 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a face. Note that a specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, letters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. etc. are also included.

Next, the entire transparent visual recognition effect shown in FIG. 65(D) is executed. Specifically, after the decorative pattern transparent visual recognition effect shown in FIG. 65(C), the first movable accessory 14 transitions to the second mode. That is, the entire display screen 7a is covered by the first movable accessory 14. Further, the left side plate member 14L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the first specific image IC1 disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second specific image IC2 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The transition to the second mode of the first movable accessory 14 and the display of the second specific image IC2 may be performed first or may be displayed first. As a result, the second specific image IC2 is covered by the first movable accessory 14, and becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14.

[Accessory collaboration reach production B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the accessory collaboration reach effect B. The role-playing ready-to-win performance B differs from the role-playing ready-to-win performance A in FIG. 65 in the positions in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. The decorative pattern reach effect in FIG. 66(A) is the same as that in FIG. 65(A). That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a ready-to-reach state. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not covered by the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a portion (area) of the display screen 7a where the first movable accessory 14 is not located in front.

Next, the decorative pattern movement effect shown in FIG. 66(B) is executed. Here, similarly to FIG. 65(B), the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the left, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right. On the other hand, each moving distance is longer than in FIG. 65(B). As a result, the decorative pattern transparent visual recognition effect shown in FIG. 66(C) is executed. In the decorative pattern transparent visual recognition performance, the entire left decorative pattern 8L becomes visible through the left side plate member 14L, and the entire right decorative pattern 8R becomes visible through the right side plate member 14R. A first specific image IC1 is displayed between the left side plate member 14L and the right decorative pattern 8R. The first specific image IC1 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a face.

Next, the entire transparent visual recognition effect shown in FIG. 66(D) is executed. Specifically, after the decorative pattern transparent visual recognition effect shown in FIG. 66(C), the first movable accessory 14 transitions to the second mode. That is, the entire display screen 7a is covered by the first movable accessory 14. The first specific image IC1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the second specific image IC2 is further displayed on the display screen 7a with the left side plate member 14L and the right decorative pattern 8R remaining. The transition to the second mode of the first movable accessory 14 and the display of the second specific image IC2 may occur first, or may occur first. Thereby, the second specific image IC2 is covered by the first movable accessory 14, and becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14.

[Accessory collaboration reach production C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the accessory collaboration reach effect C. In the accessory linked reach performance C, compared to the accessory linked reach performance A in FIG. The process is different. In the accessory linked reach production C, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R do not move, but the first movable accessory 14 moves, so that a part of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move 1 becomes visible through the movable accessory 14. The decorative symbol reach effect in FIG. 67(A) is the same as that in FIG. 65(A). That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a ready-to-reach state. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode.

Next, the first movable accessory moving effect shown in FIG. 67(B) is executed. Here, the first movable accessory 14 advances further and the area covering the display screen 7a increases. Note that even after advancing, the first movable accessory 14 does not cover the entire display screen 7a, but only partially covers the display screen 7a (first mode). As a result, the decorative pattern transparent visual recognition effect shown in FIG. 67(C) is executed. Specifically, by moving the first movable accessory 14, a part of the left decorative pattern 8L becomes visible through the left side plate member 14L, and a part of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes visible through the right side plate member 14R. It becomes possible. A first specific image IC1 is displayed between the left side plate member 14L and the right decorative pattern 8R. The first specific image IC1 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a star.

Next, the entire transparent visual recognition effect shown in FIG. 67(D) is executed. Specifically, after the decorative pattern transparent visual recognition effect shown in FIG. 67(C), the first movable accessory 14 transitions to the second mode. That is, the entire display screen 7a is covered by the first movable accessory 14. The first specific image IC1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the second specific image IC2 is further displayed on the display screen 7a with the left side plate member 14L and the right decorative pattern 8R remaining. The second specific image IC2 is displayed with a part of the face image protruding from the display screen 7a. The transition to the second mode of the first movable accessory 14 and the display of the second specific image IC2 may occur first, or may occur first. Thereby, the second specific image IC2 is covered by the first movable accessory 14, and becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14.

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of the reach effect with the collaboration of accessories.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, when the first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, the first movable accessory 14 is located in front of the display screen 7a. In the first production in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the areas that are not shown, and when the first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, the first movable accessory 14 is displayed in front of the display screen 7a. A second effect in which at least a portion of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the positioned portion, and at least a portion of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible via the first movable accessory 14; After the first performance and the second performance, a third performance in which the first movable accessory 14 transitions to the second mode can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, after the first performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move on the display screen 7a, and the first one moves toward the front of the display screen 7a. The second performance is executed by displaying at least part of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the area where the movable accessory 14 is located. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R include a left decorative pattern 8L and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the first movable accessory 14 is Each includes a left side plate member 14L and a right side plate member 14R, which have transparency and are located in front of the display screen 7a, and in the second performance, at least a part of the left decorative pattern 8L is on the left side plate member 14L. At least a portion of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes visible through the right side plate member 14R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, in the second performance, the first specific image IC1 is displayed between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the first movable accessory 14 increases the area covering the front surface of the display screen 7a when the first mode changes to the second mode. In the third performance, the second specific image IC2 displayed on the display screen 7a becomes visible via the first movable accessory 14. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the role-playing linked reach performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second specific image IC2 is displayed after the first specific image IC1 disappears. However, both the first specific image IC1 and the second specific image IC2 may be displayed. Alternatively, the second specific image IC may not be displayed, and the first specific image IC1 may continue to be displayed. In this case, in the entire transparent visual performance, the entire first specific image IC1 becomes visible through the first movable accessory 14.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the left, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right. However, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be moved in other directions. For example, the left decorative pattern 8L may move to the upper left, and the right decorative pattern 8R may move to the upper right. Even in this case, a part or the whole of the left decorative pattern 8L becomes visible through the left side plate member 14L, and a part or the whole of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes visible through the right side plate member 14R.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 is constituted by two plate members, the left side plate member 14L and the right side plate member 14R. However, the first movable accessory 14 may be composed of three or more plate members.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first specific image IC1 and the second specific image IC2 are displayed. However, at least one of these may not be displayed. Further, although the first movable accessory 14 is assumed to transition from the first mode to the second mode, it does not have to transition.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A6-1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a movable accessory having transparency that can transition between a first state and a second state,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which, when the movable accessory is in the first state, the decorative pattern is displayed in a portion of the display means where the movable accessory is not located in front;
When the movable accessory is in the first state, at least a portion of the decorative pattern is displayed in a portion of the display means where the movable accessory is located in front, and at least a portion of the decorative pattern is a second performance that becomes visible through the movable accessory;
after the first performance and the second performance, a third performance in which the movable accessory changes to a second state;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1,
After the first performance, the decorative pattern moves within the display means, and at least a portion of the decorative pattern is displayed in a portion of the display means in front of which the movable accessory is located. The second performance is executed by
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1 or aspect A6-2,
The decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern and a right decorative pattern,
The movable accessory includes a first plate member and a second plate member, each of which has transparency and is located in front of the display means,
In the second performance, at least a portion of the left decorative pattern becomes visible through the first plate member, and at least a portion of the right decorative pattern becomes visible through the second plate member.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first specific image representing a specific object,
In the second performance, the first specific image is displayed between the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second specific image representing a specific object,
The movable accessory is configured such that when it transitions from the first state to the second state, the area covering the front surface of the display means increases,
In the third performance, the second specific image displayed on the display means becomes visible through the movable accessory;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific image covering effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 68 to 70. This specific image covering effect can be executed during a decorative pattern variation effect, a reach effect (super reach effect), or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 if an instruction to execute a specific image covering effect is included. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display screen 7a and a movable accessory is made to perform a predetermined action.

[Specific image covering effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining specific image covering effect A. In the specific image covering effect A, first, the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 68(A) is executed. In the decorative pattern variation performance, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not covered by the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a portion (area) of the display screen 7a where the first movable accessory 14 is not located in front.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the first movable accessory 14 changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the entire display screen 7a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. In this state, the specific performance start suggestion image SI1 is displayed on the display screen 7a and becomes visible via the first movable accessory 14. The specific performance start suggestion image SI1 is an image that suggests the content of the performance to be started after this. It is suggested that a production called "Hide and Seek Zone" will begin here.

Next, the specific image display effect shown in FIG. 68(C) is executed. Specifically, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and a specific image IC1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The specific image IC1 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a face. Note that a specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, letters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. etc. are also included. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image IC1 are visible through the first movable accessory 14. Thereafter, a pseudo continuous effect is executed for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, in which a fluctuating display and a temporary stop display are repeated. The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the fluctuating display of decorative symbols is repeated a predetermined number of times in a pseudo manner, and can be performed at the start of the fluctuation, a ready-to-win effect, or the like. For example, pseudo-continuous effects include effects that repeat the effects of starting and temporarily stopping the decorative patterns, effects that repeat the effects of temporarily stopping at least part of a predetermined pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns, and effects that repeat the effects of a predetermined logo (for example, NEXT). This includes a performance that repeats a performance that temporarily stops the , or a display that associates a pseudo series such as "x2", "x3", and "pseudo", as well as a performance that executes a fluctuating performance of decorative symbols. An effect having a certain regularity may be performed regarding the arrangement (roll) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R when temporarily stopped and displayed. For example, when a temporary stop is displayed such as "246" or "682", the temporary stop may be made with all even numbers, or the temporary stop may be made with all odd numbers. Further, the number may be increased by 1 from the previous number, such as "123" or "234", or may be reduced by 3. For example, for each of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, such as "824", "246", "468", "682", 2, 4, 6, 8, 2, A certain pattern may be repeated.

Next, the specific image covering effect shown in FIG. 68(D) is started. Specifically, a monochromatic discoloration region VR1 appears in the portion (here, the entire portion) of the display screen 7a where the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front. This discolored region VR1 appears from the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the display area gradually increases toward the top. Therefore, the specific image IC1 and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually filled in with the discolored region VR1. In other words, in the specific image covering effect, the color displayed on the display screen 7a changes to the color of the color change area VR1, so that the specific image IC1 and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become difficult to see. Note that in the specific image covering effect, the color of the first movable accessory 14 may change instead of changing the color of the display screen 7a. In other words, if the first movable accessory 14 having transparency has a configuration that can change the color to a specific color while partially reducing the transparency, the first movable accessory 14 can be changed in color sequentially from the bottom side. By changing it, the state shown in FIG. 68(D) can be obtained. Even if the first movable accessory 14 gradually changes to a specific color, the specific image IC1 and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become difficult to see.

By increasing the discolored area VR1 displayed on the display screen 7a, a specific image hard-to-see effect is executed in which the specific image IC1 and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R become difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 68(E). Ru. In addition, in the specific image covering effect of FIG. 68(D), even if the color of the first movable accessory 14 changes instead of the color of the display screen 7a, By increasing the area that has changed to a specific color, it is possible to perform a specific image difficulty effect in which the specific image IC1 and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R become difficult to see.

Thereafter, the ready-to-reach effect shown in FIG. 68(F) is executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 transitions from the second mode to the first mode, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a ready-to-reach state on the display screen 7a. Further, a character image CRA and a suggestion image CGN are displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Specific image covering effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining specific image covering effect B. The specific image covering effect B differs from the specific image covering effect A in FIG. 68 in the display mode of the discolored region VR1. The decorative pattern variation effect in FIG. 69(A), the specific effect start suggestion in FIG. 69(B), and the specific image display effect in FIG. 69(C) are similar to the specific image covering effect A in FIG. 68.

Next, the specific image covering effect shown in FIG. 69(D) is started. Specifically, a monochromatic discoloration region VR1 appears in the portion (here, the entire portion) of the display screen 7a where the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front. The area of the color changing region VR1 does not gradually increase on the display screen 7a, but the entire display screen 7a is set as a region in advance, and the color within the region gradually changes. Specifically, the specific color gradually becomes darker within the area, and the specific image IC1 and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually filled out. As a result, the specific image IC1 and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become difficult to see. Note that instead of changing the color of the display screen 7a, the color of the first movable accessory 14 may change. That is, if the entire first movable accessory 14 having transparency has a configuration that can be changed to a specific color while gradually decreasing the transparency, the transparency of the first movable accessory 14 can be gradually decreased. Accordingly, the state shown in FIG. 69(D) can be obtained. Even if the first movable accessory 14 gradually changes to a specific color, the specific image IC1 and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become difficult to see.

As the density of the specific color in the discolored region VR1 increases, as shown in FIG. 69(E), a specific image difficulty effect is executed in which the specific image IC1 and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R become difficult to see. Ru. In addition, in the specific image covering effect of FIG. 69(D), even when the color of the first movable accessory 14 changes instead of the color of the display screen 7a, the color of the first movable accessory 14 changes. By reducing the overall transparency, it is possible to perform a specific image difficulty effect in which the specific image IC1 and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R become difficult to see. After that, the reach effect shown in FIG. 69(F) is executed. The reach effect in FIG. 69(F) is similar to the specific image covering effect A in FIG. 68.

[Specific image covering effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the specific image covering effect C. The specific image covering effect C is different from the specific image covering effect A shown in FIG. 68 in the display mode of the discoloration region VR1 and the operation mode of the first movable accessory 14. The decorative pattern variation effect in FIG. 70(A) is similar to the specific image covering effect A in FIG. 68.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the first movable accessory 14 advances further and the area covering the display screen 7a increases. Note that even after advancing, the first movable accessory 14 does not cover the entirety of the display screen 7a but only partially covers the display screen 7a (first mode). In this state, the specific performance start suggestion image SI1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a part of the specific performance start suggestion image SI1 becomes visible via the first movable accessory 14. Note that the other part of the specific performance start suggestion image SI1 is not covered by the first movable accessory 14 and is directly visible.

Next, the specific image display effect shown in FIG. 70(C) is executed. Specifically, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and a specific image IC1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible through the first movable accessory 14. Part of the specific image IC1 is visible through the first movable accessory 14, and the other part is not covered by the first movable accessory 14 and is directly visible. There is.

Next, the specific image covering effect shown in FIG. 70(D) is started. Specifically, a monochromatic discolored region VR1 appears in a portion of the display screen 7a where the first movable accessory 14 is arranged in front. This color changing region VR1 is set in a portion of the display screen 7a where the first movable accessory 14 is placed in front, and the color within the region gradually changes. Specifically, the specific color gradually becomes darker within the area, and the portion of the specific image IC1 and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R where the first movable accessory 14 is placed in front is gradually filled in. . As a result, part of the specific image IC1 and all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become difficult to see. Note that instead of changing the color of the display screen 7a, the color of the first movable accessory 14 may change. That is, if the first movable accessory 14 having transparency has a configuration that can be changed to a specific color while gradually decreasing the transparency, by sequentially decreasing the transparency of the first movable accessory 14, The state shown in FIG. 70(D) can be achieved. Even if the first movable accessory 14 gradually changes to a specific color, a part of the specific image IC1 and all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become difficult to see.

Specific image visibility in which part of the specific image IC1 and all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R become difficult to see as the density of a specific color in the discolored region VR1 increases, as shown in FIG. 70(E). A difficult performance is performed. In addition, in the specific image covering effect of FIG. 70(D), even when the color of the first movable accessory 14 changes instead of the color of the display screen 7a, the color of the first movable accessory 14 changes. By reducing the overall transparency, it is possible to perform a specific image difficulty rendering effect in which a part of the specific image IC1 and all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R become difficult to see. Thereafter, the reach effect shown in FIG. 70(F) is executed. The reach effect in FIG. 70(F) is similar to the specific image covering effect A in FIG. 68.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of specific image covering effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the first movable accessory 14 is arranged such that the area covering the front surface of the display screen 7a increases when the first mode changes to the second mode. When the first movable accessory 14 is in the second mode, the specific image IC1 displayed on the display screen 7a is made visible through the first movable accessory 14. , after the first effect, the color displayed on the display screen 7a or the color of the first movable accessory 14 changes, so that at least a part of the specific image IC1 becomes difficult to see. It is possible to perform and. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, in the second effect, the color displayed on the display screen 7a or the area of the part where the color of the first movable accessory 14 changes gradually becomes larger, and at least a part of the specific image IC1 gradually becomes difficult to see. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, after the second performance, it is possible to execute a third performance in which the first movable accessory 14 changes to the first mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the first performance is executed after the ready-to-win performance using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, in the second performance, a pseudo-coupled performance using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the specific image covering effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the color changing region VR1 is a single color. However, the color change region VR1 is not limited to a single color. For example, it may be a pattern image, or may include a specific pattern, characters, symbols, etc.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is assumed that there is a suggestion to start a specific performance before the specific image display performance. However, the specific effect start suggestion may not be given before the specific image display effect.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A7-1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a movable accessory having transparency that can transition between a first state and a second state,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific object,
The movable accessory is configured such that when it transitions from the first state to the second state, the area covering the front surface of the display means increases,
a first effect in which the specific image displayed on the display means becomes visible through the movable accessory when the movable accessory is in the second state;
After the first performance, a second performance in which at least a part of the specific image becomes difficult to see by changing the color displayed on the display means or the color of the movable accessory; , executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
In the second effect, the color displayed on the display means or the area of the part where the color of the movable accessory changes gradually increases, and at least a part of the specific image gradually becomes difficult to see. Become,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1 or aspect A7-2,
After the second performance, a third performance in which the movable accessory changes to the first state can be executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
The first performance is executed after the reach performance using the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-4,
In the second performance, a pseudo continuous performance using the decorative pattern is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The remaining time suggestion effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 71 to 73. This remaining time suggestion performance may be executed during a decorative pattern variation performance, a reach performance (super reach performance), or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 if the instruction to execute the remaining time suggestion effect is included. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the display screen 7a and a movable accessory is made to perform a predetermined action.

[Remaining time suggestion performance A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the remaining time suggestion effect A. In the remaining time suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 71(A), a first image right movement effect is started. Specifically, first, a first image IM1, a second image IM2, a third image IM3, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. The first image IM1 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a smiling face. Note that a specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, letters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. etc. are also included. The first image IM1 is displayed on the second image IM2. Here, the first image IM1 is displayed at the left end on the second image IM2. The second image IM2 is a substantially rectangular figure that is long in the horizontal direction, and is displayed below the display screen 7a. The third image IM3 is a reservation icon (reservation image) representing the number of reservations, and is displayed on the second image IM2. Here, a pending number of 1 is suggested. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a. Parts of each of the first image IM1 and the second image IM2 are covered with the first movable accessory 14 and are visible through the first movable accessory 14.

Next, the first image right movement effect shown in FIG. 71(B) is executed. Specifically, the first image IM1 moves rightward on the second image IM2. The first image IM1 and the second image IM2 function as remaining period suggestion images that suggest the remaining period until the predetermined period expires, depending on the position of the first image IM1 with respect to the second image IM2. That is, it is suggested that the predetermined period has expired when the first image IM1 is located at the right end of the second image IM2. The predetermined period is, for example, a period from the start to the end of one fluctuation pattern. Then, for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a pseudo continuous effect is performed in which a fluctuating display and a temporary stop display are repeated. The second image IM2 has different display contents on the right side and the left side of the first image IM1. In FIG. 71(B), the first image IM1 is not covered by the first movable accessory 14. That is, the first image IM1 is displayed in a portion (area) of the display screen 7a that is not covered by the first movable accessory 14. In addition, in FIG. 71(B), the third image IM3 suggests that the number of reservations is 2.

As the first image IM1 continues to move to the right, the first image IM1 and the third image IM3 are displayed in a superimposed manner as shown in FIG. 71(C). Specifically, the third image IM3 is displayed on the first image IM1, and a part of the first image IM1 becomes difficult to see due to the third image IM3.

The first image left movement effect shown in FIG. 71(D) is executed at a predetermined timing. Specifically, the first image IM1 moves leftward on the second image IM2. As described above, the first image IM1 and the second image IM2 function as remaining period suggestion images that suggest the remaining period until the predetermined period expires, depending on the position of the first image IM1 with respect to the second image IM2. Therefore, by moving the first image IM1 to the left, it is suggested that the period until the predetermined period expires has been extended. That is, the first image left movement effect in FIG. 71(D) can be said to be a period extension effect that suggests that the period until the predetermined period expires has been extended. In FIG. 71(C), the third image IM3 suggests that the number of reservations is three.

After the first image left movement effect shown in FIG. 71(D), the first image right movement effect shown in FIG. 71(E) is executed at a predetermined timing. Specifically, similarly to FIG. 71(B), the first image IM1 moves rightward over the second image IM2 again. After that, as shown in FIG. 71(F), the first image IM1 is located at the right end of the second image IM2, so that a part of the first image IM1 becomes visible through the movable accessory 14. Transparent visual recognition effect is executed.

[Remaining time suggestion performance B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the remaining time suggestion effect B. Remaining time suggestion performance B differs from remaining time suggestion performance A in FIG. 71 in the position of the first movable accessory 14 in the first mode. As shown in FIG. 72(A), at the time when the first image right movement effect is started, the first movable accessory 14 has advanced further compared to the remaining time suggestion effect A in FIG. 71, and the display The area covering the screen 7a has increased. The first image IM1, second image IM2, third image IM3, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a are the same as the remaining time suggestion effect A in FIG. 71. Since the first movable accessory 14 has further advanced, the entire first image IM1 and a part of the second image IM2 are covered by the first movable accessory 14 and are visible through the first movable accessory 14. It has become.

Next, the first image right movement effect shown in FIG. 72(B) is the same as that in FIG. 71(B) except for the position of the first movable accessory 14. In FIG. 72(C), the first image IM1 and the third image IM3 are displayed in a superimposed manner, and a portion thereof is visible through the first movable accessory 14. In FIGS. 72(D) and 72(E), a part of the third image IM3 is visible through the first movable accessory 14. In FIG. 72(F), the entire first image IM1 is visible through the first movable accessory 14.

[Remaining time suggestion effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the remaining time suggestion effect C. Remaining time suggestion performance C differs in content from remaining time suggestion performance A in FIG. 71. In the remaining time suggestion effect C, a specific image falling effect shown in FIG. 73(A) is started. Specifically, a first image IM1, a second image IM2, a third image IM3, a fourth image IM4, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. The first image IM1, the second image IM2, the third image IM3, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same as the remaining time suggestion effect A in FIG. 71. The fourth image IM4 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a smiling face. Note that a specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, letters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. etc. are also included. In the specific image falling effect, a plurality of fourth images IM4 fall downward from the upper end of the display screen 7a.

Next, a specific image accumulation effect shown in FIG. 73(B) is executed. Specifically, the plurality of fourth images IM4 that have fallen downward from the upper end of the display screen 7a are accumulated in order from the lower end of the display screen 7a. At this time, the plurality of fourth images IM4 are stacked so that some of them overlap with each other. As this accumulation progresses in order, the proportion occupied by the fourth image IM4 on the display screen 7a increases, as shown in FIG. 73(C). Then, as shown in FIG. 73(D), the fourth image IM4 occupies almost the entire display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the remaining time suggestion effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the first image IM1 and the second image IM2 are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the first image IM1 moves rightward over the second image IM2. By moving the first image IM1, it is possible to perform a remaining period suggestion effect that indicates the remaining period until the predetermined period expires depending on the position of the first image IM1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the first image IM1 moves leftward on the second image IM2, and the period until the predetermined period expires is extended. It is possible to execute a period extension effect that suggests. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, when the second image IM2 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the third image IM3 is displayed on the second image IM2. It is possible to perform a number display effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, at least a portion of the second image IM2 is visible through the first movable accessory 14, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the first image IM1 is moved to the right so that the first movable accessory 14 is located in front of the display screen 7a. In some cases, the first movable accessory 14 is located in front of at least a portion of the first image IM1, and at least a portion of the first movable accessory 14 becomes visible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the remaining time suggestion effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the upper end and lower end of the first image IM1 protrude from the second image IM2. However, the first image IM1 may have a size that fits entirely inside the second image IM2.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the third image IM3 is displayed. However, the third image IM3 may not be displayed. In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is assumed that a pseudo-continuous performance is executed. However, pseudo-association may not be performed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a part of the first image IM1 is covered by the first movable accessory 14. However, the first image IM1 does not need to be covered by the first movable accessory 14. Similarly, the second image IM2 does not need to be covered by the first movable accessory 14.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The first image and the second image are displayed on the display means, the first image moves on the second image in a first direction, and a predetermined image is displayed depending on the position of the first image. It is possible to perform a remaining period suggestion effect that indicates the remaining period until the period expires,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
A period extension effect in which the first image moves on the second image in a second direction opposite to the first direction, suggesting that the period until the predetermined period expires has been extended. executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image representing the number of reservations,
When the second image is displayed on the display means, a pending number display effect can be executed in which the third image is displayed on the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3 further includes:
Equipped with a transparent accessory,
at least a portion of the second image is visible through the accessory;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-4,
The first image may be displayed in a portion of the display means where the accessory object is not located in front of the display means, or the first image may be displayed in front of at least a portion of the first image. at least a portion of which may be visible through the accessory;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific image change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 74 to 76. This specific image change performance can be executed during a decorative pattern variation performance, a reach performance (super reach performance), or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific image change effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen. This is a display effect to be displayed on 7a.

[Specific image change effect A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining specific image change effect A. In the specific image change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 74(A), a first image right movement effect is started. Specifically, first, a first image IM1, a fourth image IM4, a fifth image IM5, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. The first image IM1 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a smiling face. Note that a specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, letters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. etc. are also included. The first image IM1 is displayed on the fourth image IM4. Here, the first image IM1 is displayed at the left end on the fourth image IM4. The fourth image IM4 is a substantially rectangular figure long in the horizontal direction, and is displayed below the display screen 7a. The fifth image IM5 is a reservation icon (reservation image) representing the number of reservations, and is displayed on the fourth image IM4. Here, a pending number of 1 is suggested. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a. Parts of each of the first image IM1 and the fourth image IM4 are covered by the first movable accessory 14 and are visible through the first movable accessory 14.

The first image IM1 moves rightward on the fourth image IM4. The first image IM1 and the fourth image IM4 function as remaining period suggestion images that suggest the remaining period until the predetermined period expires, depending on the position of the first image IM1 with respect to the fourth image IM4. That is, it is suggested that the predetermined period has expired when the first image IM1 is located at the right end of the fourth image IM4. The predetermined period is, for example, a period from the start to the end of one fluctuation pattern. Then, for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a pseudo continuous effect is performed in which a variable display and a temporary stop display are repeated. The fourth image IM4 has different display contents on the right side and the left side of the first image IM1.

Next, the second image appearance effect shown in FIG. 74(B) is executed. Specifically, the second image IM2 is displayed on the fourth image IM4 at a predetermined timing. The second image IM2 is displayed in the advancing direction of the first image IM1. The second image IM2 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a star. Note that in FIG. 71(B), the first image IM1 and the second image IM2 are not covered by the first movable accessory 14. That is, the first image IM1 and the second image IM2 are displayed in a portion (area) of the display screen 7a that is not covered by the first movable accessory 14. Moreover, in FIG. 71(B), the third image IM3 suggests that the number of reservations is 2.

Next, the third image appearance effect shown in FIG. 74(C) is executed. Specifically, after the second image IM2 appears, the third image IM3 is displayed at a position close to the fourth image IM4 at a predetermined timing. The third image IM3 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a person's upper body. The third image IM3 may or may not be in contact with the fourth image IM4. Further, at least a portion of the third image IM3 may be located inside the fourth image IM4.

After the third image IM3 appears, the third image specifying effect shown in FIG. 74(D) is executed. This third image specific effect is such that the third image IM3 performs some effect on the second image IM2. A clashing performance takes place. The content of this specific performance can be set arbitrarily. After this third image specifying effect, the second image changing effect shown in FIG. 74(E) is executed. Specifically, the color of the second image IM2 changes. For example, the color of the second image IM2 changes from green to red.

By moving the first image IM1 in the right direction, the first image IM1 comes into contact with the second image IM2, as shown in FIG. 74(F). Due to this contact, the color of the first image IM1 changes to a color corresponding to the color of the second image IM2. Corresponding colors mean the same, similar, or related colors. For example, when the second image IM2 is red, the color of the first image IM1 changes to purple, or the color changes alternately between red and another color.

[Specific image change effect B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining specific image change effect B. The specific image change effect B differs from the specific image change effect A in FIG. 74 in the display position of the third image IM3. The start of the first image right movement effect in FIG. 75(A) and the second image appearance effect in FIG. 75(B) are compared with the specific image change effect A in FIGS. 74(A) and 74(B). The only difference is that the fifth image IM5 is not displayed, and the other parts are the same.

In the third image appearance effect shown in FIG. 75(C), the third image IM3 is displayed on the fourth image IM4. Specifically, the third image IM3 is displayed on the fourth image IM4 and to the left of the first image IM1. After the third image IM3 appears, the third image specifying effect shown in FIG. 75(D) is executed. Here, an effect is performed in which an image of a plurality of consecutive circles appears from the third image IM3 and collides with the second image IM2. At this time, the image in which the plurality of circles are connected straddles the first image IM1 and collides with the second image IM2. Therefore, the first image IM1 is temporarily covered by an image in which a plurality of circles are connected. After the third image specific effect, the second image change effect shown in FIG. 75(E) is executed. Specifically, the color of the second image IM2 changes. By moving the first image IM1 in the right direction, the first image IM1 comes into contact with the second image IM2, as shown in FIG. 75(F). Due to this contact, the color of the first image IM1 changes to a color corresponding to the color of the second image IM2.

[Specific image change effect C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the specific image change effect C. The specific image change effect C differs from the specific image change effect A in FIG. 74 in that the third image IM3 is not displayed. The first image right movement effect in FIG. 76(A) starts and the second image appearance effect in FIG. 76(B) is compared with the specific image change effect A in FIGS. 74(A) and 74(B). The only difference is that the fifth image IM5 is not displayed, and the other parts are the same. As shown in FIGS. 76(C) and 76(D), the first image IM1 comes into contact with the second image IM2 due to the rightward movement of the first image IM1. Due to this contact, the color of the first image IM1 changes to a color corresponding to the color of the second image IM2.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of specific image change effects are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, when the first image IM1 and the second image IM2 are displayed on the display screen 7a, the first image IM1 moves to the right in the display screen 7a. It is possible to perform a first effect in which the second image IM2 is displayed in the direction of movement of the first image IM1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, after the first effect, the first image IM1 comes into contact with the second image IM2 due to the movement of the first image IM1, and the first image IM1 It is possible to perform a second effect in which the color of IM1 changes to a color corresponding to the color of second image IM2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the color of the second image IM2 may change to another color at a predetermined timing after being displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the color of the second image IM2 changes to another color after the third image IM3 is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the first effect, the first image IM1 moves rightward on the fourth image IM4, and the first image IM1 moves to the right on the fourth image IM4. Two images IM2 are displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modification example of the specific image change effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the upper and lower ends of the first image IM1 protrude from the second image IM2. However, the first image IM1 may have a size that fits entirely inside the second image IM2.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the third image IM3 is displayed before the color of the second image IM2 changes. However, the third image IM3 may not be displayed before the color of the second image IM2 changes. In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, it is assumed that a pseudo-continuous performance is executed. However, pseudo-association does not have to be performed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a part of the first image IM1 is covered by the first movable accessory 14. However, the first image IM1 does not need to be covered by the first movable accessory 14. Similarly, the fourth image IM4 does not need to be covered by the first movable accessory 14.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
In a state where the first image and the second image are displayed on the display means, the first image moves in a predetermined direction within the display means, and the first image moves in the direction of movement of the first image. capable of executing a first effect in which a second image is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
After the first effect, the first image comes into contact with the second image due to movement of the first image, and the color of the first image corresponds to the color of the second image. A second effect that changes color can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2,
The color of the second image may change to another color at a predetermined timing after being displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image representing a specific object,
The color of the second image changes to another color after the third image is displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fourth image,
In the first effect, the first image moves in the predetermined direction on the fourth image, and the second image is displayed on the fourth image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The meter effect will be explained below using FIGS. 77 to 79. This meter performance is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter simply referred to as "special symbol") (during one variable display), for example, when the gaming state is a high probability state, This can be executed during a time saving state, electric chew support (a condition in which the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it becomes easier to win at the second starting port 21, hereinafter also referred to as "electric support"). In addition, the variation time of the special symbol in which this meter effect is executed is longer than usual.

[Meter production A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining meter effect A.
In meter performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a fluctuation start meter performance is executed when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. In this fluctuation start meter production, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 77(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("589"). Further, a meter image EM1A is displayed below the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A and a meter area EM3A (the cross-hatched portion shown in FIGS.
It is a meter that moves within M2A, and the meter value is expressed by the movement of meter area EM3A. Note that the meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged horizontally below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a fluctuating meter effect is executed while the special symbols are fluctuating. In this fluctuating meter performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R perform a pseudo-continuation (hereinafter also referred to as a "pseudo-continuation performance").
Here, the pseudo-continuous performance is a performance that makes it appear as if the fluctuating display of decorative symbols is repeated a predetermined number of times in a pseudo manner, and is a performance that can be performed at the start of the fluctuation, a ready-to-win performance, or the like. For example, pseudo-continuous effects include effects that repeat the effects of starting and temporarily stopping the decorative patterns, effects that repeat the effects of temporarily stopping at least part of a predetermined pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns, and effects that repeat the effects of a predetermined logo (for example, NEXT). This includes a performance that repeats a performance that temporarily stops the , or a display that associates a pseudo series such as "x2", "x3", and "pseudo", as well as a performance that executes a fluctuating performance of decorative symbols. Note that the number of times the performance is repeated is also referred to as the number of pseudo consecutive performances, and may be expressed as "pseudo 2" or "x2" if it is repeated two times, "pseudo 3" or "x3" if it is three times.

In this pseudo-continuous performance in the fluctuating meter performance, during one fluctuation of the special symbol, a performance that temporarily stops the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after starting the fluctuation is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 10 times). That is, in the pseudo-continuous display in this fluctuating meter display, a display is performed to make it appear as if the decorative symbols are displayed in a pseudo manner consecutively a predetermined number of times during one variation of the special symbol. In addition, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, in the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves to the left within the meter frame EM2A according to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (for example, according to the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative pattern). Move to the right. In other words, the meter value increases. More specifically, the meter area EM3A is located at the left end (starting point) P1 of the meter frame EM2A in the fluctuation start meter effect shown in FIG. (according to the number of changes in the decorative pattern), the meter frame EM2A moves to the right end (end point) P3 side, as shown in FIG. 77(B). In addition, FIG. 77(B) shows a state in which, for example, the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative pattern is performed five times, and the meter area EM3A has reached the center (midpoint) P2 of the meter frame EM2A. Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a variation end meter effect is executed. In this variation end meter effect, the meter value is calculated when the effect of temporarily stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after the start of variation is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times maximum) during one variation of the special symbol. represents. That is, in the variation end meter performance, as a result of the predetermined number of pseudo consecutive performances (maximum number of times) being performed during one variation of the special symbol, the meter area EM3A is moved to the right end (end point) of the meter frame EM2A. ) P3 has been reached, indicating that the meter value is full. Further, almost at the same time when the meter value becomes full, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R come to a complete stop. In the meter image EM1A, when the meter value is full and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have completely stopped, it is reported that one variation of the special symbol has ended. Therefore, EM4A in the meter image EM1A shown in FIGS. 77(A) and 77(B) represents the remaining variation time in one variation of the special symbol. In addition, in FIG. 77(C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("958").

That is, in the meter effect A shown in FIG. 77, when one variation of the special symbol is started, the meter area EM3A in the meter image EM1A changes to the meter frame EM2A according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect in the decorative symbol. As the meter moves from the starting point P1 to the ending point P3 side, the meter value rises, and when one variation of the special symbol ends, the meter area EM3A reaches the ending point P3 from the starting point P1 of the meter frame EM2A, and the meter value is full. (the remaining variation time EM4A in one variation of the special symbol becomes 0), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R completely stop. This makes it possible to notify one change in the special symbol.

[Meter production B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining meter effect B.
In meter performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a fluctuation start meter performance is executed at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. In this fluctuation start meter production, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 78(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("589"). Further, a meter image EM1A is displayed below the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The meter image EM1A includes a meter frame EM2A, a meter area EM3A (the cross-hatched portion shown in FIGS. 78(B) to (E)), and the pending icon (the pending icon corresponding to the special symbol that is changing) EM5B. The hold icon EM5B moves on the meter frame EM2A, the meter area EM3A moves within the meter frame EM2A in conjunction with the hold icon EM5B, and the meter value changes as the hold icon EM5B and meter area EM3A move. represents. Note that the meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged horizontally below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a fluctuating meter effect is executed while the special symbols are fluctuating. In this fluctuating meter performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R perform the above-mentioned pseudo continuous performance.
In this pseudo-continuous performance in the fluctuating meter performance, during one fluctuation of the special symbol, a performance that temporarily stops the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after starting the fluctuation is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 10 times). That is, in the pseudo-continuous display in this fluctuating meter display, a display is performed to make it appear as if the decorative symbols are displayed in a pseudo manner consecutively a predetermined number of times during one variation of the special symbol. In addition, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, in the meter image EM1A, the pending icon EM5B moves on the meter frame EM2A according to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (for example, according to the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative symbols). Move from left to right. The meter area EM3A moves from left to right within the meter frame EM2A in conjunction with the hold icon EM5B. In other words, the meter value increases.
More specifically, the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A are located at the left end (starting point) P1 of the meter frame EM2A in the fluctuation start meter effect shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 78(B), the meter frame EM2A moves to the right end (end point) P3 side (for example, depending on the number of changes in the pseudo decorative pattern). In addition, in FIG. 78(B), for example, the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative pattern is performed five times, and the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A reach the center (middle point) P2A of the meter frame EM2A. ing. In addition, a reservation icon indicating the number of reservations of the special symbol is displayed at the right end of the meter frame EM2A, and HA1 indicates the first reservation, and HA2 indicates the second reservation. Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), character presentation is performed. In this character performance, the pseudo continuous performance is performed one more time from the state shown in FIG. It shows how it appears near the hold icon EM5B above the meter frame EM2A. In addition, the number of pending special symbols indicates that the third pending HA3 is increased by one from the number shown in FIG. 78(B). Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(D), a pending change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, the pseudo continuous effect is performed one more time from the state shown in FIG. And the words "Super hot!" (remarks made by the character CRA) are displayed near the hold icon EM5B above the meter frame EM2A, and the reach is reached in a pseudo continuous effect (decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped in the jackpot symbol arrangement) , the decorative pattern 8C is in the state of "7↓7") while changing. Furthermore, in the hold change effect shown in FIG. 78(D), it is shown that the approximately diamond-shaped hold icon EM5B has changed to the approximately heart-shaped hold icon EM6B, and in this case, the color also changes. (For example, the pending icon EM5B is white and the pending icon EM6B is red). In addition, the number of pending special symbols shows that the fourth pending HA4 is increased by one from the number shown in FIG. 78(C). Further, EM4A will be described later. Although not shown, in the pseudo-continuous performance shown in FIG. 78(D), there is a temporary stop (for example, "767") at a missed symbol arrangement, the character CRA and the letters are erased, and the heart-shaped pending icon EM6B and its color (red) return to the original diamond-shaped pending icon EM5B and its color (white).

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(E), a variation end meter effect is executed. In this variation end meter effect, the meter value is calculated when the effect of temporarily stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after the start of variation is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times maximum) during one variation of the special symbol. represents. That is, in the variation end meter performance, as a result of the predetermined number of pseudo consecutive performances (maximum number of times) being performed during one variation of the special symbol, the pending icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A are This indicates that the right end (end point) P3 of the frame EM2A has been reached and the meter value has become full. Further, almost at the same time when the meter value becomes full, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R come to a completely stopped state. In the meter image EM1A, when the meter value is full and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have completely stopped, it is notified that one variation of the special symbol has ended. Therefore, EM4A in the meter image EM1A shown in FIGS. (A), (B), (C), and (D) represents the remaining fluctuation time in one fluctuation of the special symbol. In addition, in FIG. 78(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("958"). In addition, the reservation icons (first reservation HA1, second reservation HA2, third reservation HA3, fourth reservation HA4) indicating the number of reservations of the special symbol are displayed within the meter frame EM2A and above the meter area EM3A. .

In other words, in the meter effect B shown in FIG. 78, when one variation of the special symbol starts, the pending icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A change to the meter frame according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect in the decorative symbol. When EM2A moves from the starting point P1 to the ending point P3 side and the meter value rises, and one variation of the special symbol ends, the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A reach the ending point P3 from the starting point P1 of the meter frame EM2A. When the meter value becomes full (the remaining variation time EM4A in one variation of the special symbol becomes 0), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R completely stop. This makes it possible to notify one change in the special symbol.

[Meter production C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining meter effect C.
In meter performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a fluctuation start meter performance is executed at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. In this fluctuation start meter production, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 79(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("589"). Further, a meter image EM1A is displayed below the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A, a meter area EM3A (the cross-hatched parts shown in FIGS. 79(B), (D), and (F)), and a pointer EM5C, and the pointer EM5C moves on the meter frame EM2A. (Rotating clockwise around point CP), the meter area EM3A is a meter that moves within the meter frame EM2A in conjunction with the pointer EM5C, and the meter value is expressed by the movement of the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A. Note that the meter image EM1A has a circular shape and is arranged approximately at the center below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a fluctuating meter effect is executed while the special symbols are fluctuating. In this fluctuating meter performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R perform the above-mentioned pseudo continuous performance.
In this pseudo-continuous performance in the fluctuating meter performance, during one fluctuation of the special symbol, a performance that temporarily stops the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after starting the fluctuation is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 10 times). That is, in the pseudo-continuous display in this fluctuating meter display, a display is performed to make it appear as if the decorative symbols are displayed in a pseudo manner consecutively a predetermined number of times during one variation of the special symbol. In addition, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, in the meter image EM1A, the pointer EM5C moves the meter frame EM2A in accordance with the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (for example, according to the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative pattern). As shown in 79(B), it rotates clockwise around point CP. The meter area EM3A rotates clockwise within the meter frame EM2A in conjunction with the pointer EM5C (cross-hatched portion shown in FIG. 79(B)). In other words, the meter value increases.
More specifically, the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A are located at the lower left (starting point) P1 of the meter frame EM2A in the fluctuation start meter effect shown in FIG. , according to the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. 79(B), the meter frame EM2A rotates toward the lower right (end point) P3 side. In addition, FIG. 79(B) shows a state in which, for example, the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative pattern is performed five times, and the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A have reached the midpoint P2 of the meter frame EM2A. Note that EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(C), a cut-in effect is performed as a chance-up effect. In this cut-in effect, cut-in image H1A is displayed. The cut-in image H1A is a chance-up image suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high, and the character CRA and the words "Super Hot!" (remarks of the character CRA) are displayed. Although the cut-in effect is not shown, a cut-in effect (chance-up effect) that is different from the cut-in image H1A and has a relatively low jackpot expectation may be executed. In this case, the appearance rate of the cut-in effect with relatively low jackpot expectation is higher than the cut-in effect using cut-in image H1A with relatively high jackpot expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), a pseudo consecutive reach effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuous reach effect, after the cut-in effect has been executed, the pseudo-continuous reach effect is in reach (decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped in the jackpot pattern arrangement, decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating, "7↓7"). It shows what is happening. Furthermore, in the pseudo-continuous reach effect shown in FIG. 79(D), the entire meter image EM1A is shown to have turned red and blinked. Note that EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(E), a jackpot notification effect is executed. This jackpot notification performance shows a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are completely stopped at the jackpot symbol arrangement "777" as a result of the execution of the pseudo consecutive reach performance shown in FIG. 79(D). Further, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Jackpot!" are displayed. That is, in the jackpot notification performance, during one fluctuation of the special symbol, a plurality of pseudo consecutive performances are performed in the pseudo continuous performance, and as a result, the fluctuation of the special symbol has become a jackpot. This jackpot notification performance notifies the user that one variation of the special symbol has ended. In other words, in one variation of the special symbol this time, the maximum number of times (10 times) of pseudo-continuation is not performed, and it is notified that one variation of the special symbol has ended.

On the other hand, in the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 79(C), when the cut-in effect with relatively low jackpot expectation is executed, after the execution of the pseudo continuous reach effect shown in FIG. 79(D) described above, , as shown in FIG. 79(F), a variation end meter effect is executed. This variation end meter effect represents the meter value when the effect of temporarily stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after the start of variation is repeated a predetermined number of times (up to 10 times) during one variation of the special symbol. ing. That is, in the variation end meter performance, as a result of the predetermined number of pseudo consecutive performances (maximum number of times) being performed during one variation of the special symbol, the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A change to the meter frame EM2A. This indicates that the meter has reached the end point P3 and the meter has become full. Further, almost at the same time when the meter value becomes full, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R come to a complete stop. In the meter image EM1A, when the meter value is full and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have completely stopped, it is notified that one variation of the special symbol has ended. Therefore, EM4A in the meter image EM1A shown in FIGS. 79(B) and (D) represents the remaining variation time in one variation of the special symbol. In addition, in FIG. 79(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("958").

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effects of meter effects.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to display a meter image EM1A that notifies one change in the special symbol. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify a single change in a monotonous special symbol with a meter image in which the meter value visually changes over time without using decorative symbols, and the player can At the same time, expectations can be maintained. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the meter image EM1A is such that when the special symbol starts changing, the meter area EM3A is located at the starting point P1 of the meter frame EM2A, and the meter image EM1A is located at the starting point P1 of the meter frame EM2A. At the end of the variation, the meter area EM3A is located at the end point P3 of the meter frame EM2A, thereby making it possible to notify one variation of the special symbol. According to this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the progress status of one variation of the special symbol, and the player can accurately understand that one variation of the special symbol has been executed. can. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, while the special symbol is changing, the meter area EM3A moves from the starting point P1 to the ending point P3 side of the meter frame EM2A, and the meter value rises and when one variation of the special symbol ends, the meter area EM3A reaches from the starting point P1 of the meter frame EM2A to the ending point P3, and the meter value becomes full (the remaining amount in one variation of the special symbol The variation time EM4A becomes 0), thereby making it possible to notify one variation of the special symbol. According to this configuration, it is possible to very clearly notify the progress state of one variation of the special symbol, and the player can extremely accurately grasp the progress state of one variation of the special symbol. can. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, a pseudo continuous effect is performed during a period in which the meter effect is executed during one variation of the special symbol. According to this configuration, it is possible to make one variation of the special symbol appear as if the variation display of the decorative symbol has been repeated a predetermined number of times, and the player has greater expectations for the pseudo-sequence performance. be able to. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, during the variation of the special symbol, the meter image EM1A changes to the meter area EM3A according to the number of pseudo variations of the decorative symbol in the pseudo continuous performance. is configured to move from the starting point P1 to the ending point P3 side of the meter frame EM2A. According to this configuration, the meter value quantitatively increases by a predetermined value each time a pseudo fluctuation of the decorative pattern is performed in the pseudo-sequence performance, so the player can know how many times the decorative pattern will be displayed in a variable manner. It is possible to determine very accurately whether the As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the meter effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the meter image EM1A has a rectangular or circular shape in the meter effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the meter image EM1A may have another shape such as a fan shape or a triangle. Although the meter image EM1A is arranged horizontally below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, it may be arranged horizontally above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, They may be arranged vertically on both the left and right sides of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, in the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves from the starting point P1 to the ending point P3 of the meter frame EM2A, thereby controlling one change in the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one change in the special symbol may be notified by moving the meter area EM3A between arbitrary points in the middle of the meter frame EM2A. Further, although the meter area EM3A, the hold icon EM5B, and the pointer EM5C are shown to move horizontally or rotationally, they may be moved in other forms, such as vertical movement, diagonal movement, or zigzag movement. Good too.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78(D), in the hold change effect, the decorative symbols are displayed in a ready-to-reach state in the pseudo continuous effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, in a hold change production, instead of a pseudo-continuous production in which the decorative symbols are in a reach state, a predetermined logo (for example, NEXT) is displayed, and then a production that develops into a battle production, story production, etc. It may also be executed. Furthermore, in the hold change effect, the hold icon EM5B changes from a white diamond shape to a red heart-shaped hold icon EM6B, but these colors and shapes are not limited.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79(C), in the cut-in effect, the character CRA and the words "Gekiatsu!" (remarks of the character CRA) are displayed. is not limited to this. For example, in the cut-in effect, only the character CRA may be displayed, or only predetermined characters may be displayed.In short, the display format allows players to remember that they have a relatively high expectation of winning the jackpot. Any display may be used.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the meter frame EM2A has no scale in the meter effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the meter frame EM2A may have partition lines at equal intervals, or digital numbers corresponding to scales may be written above or below the meter frame EM2A.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B3-1]
A display means capable of performing multiple types of display effects,
A symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of symbols;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined meter effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The meter performance has at least a first aspect and a second aspect, and changes from the first aspect to the second aspect in response to one fluctuating display of the symbol by the symbol display means. By doing so, it became possible to notify one change in the symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-2]
The meter effect has a first image and a second image,
The first aspect is an aspect in which the second image is located at a first position of the first image,
The second aspect is an aspect in which the second image is located at a second position of the first image.
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1.
[Aspect B3-3]
The first aspect is related to the start of variation of the symbol,
The second aspect is related to the end of the variation of the symbol,
Furthermore, the meter performance is
It has a third mode in which the second image moves to the second position side of the first image during the variation of the symbol, and the second image moves from the first mode to the third mode and then moves to the second position side of the first image. By changing the mode, it is possible to notify one change of the symbol by the symbol display means,
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2, characterized in that:
[Aspect B3-4]
comprising a decorative pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern in accordance with the variable display of the pattern by the pattern display means;
The decorative pattern display means is capable of performing a pseudo-coupling effect,
During the period when the meter performance is being executed, the pseudo continuous performance is performed;
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-3, characterized in that:
[Aspect B3-5]
The pseudo-continuous display is a display that makes one fluctuating display of the symbol appear as if the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol has continued a predetermined number of times;
In the third aspect,
the second image moves according to the number of pseudo fluctuation displays of the decorative pattern in the pseudo continuous presentation;
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4.

The meter countdown effect will be explained below using FIGS. 80 to 82. This meter countdown effect is performed while the special symbol is being displayed in fluctuation (during one fluctuation display), and for example, if the game state is high probability state, time saving state, electric chew support (electric chew 22 is frequently opened), etc. This can be executed when the second starting port 21 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize (hereinafter also referred to as "densapo"). In addition, the variation time of the special symbol in which this meter countdown effect is executed is longer than usual.

[Meter countdown performance A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining meter countdown effect A.
In the meter countdown effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a change start meter countdown effect is executed when the special symbol starts changing. In this fluctuation start meter countdown effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the middle pattern display area, and the right decoration is in the right pattern display area. Symbol 8R is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 80(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("589").
Further, a meter image EM1A as an analog display is displayed below the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A and a meter area EM3A (the cross-hatched parts shown in FIGS. 80(B) and (C)), where the meter area EM3A is a meter that moves within the meter frame EM2A, and the meter area EM3A is a meter that moves within the meter frame EM2A. The movement represents the meter value. Note that the meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged horizontally below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, EM4A will be described later.
Further, a countdown display EC1H as a digital display is arranged at the upper left of the display screen 7a. The countdown display EC1H is a mode in which a predetermined number is displayed within the display area of the round frame EC2H, and in the meter countdown performance A that is performed at the start of fluctuation of this special symbol, the initial value "10" is displayed. It looks like this.
That is, in this meter countdown effect A, the meter image EM1A as an analog display and the countdown display EC1H as a digital display are displayed simultaneously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), a fluctuating meter countdown effect is executed while the special symbols are fluctuating. In this fluctuating meter countdown performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R execute the above-mentioned pseudo continuous performance.
In this pseudo-continuous performance in the meter countdown performance during fluctuation, during one fluctuation of the special symbol, a performance that temporarily stops the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after starting their fluctuation is repeated a predetermined number of times (maximum 10 times). That is, in the pseudo-continuous performance in this fluctuating meter countdown performance, a performance is performed to make it appear as if the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern has continued a predetermined number of times during one fluctuation of the special symbol.
In addition, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, in the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves from the left in the meter frame EM2A according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect (according to the number of times the pseudo decorative pattern changes). Move a fixed amount to the right. In other words, the meter value increases. More specifically, the meter area EM3A is located at the left end (starting point) P1 of the meter frame EM2A in the variation start meter countdown effect shown in FIG. (according to the number of variations of the decorative pattern), the meter frame EM2A moves by a fixed amount to the right end (end point) P3 side, as shown in FIG. 80(B). Therefore, the rate at which the meter value increases changes depending on the execution time of one pseudo continuous performance. For example, if a performance with a long execution time (for example, a reach performance) is performed in the current pseudo-continuous performance, the meter value will rise more slowly than a performance with a short execution time (for example, a winning performance). Note that FIG. 80(B) shows a state in which the pseudo decorative pattern has been changed five times and the meter area EM3A has reached the center (middle point) P2 of the meter frame EM2A. Further, EM4A will be described later.
Furthermore, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, the countdown display EC1H is counted down according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect (according to the number of times the pseudo decorative symbols change). More specifically, the countdown display EC1H indicates the initial value "10" in the variation start meter countdown effect shown in FIG. ``1'' is decremented each time ``is executed once.'' Therefore, in FIG. 80(B), the countdown display EC1H shows "5" because the number of changes in the pseudo decorative pattern has been changed five times. Furthermore, for the same reason as above, the speed at which the countdown display EC1H is counted down changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a variation end meter countdown effect is executed. In this variation end meter countdown effect, the meter value is calculated when the effect of temporarily stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after the start of variation is repeated a predetermined number of times (up to 10 times) during one variation of the special symbol. and a countdown display. That is, in the variation end meter countdown performance, during one variation of the special symbol, a predetermined number of pseudo consecutive performances are performed in the pseudo continuous performance, and as a result, the meter area EM3A is changed to the right end (end point) P3 of the meter frame EM2A. This indicates that the meter value has reached and the meter value has become full, while the countdown display EC1H indicates "0".
Further, almost at the same time when the countdown display EC1H becomes "0" and the meter value becomes full, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R come to a completely stopped state. In the meter image EM1A, the meter value has become full, the countdown display EC1H has become "0", and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have completely stopped. Notify that the fluctuation of has ended. Therefore, EM4A in the meter image EM1A shown in FIGS. 80(A) and 80(B) represents the remaining variation time in one variation of the special symbol. Further, the numerical value indicated by the countdown display EC1H indicates the remaining number of pseudo consecutives in one variation of the special symbol (it can also be said to represent the remaining variation time). In addition, in FIG. 80(C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("958").

In other words, in the meter countdown effect A shown in FIG. The area EM3A moves from the starting point P1 of the meter frame EM2A toward the ending point P3, and the meter value increases. Further, the countdown display EC1H as a digital display indicates a numerical value subtracted by "1" from the initial value "10" according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect in the decorative pattern. Then, when one variation of the special symbol ends, the meter area EM3A reaches from the starting point P1 to the ending point P3 of the meter frame EM2A, and the meter value becomes full (the remaining variation in one variation of the special symbol As the time EM4A becomes 0), the countdown display EC1H shows "0" and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R completely stop. That is, in the meter countdown effect A, one change in the special symbol can be notified by two types of display effects: an analog display and a digital display.

[Meter countdown performance B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining meter countdown effect B.
In meter countdown effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), a change start meter countdown effect is executed when the special symbol starts changing. In this fluctuation start meter countdown effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the middle pattern display area, and the right decoration is in the right pattern display area. Symbol 8R is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 81(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing pattern arrangement ("589").
Further, a meter image EM1A as an analog display is displayed below the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The meter image EM1A includes a meter frame EM2A, a meter area EM3A (the cross-hatched parts shown in FIGS. 81(B), (C), (D), and (E)), and the pending icon (corresponding to the special symbol that is changing). The hold icon EM5B moves on the meter frame EM2A, the meter area EM3A moves within the meter frame EM2A in conjunction with the hold icon EM5B, and the hold icon EM5B and the meter area The movement of EM3A represents the meter value. Note that the meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged horizontally below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, EM4A will be described later.
Further, a countdown display EC1H as a digital display is arranged at the upper left of the display screen 7a. The countdown display EC1H is a mode in which a predetermined number is displayed within the display area of the round frame EC2H, and in the meter countdown performance B that is performed at the start of the fluctuation of this special symbol, the initial value "10" is displayed. It looks like this.
That is, in this meter countdown effect B, the meter image EM1A including the pending icon EM5B as an analog display and the countdown display EC1H as a digital display are displayed simultaneously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a fluctuating meter countdown effect is executed while the special symbols are fluctuating. In this fluctuating meter performance/countdown, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R execute the above-mentioned pseudo continuous performance.
In this pseudo-continuous performance in the meter countdown performance during fluctuation, during one fluctuation of the special symbol, a performance that temporarily stops the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after starting their fluctuation is repeated a predetermined number of times (maximum 10 times). That is, in the pseudo-continuous performance in this fluctuating meter countdown performance, a performance is performed to make it appear as if the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern has continued a predetermined number of times during one fluctuation of the special symbol.
In addition, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, in the meter image EM1A, the pending icon EM5B moves from the left on the meter frame EM2A according to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (according to the number of changes in the pseudo decorative pattern). Move a fixed amount to the right. The meter area EM3A moves by a fixed amount from left to right within the meter frame EM2A in conjunction with the hold icon EM5B. In other words, the meter value increases. More specifically, the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A are located at the left end (starting point) P1 of the meter frame EM2A in the fluctuation start meter countdown effect shown in FIG. Accordingly (according to the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. 81(B), the meter frame EM2A moves to the right end (end point) P3 side by a fixed amount. Therefore, the rate at which the meter value increases changes depending on the execution time of one pseudo continuous performance. For example, if a performance with a long execution time (for example, a reach performance) is performed in the current pseudo-continuous performance, the meter value will rise more slowly than a performance with a short execution time (for example, a winning performance). Note that FIG. 81(B) shows that the pseudo decorative pattern has been changed five times, and the pending icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A have reached the center (middle point) P2A of the meter frame EM2A. . In addition, at the right end of the meter frame EM2A, a reservation icon indicating the number of reservations of the special symbol is displayed, and HA1 indicates the first reservation, and HA2 indicates the second reservation. Further, EM4A will be described later.
Furthermore, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, the countdown display EC1H is counted down according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect (according to the number of times the pseudo decorative symbols change). More specifically, the countdown display EC1H indicates the initial value "10" in the variation start meter countdown effect shown in FIG. ``1'' is decremented each time ``is executed once.'' Therefore, in FIG. 81(B), the countdown display EC1H shows "5" because the number of changes in the pseudo decorative pattern has been changed five times. In other words, this suggests that the pseudo-run count can be executed five more times. Furthermore, for the same reason as above, the speed at which the countdown display EC1H is counted down changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), character presentation is performed. In this character performance, the pseudo continuous performance is performed one more time from the state shown in FIG. It shows how it appears near the hold icon EM5B above the meter frame EM2A. In addition, the number of pending special symbols indicates that the number of third pending HA3 is increased by one from the number shown in FIG. 81(B). Further, EM4A will be described later.
Furthermore, when the character performance is executed and the pseudo continuous performance is performed one more time from the state shown in FIG. ing. In other words, this suggests that the pseudo-run count can be executed four more times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), a pending change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, the pseudo continuous effect is performed one more time from the state shown in FIG. And the words "Super Hot!" (remarks made by the character CRA) are displayed near the hold icon EM5B above the meter frame EM2A, and the reach is reached with a pseudo-continuous effect (decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped in the jackpot symbol arrangement) , the decorative pattern 8C is in a state of "7↓7") while changing. Furthermore, in the hold change effect shown in FIG. 81(D), it is shown that the approximately diamond-shaped hold icon EM5B has changed to the approximately heart-shaped hold icon EM6B, and in this case, the color also changes. (For example, the pending icon EM5B is white and the pending icon EM6B is red). In addition, the number of pending special symbols shows that the fourth pending HA4 is increased by one from the number shown in FIG. 81(C). Further, EM4A will be described later.
In addition, when the pending change effect is executed and the pseudo continuous effect is performed one more time from the state shown in FIG. It shows. In other words, this suggests that the pseudo-run count can be executed three more times.
Although not shown, in the pseudo-continuous performance shown in FIG. 81(D), there is a temporary stop (for example, "767") at a missed symbol arrangement, the character CRA and the letters are erased, and the heart-shaped pending icon EM6B and its color (red) return to the original diamond-shaped pending icon EM5B and its color (white).

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), a variation end meter countdown effect is executed. In this variation end meter countdown effect, the meter value is calculated when the effect of temporarily stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after the start of variation is repeated a predetermined number of times (up to 10 times) during one variation of the special symbol. and a countdown display. That is, in the variation end meter countdown performance, as a result of the predetermined number of pseudo consecutive performances being performed during one variation of the special symbol, the pending icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A are changed to the meter frame EM2A. This indicates that the right end (end point) P3 has been reached and the meter value has become full. On the other hand, the countdown display EC1H shows "0". In other words, this suggests that the pseudo-run count is not executed.
Further, almost at the same time when the countdown display EC1H becomes "0" and the meter value becomes full, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R come to a completely stopped state. In the meter image EM1A, the meter value has become full, the countdown display EC1H has become "0", and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have completely stopped. Notify that the fluctuation of has ended. Therefore, EM4A in the meter image EM1A shown in (A), (B), (C), and (D) represents the remaining fluctuation time in one fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, the numerical value indicated by the countdown display EC1H indicates the remaining number of pseudo consecutives in one variation of the special symbol (it can also be said to represent the remaining variation time). In addition, in FIG. 81(C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("958"). In addition, the reservation icons (first reservation HA1, second reservation HA2, third reservation HA3, fourth reservation HA4) indicating the number of reservations of the special symbol are displayed within the meter frame EM2A and above the meter area EM3A. .

In other words, in the meter countdown effect B shown in FIG. 81, when one variation of the special symbol is started, the relevant meter image EM1A as an analog display is displayed according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect in the decorative pattern. The hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A move from the starting point P1 of the meter frame EM2A toward the ending point P3, and the meter value increases. Further, the countdown display EC1H as a digital display shows a numerical value that is subtracted by "1" from the initial value "10" according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect in the decorative pattern. When one variation of the special symbol is completed, the hold icon EM5B and meter area EM3A reach from the starting point P1 to the ending point P3 of the meter frame EM2A, and the meter value becomes full (one variation of the special symbol (The remaining fluctuation time EM4A becomes 0) and the countdown display E
C1H indicates "0" (the remaining pseudo consecutive number in one variation of the special symbol becomes 0), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R completely stop. That is, in the meter countdown effect B, one change in the special symbol can be notified by two types of display effects: an analog display and a digital display.

[Meter countdown production C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the meter countdown effect C.
In the meter countdown effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a change start meter countdown effect is executed when the special symbol starts changing. In this fluctuation start meter countdown effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the middle pattern display area, and the right decoration is in the right pattern display area. Symbol 8R is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 82(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("589"). Further, a meter image EM1A is displayed below the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A, a meter area EM3A (the cross-hatched portion shown in Figures (B), (D, and (F))), and a pointer EM5C, and the pointer EM5C moves on the meter frame EM2A ( The meter area EM3A moves within the meter frame EM2A in conjunction with the pointer EM5C, and the meter value is expressed by the movement of the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A. Note that the meter image EM1A has a circular shape and is arranged approximately at the center below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, EM4A will be described later.
Further, a countdown display EC3H as a digital display is arranged around the outer periphery of the meter frame EM2A. As shown in FIG. 82(A), the countdown display EC3H displays numbers from "10" to "0" at equal intervals along the outer periphery of the meter frame EM2A, so that the tip of the pointer EM5C points to these numbers. It is located in In the countdown display EC3H, the pointer EM5C points to the initial value "10" in the meter countdown performance C performed when the special symbol changes.
That is, in this meter countdown effect C, the meter image EM1A as an analog display and the countdown display EC3H as a digital display are displayed integrally.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), a fluctuating meter countdown effect is executed while the special symbols are fluctuating. In this fluctuating meter countdown performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R execute the above-mentioned pseudo continuous performance.
In this pseudo-continuous performance in the meter countdown performance during fluctuation, during one fluctuation of the special symbol, a performance that temporarily stops the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after starting their fluctuation is repeated a predetermined number of times (maximum 10 times). That is, in the pseudo-continuous performance in this fluctuating meter countdown performance, a performance is performed to make it appear as if the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern has continued a predetermined number of times during one fluctuation of the special symbol.
Furthermore, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, in the meter image EM1A, the pointer EM5C moves on the meter frame EM2A according to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (according to the number of changes in the pseudo decorative pattern) as shown in FIG. As shown in B), it rotates clockwise around point CP by a fixed amount. The meter area EM3A rotates clockwise within the meter frame EM2A by a fixed amount in conjunction with the pointer EM5C (cross-hatched portion shown in FIG. 82(B)). In other words, the meter value increases.
More specifically, the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A are located at the lower left (starting point) of the meter frame EM2A in the variation start meter countdown effect shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 82(B), depending on the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (according to the number of changes in the pseudo-decoration pattern), the lower right of the meter frame EM2A (end point, countdown display EC3H) The countdown display EC3H is rotated one scale at a time toward the position (where EC3H indicates "0"). Therefore, the rate at which the meter value increases changes depending on the execution time of one pseudo continuous performance. For example, if a performance with a long execution time (for example, a reach performance) is performed in the current pseudo-continuous performance, the meter value will rise more slowly than a performance with a short execution time (for example, a winning performance). Furthermore, for the same reason, the speed at which the countdown display EC3H is counted down changes. In addition, in FIG. 82(B), the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative pattern is performed five times, the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A are at the midpoint of the meter frame EM2A, and the countdown display EC3H is at the position where it shows "5". It shows how it has been reached. Note that EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a cut-in effect is performed as a chance-up effect. In this cut-in effect, cut-in image H1A is displayed. The cut-in image H1A is a chance-up image suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high, and the character CRA and the words "Super Hot!" (remarks of the character CRA) are displayed. Although the cut-in effect is not shown, a cut-in effect (chance-up effect) that is different from the cut-in image H1A and has a relatively low jackpot expectation may be executed. In this case, the appearance rate of the cut-in effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation is higher than that of the cut-in effect using the cut-in image H1A with a relatively high jackpot expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), a pseudo consecutive reach effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuous reach effect, after the cut-in effect has been executed, the pseudo-continuous reach effect is in reach (decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped in the jackpot pattern arrangement, decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating, "7↓7"). It shows what is happening. Furthermore, in the pseudo-continuous reach effect shown in FIG. 82(D), the entire meter image EM1A is shown to have turned red and blinked. Note that EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), a jackpot notification effect is executed. This jackpot notification performance shows a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are completely stopped at the jackpot symbol arrangement "777" as a result of the execution of the pseudo consecutive reach performance shown in FIG. 82(D). Further, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Jackpot!" are displayed. That is, in the jackpot notification performance, during one movement of the special symbol, multiple pseudo-sequences (5 times in this example) were performed in the pseudo-sequence presentation, and as a result, the variation of the special symbol became a jackpot. It is shown that. This jackpot notification performance notifies the user that one variation of the special symbol has ended. In other words, in this one variation of the special symbol, the number of pseudo consecutives is not performed 10 times, and the jackpot is reached on the sixth pseudo consecutive number, and it is notified that the one variation of the special symbol has ended. There is.

On the other hand, in the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 82(C), when a cut-in effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation is executed, after the execution of the pseudo continuous reach effect shown in FIG. 82(D) described above, , as shown in FIG. 82(F), a variation end meter countdown effect is executed. In this variation end meter countdown effect, the meter value is calculated when the effect of temporarily stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after the start of variation is repeated a predetermined number of times (up to 10 times) during one variation of the special symbol. and a countdown display. That is, in the variation end meter performance/countdown, as a result of a predetermined number of pseudo consecutive performances being performed during one variation of the special symbol, the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A reach the end point of the meter frame EM2A. Then, the countdown display EC3H reaches a position where it shows "0". This indicates that the meter value is full, and the countdown display EC3H suggests that the pseudo continuous number will not be executed. Further, almost at the same time when the countdown display EC3H becomes "0" and the meter value becomes full, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R come to a completely stopped state. In the meter image EM1A, the meter value has become full, the countdown display EC3H has become "0", and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have completely stopped. Notify that the fluctuation of has ended. Therefore, figure (
EM4A in the meter image EM1A shown in A), (B), and (D) represents the remaining fluctuation time in one fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, the numerical value indicated by the countdown display EC3H indicates the remaining number of pseudo consecutives in one variation of the special symbol (it can also be said to represent the remaining variation time). In addition, in FIG. 82(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("958").

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the meter countdown effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 to 82, a meter image EM1A that notifies one change in the special symbol and a countdown display EC1H (countdown display EC3H) are displayed. There is. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify a single change in a monotonous special symbol with a meter image and a countdown display in which the meter value visually changes over time without using decorative symbols, and the player can maintain a sense of anticipation over time. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since the player can recognize one change in the special symbol in multiple types of notification formats, such as analog display and digital display, the player can also grasp the gaming situation extremely accurately.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 to 82, the meter image EM1A is such that when the special symbol starts changing, the meter area EM3A is located at the starting point of the meter frame EM2A, and the meter area EM3A is located at the starting point of the meter frame EM2A, and when the special symbol starts changing once, the meter image EM1A is At the end, the meter area EM3A is located at the end point of the meter frame EM2A, thereby making it possible to notify one change in the special symbol. In addition, the countdown display EC1H (countdown display EC3H) shows "10" at the start of the special symbol fluctuation, then counts down with one special symbol fluctuation, and shows "0" at the end of one special symbol fluctuation. This makes it possible to notify one change in the special symbol. According to this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the progress status of one variation of the special symbol, and the player can accurately understand that one variation of the special symbol has been executed. can. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 to 82, while the special symbol is changing, the meter image EM1A moves the meter area EM3A and the hold icon EM5B from the starting point to the ending point side of the meter frame EM2A. When the meter value rises and one variation of the special symbol ends, the meter area EM3A and the corresponding hold icon EM5B reach the end point of the meter frame EM2A, and the meter value becomes full (one variation of the special symbol (The remaining variation time EM4A in the variation becomes 0), thereby making it possible to notify one variation of the special symbol. Further, the countdown display EC1H (countdown display EC3H) counts down by "1" while the special symbol is changing, and becomes "0" when one variation of the special symbol ends. According to this configuration, it is possible to very clearly notify the progress state of one variation of the special symbol, and the player can extremely accurately grasp the progress state of one variation of the special symbol. can. Further, during one change of the special symbol, it is possible to perform an effect such as changing the hold icon EM5B to hold. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 to 82, during the period when the meter countdown effect is executed during one change of the special symbol, a pseudo continuous effect is performed. . According to this configuration, it is possible to make one variation of the special symbol appear as if the variation display of the decorative symbol has been repeated a predetermined number of times, and the player has greater expectations for the pseudo-sequence performance. be able to. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 to 82, during the variation of the special symbol, the meter image EM1A is displayed in the meter area EM3A according to the number of pseudo variations of the decorative symbol in the pseudo continuous performance. is configured to move from the starting point to the ending point side of the meter frame EM2A. Further, the countdown display EC1H (countdown display EC3H) is configured to count down by "1" each time the number of pseudo fluctuations of the decorative symbols in the pseudo continuous performance is performed. According to this configuration, each time a pseudo variation of the decorative pattern is performed in the pseudo continuous performance, the meter value quantitatively increases by a predetermined value, and the countdown display EC1H (countdown display EC3H) counts down by "1". Therefore, the player can very accurately grasp how many times the decorative symbols will be displayed in a variable manner, and furthermore, the remaining variable period. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, the meter image EM1A as an analog display and the countdown display EC3H as a digital display are integrally displayed. According to this configuration, the display area of the display screen 7a can be effectively utilized and an easy-to-understand display can be performed, so that the player can enjoy the game smoothly, easily, and with peace of mind. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the meter countdown performance is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 to 82, in the meter countdown effect, the meter image EM1A as an analog display is rectangular or circular. It is not limited. For example, the meter image EM1A may have another shape such as a fan shape or a triangle. Although the meter image EM1A is arranged horizontally below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, it may also be arranged horizontally above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, They may be arranged vertically on both the left and right sides of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Furthermore, the analog display may be anything other than the meter image EM1A; in short, it may be any image as long as it can express a certain quantity or data as a physical quantity that can change continuously. good.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 to 82, the countdown display EC1H is performed in such a manner that a predetermined number is displayed within the display area of the round frame EC2H at the upper left of the display screen 7a. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the round frame EC2H may have other shapes such as a sector, a triangle, or a quadrangle. Furthermore, the digital display may be other than the countdown display EC1H (countdown display EC3H); in short, any image can be used as long as it can express a certain amount or data as a finite number string. There may be.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 to 82, in the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves from the start point to the end point of the meter frame EM2A to notify one change in the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one change in the special symbol may be notified by moving the meter area EM3A between arbitrary points in the middle of the meter frame EM2A. Further, although the meter area EM3A, the hold icon EM5B, and the pointer EM5C are shown to move horizontally or rotationally, they may be moved in other forms, such as vertical movement, diagonal movement, or zigzag movement. Good too. In addition, the countdown display EC3H (countdown display EC3H) was configured to count down by "1" from the initial value "10" to "0", but these numbers are arbitrary and can be changed as appropriate, for example. It may also be in the form of counting up.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81(D), in the hold change effect, the decorative symbols are displayed in a ready-to-reach state in the pseudo continuous effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, in a hold change production, instead of a pseudo-continuous production in which the decorative symbols are in a reach state, a predetermined logo (for example, NEXT) is displayed, and then a production that develops into a battle production, story production, etc. It may also be executed. Furthermore, in the hold change effect, the hold icon EM5B changes from a white diamond shape to a red heart-shaped hold icon EM6B, but these colors and shapes are not limited. Furthermore, the number of characters CRA to be displayed is not limited to one, and may be displayed in a plurality of characters, e.g., to remind the user of high expectations.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82(C), in the cut-in effect, the character CRA and the words "Gekiatsu!" (remarks of the character CRA) are displayed. is not limited to this. For example, in the cut-in effect, only the character CRA, multiple characters CRA, only predetermined characters, or multiple characters may be displayed. , any display format may be used as long as it is possible to recall that the expectation level of jackpot is relatively high.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B4-1]
A display means capable of performing multiple types of display effects,
A symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of symbols;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect has at least a first aspect and a second aspect, and changes from the first aspect to the second aspect in response to one fluctuating display of the symbol by the symbol display means. By changing, it is possible to notify one change of the symbol,
The second effect has at least a third aspect and a fourth aspect, and changes from the third aspect to the fourth aspect in response to one fluctuating display of the symbol by the symbol display means. By changing, it is possible to notify one change in the symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B4-2]
The first performance is an analog display performance, the second performance is a digital display performance, and the analog display performance and the digital display performance can be displayed simultaneously.
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1.
[Aspect B4-3]
The analog display effect is a predetermined meter effect, and the digital display effect is a predetermined countdown display effect.
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-2.
[Aspect B4-4]
The third aspect is an aspect in which the first numerical value is displayed when the symbol starts to fluctuate;
The fourth aspect is a mode in which a second numerical value is displayed when the symbol changes,
Furthermore, the countdown display performance is
It has a fifth aspect in which the third numerical value is subtracted a predetermined number of times during the fluctuation of the symbol, and by changing from the third aspect to the fourth aspect through the fifth aspect, It is possible to notify one change of the symbol by the symbol display means,
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3, characterized in that:
[Aspect B4-5]
comprising a decorative pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern in accordance with the variable display of the pattern by the pattern display means;
The decorative pattern display means is capable of performing a pseudo-coupling effect,
performing the pseudo continuous effect during a period when the meter effect or the countdown display effect is being executed;
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4.
[Aspect B4-6]
The pseudo-continuous display is a display that makes one fluctuating display of the symbol appear as if the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol has continued a predetermined number of times;
In the countdown display performance, the third numerical value is subtracted every time the decorative pattern is displayed a predetermined number of times in the pseudo continuous performance.
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-5.

The rewind effect will be explained below using FIGS. 83 to 85. This rewind effect is performed during the variable display of the special symbol (during one variable display), and for example, the game state is a high probability state, a time saving state, an electric chew support (the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and This can be executed during a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the 2-starting slot 21 (hereinafter also referred to as "densapo"). In addition, the variation time of the special symbol in which this rewind effect is executed is longer than usual.

[Rewind performance A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining rewind effect A.
In rewind effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 83(A), a variation start meter effect is executed at the start of variation of the special symbol. In this fluctuation start meter production, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 83(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("589"). Further, a meter image EM1A is displayed below the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A and a meter area EM3A (the cross-hatched parts shown in FIGS. It is a moving meter, and the meter value is expressed by the movement of the meter area EM3A. Note that the meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged horizontally below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), a fluctuating meter effect is executed while the special symbols are fluctuating. In this fluctuating meter performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R perform the above-mentioned pseudo continuous performance.
In this pseudo continuous performance in the meter performance during fluctuation, during one fluctuation of the special symbol, a performance in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped after the start of fluctuation is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 10 times). That is, in the pseudo-continuous display in this fluctuating meter display, a display is performed to make it appear as if the decorative symbols are displayed in a pseudo manner consecutively a predetermined number of times during one variation of the special symbol. Furthermore, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, in the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves to the left within the meter frame EM2A according to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (for example, according to the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative pattern). Move to the right. In other words, the meter value increases. More specifically, the meter area EM3A is located at the left end (starting point) P1 of the meter frame EM2A in the fluctuation start meter effect shown in FIG. (according to the number of changes in the decorative pattern), the meter frame EM2A moves to the right end (end point) P3 side, as shown in FIG. 83(B). In addition, FIG. 83(B) shows a state in which, for example, the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative pattern is performed five times, and the meter area EM3A has reached the center (middle point) P2 of the meter frame EM2A. Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), a rewind suggestion effect is executed as a chance-up effect. In this rewind suggestion effect, a cut-in image H1A is displayed. The cut-in image H1A is an image that suggests that the game will rewind from here to the past, and the words "Repeat" are displayed. This rewind suggestion effect reminds the player that the game will be played repeatedly going back in time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a rewind effect is performed. In this rewind effect, the meter area EM3A moves from the center (midpoint) P2 of the meter frame EM2A shown in FIG. 83(B) to the left end of the meter frame EM2A in the opposite direction as shown by the arrow YA (Starting point) An effect of moving toward P1 and winding back to the return point P2B between the starting point P1 and the midpoint P2 is performed. In other words, the meter value returns again to the return point P2B that it passed once. Further, while this rewind effect is being executed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are scrolled in the opposite direction. Further, while this rewind effect is being performed, the color scheme of the display screen 7a changes to monotone. That is, while the rewind effect is being performed, the display screen 7a changes to a special color scheme different from the usual color scheme. With this effect of rewinding the meter value, the effect of scrolling the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the opposite direction, and the effect of changing the color scheme of the display screen 7a to monotone, the player can feel that the rewind effect has been executed. By recognizing this fact, the expectation of winning a jackpot increases and the taste of the game improves. Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), a meter movement restart effect is executed. This meter movement restart effect is performed when the meter area EM3A returns to the return point P2B. When the meter area EM3A returns to the return point P2B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R resume the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous performance. Furthermore, when the pseudo continuous effect is restarted, the meter area EM3A in the meter image EM1A resumes moving from left to right in accordance with the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. In other words, the meter value rises again. More specifically, the meter area EM3A moves from the return point P2B of the meter frame EM2A to the right end (end point) P3 side of the meter frame EM2A according to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (for example, according to the number of changes in the pseudo decorative pattern). Move to. Note that the point P2B in the meter frame EM2A is, for example, the point where the pseudo-continuous performance was performed three times in the fluctuating meter performance shown in FIG. 83(B) described above. In other words, in the rewinding effect shown in FIG. 83(D) described above, as the meter value moves from the midpoint P2 to the return point P2B, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect increases from 5 times to 3 times. It means rewinding. Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), a meter return pseudo continuous reach effect is executed. In this meter return pseudo continuous reach effect, the pseudo continuous effect is performed twice after the meter movement restart effect is executed, and again the meter area EM3A reaches the center (middle point) P2 from the return point P2B of the meter frame EM2A. It is sometimes done. In other words, the meter return pseudo continuous reach performance is a performance executed when returning to the point at which the rewind performance shown in FIG. 83(D) described above was started. Therefore, the meter value is the same value at the time when the rewind effect shown in FIG. 83(D) is started and the time when the meter return pseudo continuous reach effect shown in FIG. 83(F) is started. When the meter return pseudo consecutive reach effect is executed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R reach with the pseudo continuous effect (decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop at the jackpot symbol arrangement, decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating, and "7↓7 ”) state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(G), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification performance, as a result of the meter return pseudo continuous reach performance shown in FIG. 83(F) being executed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are completely stopped at the jackpot symbol arrangement "777". .
Further, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Jackpot!" are displayed. That is, in the jackpot notification performance, during one fluctuation of the special symbol, a plurality of pseudo consecutive performances are performed in the pseudo continuous performance, and as a result, the fluctuation of the special symbol has become a jackpot. This jackpot notification performance notifies the user that one variation of the special symbol has ended. In other words, in one variation of the special symbol this time, the maximum number of times (10 times) of pseudo-continuation is not performed, and it is notified that one variation of the special symbol has ended.
Further, this jackpot notification performance is a performance that is always performed when the rewind performance shown in FIG. 83(D) described above is performed. That is, when the rewind performance is performed during one variation of the special symbol, the result of one variation of the special symbol will always be a jackpot. Therefore, the rewind performance is also a performance that suggests a big hit (a solid performance).
If this one variation of the special symbol is repeated the maximum number of times (10 times) without becoming a jackpot, the meter area EM3A will reach the end point P3 of the meter frame EM2A. When the meter value becomes full (the remaining variation time EM4A in one variation of the special symbol becomes 0), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R completely stop in the losing symbol arrangement. This makes it possible to notify one change in the special symbol. Therefore, EM4A in the meter image EM1A shown in FIGS. 83(A), (B), (D), (E), and (F) represents the remaining fluctuation time in one fluctuation of the special symbol. .

[Rewind performance B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining rewind effect B.
In the rewind performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 84(A), a variation start meter countdown performance is executed when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. In this fluctuation start meter countdown effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the middle pattern display area, and the right decoration is in the right pattern display area. Symbol 8R is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 84(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("589").
Further, a meter image EM1A as an analog display is displayed below the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The meter image EM1A includes a meter frame EM2A, a meter area EM3A (the cross-hatched areas shown in Figures (B), (D), (E), and (F)), and the corresponding pending icon (the pending icon corresponding to the special symbol that is changing). icon) EM5B, the hold icon EM5B moves on the meter frame EM2A, the meter area EM3A moves within the meter frame EM2A in conjunction with the hold icon EM5B, and the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A The movement represents the meter value. Note that the meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged horizontally below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, EM4A will be described later.
Further, a countdown display EC1H as a digital display is arranged at the upper left of the display screen 7a. The countdown display EC1H is a mode in which a predetermined number is displayed within the display area of the round frame EC2H, and in the meter countdown performance B that is performed at the start of the fluctuation of this special symbol, the initial value "10" is displayed. It looks like this.
That is, in this meter countdown effect B, the meter image EM1A including the pending icon EM5B as an analog display and the countdown display EC1H as a digital display are displayed simultaneously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), a fluctuating meter countdown effect is executed while the special symbols are fluctuating. In this fluctuating meter countdown performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R execute the above-mentioned pseudo continuous performance.
In this pseudo-continuous performance in the meter countdown performance during fluctuation, during one fluctuation of the special symbol, a performance that temporarily stops the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after starting their fluctuation is repeated a predetermined number of times (maximum 10 times). That is, in the pseudo-continuous performance in this fluctuating meter countdown performance, a performance is performed to make it appear as if the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern has continued a predetermined number of times during one fluctuation of the special symbol.
In addition, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, in the meter image EM1A, the pending icon EM5B moves from the left on the meter frame EM2A according to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (according to the number of changes in the pseudo decorative pattern). Move a fixed amount to the right. The meter area EM3A moves by a fixed amount from left to right within the meter frame EM2A in conjunction with the hold icon EM5B. In other words, the meter value increases. More specifically, the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A are located at the left end (starting point) P1 of the meter frame EM2A in the fluctuation start meter countdown effect shown in FIG. Accordingly (according to the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. 84(B), the meter frame EM2A moves by a fixed amount to the right end (end point) P3 side. Therefore, the rate at which the meter value increases changes depending on the execution time of one pseudo continuous effect. For example, if a performance with a long execution time (for example, a reach performance) is performed in the current pseudo-continuous performance, the meter value will rise more slowly than a performance with a short execution time (for example, a winning performance). In addition, FIG. 84(B) shows that the pseudo decorative pattern has been changed five times and the pending icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A have reached the center (middle point) P2 of the meter frame EM2A. . In addition, at the right end of the meter frame EM2A, a reservation icon indicating the number of reservations of the special symbol is displayed, and HA1 indicates the first reservation, and HA2 indicates the second reservation. Further, EM4A will be described later.
Furthermore, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, the countdown display EC1H is counted down according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect (according to the number of times the pseudo decorative symbols change). More specifically, the countdown display EC1H indicates the initial value "10" in the variation start meter countdown effect shown in FIG. ``1'' is decremented each time ``is executed once.'' Therefore, in FIG. 84(B), the number of variations of the pseudo decorative pattern is shown to have been performed five times, so the countdown display EC1H shows "5". In other words, this suggests that the pseudo-run count can be executed five more times. Furthermore, for the same reason as above, the speed at which the countdown display EC1H is counted down changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), a rewind suggestion effect is executed as a chance-up effect. In this rewind suggestion effect, a cut-in image H1A is displayed. The cut-in image H1A is an image that suggests that the game will rewind from here to the past, and the words "Repeat" are displayed. This rewind suggestion effect reminds the player that the game will be played repeatedly going back in time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), a rewind effect is performed. In this rewind effect, the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A move from the center (midpoint) P2 of the meter frame EM2A shown in FIG. 84(B) in the opposite direction as shown by the arrow YA. An effect is performed in which the meter frame EM2A moves to the left end (starting point) P1 side and winds back to the return point P2B between the starting point P1 and the middle point P2. In other words, the meter value returns again to the return point P2B that it passed once.
In addition, in this rewind effect, the value of the countdown display EC1H is counted up from "5" shown in FIGS. A return performance will be performed. In other words, the value of the countdown display EC1H rewinds to "7", which has passed once.
Further, while this rewind effect is being executed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are scrolled in the opposite direction. Further, while this rewind effect is being performed, the color scheme of the display screen 7a changes to monotone. That is, while the rewind effect is being performed, the display screen 7a changes to a special color scheme different from the usual color scheme. Due to the effect of the meter value being rewound, the effect that the countdown display EC1H is counted up, the effect that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are scrolled in the opposite direction, and the effect that the color scheme of the display screen 7a changes to monotone, The player recognizes that the rewind effect has been executed, thereby increasing the expectation of a jackpot and improving the interest in the game. Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), a meter countdown restart effect is executed. This meter countdown restart performance is performed when the pending icon EM5B and meter area EM3A return to the return point P2B and when the countdown display EC1H returns to "7". When the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A return to the return point P2B and the countdown display EC1H returns to "7", the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R resume the above-described pseudo-continuous performance. When the pseudo continuous effect is restarted, in the meter image EM1A, the pending icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A resume moving from left to right in accordance with the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. In other words, the meter value rises again. Further, the countdown display EC1H restarts the countdown. That is, the value of countdown display EC1H is subtracted.
More specifically, the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A move from the return point P2B of the meter frame EM2A to the right end of the meter frame EM2A according to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (for example, according to the number of changes in the pseudo decorative pattern). (End point) Move to P3 side. Further, the countdown display EC1H is subtracted by "1" from the restored value "7" in accordance with the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance. In other words, the value "7" at which the point P2B in the meter frame EM2A and the countdown display EC1H have returned indicates that the pseudo-continuous performance has been performed three times since the start of the fluctuation in the fluctuating meter countdown performance shown in FIG. 84(B) described above. This is the case. In other words, this is the rewinding effect shown in FIG. This means that the number of executions has gone back from 5 to 3. The number of reserved special symbols indicates that the number of third reserved HA3 is increased by one from the number shown in FIG. 84(B). Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), a meter countdown return pseudo continuous reach effect is executed. In this meter countdown return pseudo continuous reach effect, the pseudo continuous effect is performed twice after the meter countdown restart effect is executed, and the pending icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A are again centered from the return point P2B of the meter frame EM2A. (Middle point) This is performed when P2 is reached and when the value of countdown display EC1H changes from "7" to "5". In other words, the meter countdown return pseudo-continuous reach performance is a performance that is executed when the rewind performance shown in FIG. 84(D) described above is started. Therefore, the meter value and the value of the countdown display EC1H are the same value at the time when the rewind effect shown in FIG. 84(D) starts and the time when the meter return pseudo continuous reach effect shown in FIG. 84(F) starts. It has become. When the meter return pseudo consecutive reach effect is executed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R reach with the pseudo continuous effect (decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop at the jackpot symbol arrangement, decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating, and "7↓7 ”) state. In addition, the number of pending special symbols shows that the fourth pending HA4 is increased by one from the number shown in FIG. 84(E). Furthermore, in the meter countdown return pseudo continuous reach effect shown in FIG. (For example, the pending icon EM5B is white and the pending icon EM6B is red). This further improves the player's expectation of a jackpot. Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(G), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification performance, as a result of the meter countdown return pseudo continuous reach performance shown in FIG. ing. Further, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Jackpot!" are displayed. That is, in the jackpot notification performance, during one fluctuation of the special symbol, a plurality of pseudo consecutive performances are performed in the pseudo continuous performance, and as a result, the fluctuation of the special symbol has become a jackpot. This jackpot notification performance notifies the user that one variation of the special symbol has ended. In other words, in one variation of the special symbol this time, the maximum number of times (10 times) of pseudo-continuation is not performed, and it is notified that one variation of the special symbol has ended.
Further, this jackpot notification effect is always performed when the rewind effect shown in FIG. 84(D) described above is performed. That is, when the rewind performance is performed during one variation of the special symbol, the result of one variation of the special symbol will always be a jackpot. Therefore, the rewind performance is also a performance that suggests a big hit (a solid performance).
If the maximum number of pseudo consecutive runs (10 times) is achieved with one variation of this special symbol without becoming a jackpot, the pending icon EM5B and meter area EM3A will become the end point of meter frame EM2A. When reaching P3, the meter value becomes full (the remaining variation time EM4A in one variation of the special symbol becomes 0), and the value of the countdown display EC1H becomes "0", and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C , 8R comes to a complete stop with a losing symbol arrangement. This makes it possible to notify one change in the special symbol. Therefore, EM4A in the meter image EM1A shown in FIGS. (A), (B), (D), (E), and (F) represents the remaining fluctuation time in one fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, the numerical value indicated by the countdown display EC1H indicates the remaining number of pseudo consecutives in one variation of the special symbol (it can also be said to represent the remaining variation time).

[Rewind effect C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining rewind effect C.
In the rewind performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 85(A), a variation start meter countdown performance is executed when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. In this fluctuation start meter countdown effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the middle pattern display area, and the right decoration is in the right pattern display area. Symbol 8R is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 85(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("589"). Further, a meter image EM1A is displayed below the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A, a meter area EM3A (the cross-hatched parts shown in FIGS. 85(B), (D), (E), and (F)), and a pointer EM5C, where the pointer EM5C is the meter frame. The meter moves on EM2A (rotating clockwise around point CP), and the meter area EM3A moves within the meter frame EM2A in conjunction with the pointer EM5C, and the meter value is determined by the movement of the pointer EM5C and meter area EM3A. represents. Note that the meter image EM1A has a circular shape and is arranged approximately at the center below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, EM4A will be described later.
Further, a countdown display EC3H as a digital display is arranged on the outer periphery of the meter frame EM2A. As shown in FIG. 85(A), the countdown display EC3H displays numbers from "10" to "0" at equal intervals along the outer periphery of the meter frame EM2A, so that the tip of the pointer EM5C points to these numbers. It is located in In the countdown display EC3H, the pointer EM5C points to the initial value "10" in the meter countdown performance C performed when the special symbol changes.
That is, in this meter countdown effect C, the meter image EM1A as an analog display and the countdown display EC3H as a digital display are displayed integrally.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a fluctuating meter countdown effect is executed while the special symbols are fluctuating. In this fluctuating meter countdown performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R execute the above-mentioned pseudo continuous performance.
In this pseudo-continuous performance in the meter countdown performance during fluctuation, during one fluctuation of the special symbol, a performance that temporarily stops the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after starting their fluctuation is repeated a predetermined number of times (maximum 10 times). That is, in the pseudo-continuous performance in this fluctuating meter countdown performance, a performance is performed to make it appear as if the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern has continued a predetermined number of times during one fluctuation of the special symbol.
Furthermore, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, in the meter image EM1A, the pointer EM5C moves on the meter frame EM2A according to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (according to the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative pattern) as shown in FIG. As shown in B), it rotates clockwise around point CP by a fixed amount. The meter area EM3A rotates clockwise within the meter frame EM2A by a fixed amount in conjunction with the pointer EM5C (cross-hatched portion shown in FIG. 85(B)). In other words, the meter value increases.
More specifically, the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A are located at the lower left (starting point) of the meter frame EM2A in the variation start meter countdown effect shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 85(B), depending on the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (according to the number of changes in the pseudo-decoration pattern), the lower right of the meter frame EM2A (end point, countdown display EC3H) The countdown display EC3H is rotated one scale at a time toward the position where "0" is indicated. Therefore, the rate at which the meter value increases changes depending on the execution time of one pseudo continuous effect. For example, if a performance with a long execution time (for example, a reach performance) is performed in the current pseudo-continuous performance, the meter value will rise more slowly than a performance with a short execution time (for example, a winning performance). Furthermore, for the same reason, the speed at which the countdown display EC3H is counted down changes. In addition, in FIG. 85(B), the number of changes of the pseudo decorative pattern is performed five times, the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A are at the midpoint of the meter frame EM2A, and the countdown display EC3H is at the position where it shows "5". It shows how it has been reached. Note that EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), a rewind suggestion effect is executed as a chance-up effect. In this rewind suggestion effect, a cut-in image H1A is displayed. The cut-in image H1A is an image that suggests that the game will start rewinding from here to the past, and the words "Repeat" are displayed. This rewind suggestion effect reminds the player that the game will be played repeatedly going back in time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), a rewind effect is performed. In this rewind effect, the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A move from the position where the countdown display EC3H shown in FIG. An effect of moving to the lower left side of EM2A (the position where the countdown display EC3H indicates "10") and winding back to the position where the countdown display EC3H indicates "7" (a performance of counting up) is performed. In other words, the meter value and the value of the countdown display EC3H rewind to "7", which has passed once.
Further, while this rewind effect is being executed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are scrolled in the opposite direction. Further, while this rewind effect is being performed, the color scheme of the display screen 7a changes to monotone. That is, while the rewind effect is being performed, the display screen 7a changes to a special color scheme different from the usual color scheme. The player can enjoy the rewind effect by the effect that the meter value and the countdown value rewind, the effect that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R scroll in the opposite direction, and the effect that the color scheme of the display screen 7a changes to monotone. The player recognizes that the game has been executed, which increases the expectation of a jackpot and improves the player's interest in playing the game. Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), a meter countdown restart effect is executed. This meter countdown restart performance is performed when the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A return to the position where the countdown display EC3H indicates "7". When the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A return to the position where the countdown display EC3H indicates "7", the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R resume the above-described pseudo-sequence performance. When the pseudo continuous effect is restarted, the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A in the meter image EM1A resume rotational movement from left to right in accordance with the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. That is, the meter value increases again and the scale of the countdown display EC1H moves in the direction of decreasing.
More specifically, the scale of the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A decreases by 1 from the scale of countdown display EC1H to "7" in accordance with the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (for example, in accordance with the number of changes in the pseudo decorative pattern). Rotate in the direction (clockwise). In other words, the value "7" at which the countdown display EC3H has returned in the meter frame EM2A is when the pseudo-continuous performance is performed three times from the start of fluctuation in the fluctuating meter countdown performance shown in FIG. 85(B) described above. . In other words, this is the rewinding effect shown in FIG. 85(D) described above, and as the meter value returns from "5" on the countdown display EC3H to "7", the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect is 5. This means that the game has rewinded from the first time to the third time. Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), a meter countdown return pseudo continuous reach effect is executed. In this meter countdown return pseudo continuous reach effect, the pseudo continuous effect is performed twice after the meter countdown restart effect is executed, and the pointer EM5C and meter area EM3A reach the scale "5" of the countdown display EC3H again. It is sometimes done. In other words, the meter countdown return pseudo-continuous reach performance is a performance that is executed when returning to the point at which the rewind performance shown in FIG. 85(D) described above was started. Therefore, the meter value and the value of the countdown display EC3H are the same value at the time when the rewind effect shown in FIG. 85(D) starts and when the meter return pseudo continuous reach effect shown in FIG. 85(F) starts. It has become. When the meter return pseudo consecutive reach effect is executed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R reach with the pseudo continuous effect (decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop at the jackpot symbol arrangement, decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating, and "7↓7 ”) state. Further, in the meter countdown return pseudo continuous reach effect shown in FIG. 85(F), the entire meter image EM1A is shown to have turned red and blinked. Note that EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(G), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification performance, as a result of the meter countdown return pseudo continuous reach performance shown in FIG. ing. Further, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Jackpot!" are displayed. That is, in the jackpot notification performance, during one fluctuation of the special symbol, a plurality of pseudo consecutive performances are performed in the pseudo continuous performance, and as a result, the fluctuation of the special symbol has become a jackpot. This jackpot notification performance notifies the user that one variation of the special symbol has ended. In other words, in one variation of the special symbol this time, the maximum number of times (10 times) of pseudo-continuation is not performed, and it is notified that one variation of the special symbol has ended.
Moreover, this jackpot notification effect is always performed when the rewind effect shown in FIG. 85(D) described above is performed. That is, when the rewind performance is performed during one variation of the special symbol, the result of one variation of the special symbol will always be a jackpot. Therefore, the rewind performance is also a performance that suggests a big hit (a solid performance).
If the maximum number of pseudo consecutive runs (10 times) is achieved with one variation of this special symbol without becoming a jackpot, the pointer EM5C and meter area EM3A will reach the scale "0" of the countdown display EC3H. '', the meter value becomes full (the remaining variation time EM4A in one variation of the special symbol becomes 0), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R completely stop in the losing symbol arrangement. This makes it possible to notify one change in the special symbol. Therefore, EM4A in the meter image EM1A shown in FIGS. 85 (A), (B), (D), (E), and (F) represents the remaining fluctuation time in one fluctuation of the special symbol. . Further, the numerical value indicated by the countdown display EC3H indicates the remaining number of pseudo consecutives in one variation of the special symbol (it can also be said to represent the remaining variation time).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the rewind effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the meter image increases as the meter area EM3A moves by a fixed amount from left to right on the meter frame EM2A as the special symbol changes. In addition, the countdown display is subtracted by counting down as the special symbol changes, and this is to notify the progress of the change in the special symbol, but if a predetermined condition is met (for example, by random number lottery) (e.g. when you hit a jackpot), the meter area EM3A moves in the opposite direction from right to left on the meter frame EM2A, and the countdown display is configured to perform a rewinding effect that adds up as the count up. There is. According to this configuration, when a rewind effect is performed, it is possible to remind the player that the game will be redone going back in time, and the game that was thought to be a loss will be replayed and the player will be able to realize that he or she has won the jackpot. You can play the game with great anticipation of what might happen. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, during the period when the meter countdown effect is executed during one change in the special symbol, a pseudo continuous effect is performed. . According to this configuration, it is possible to make one variation of the special symbol appear as if the variation display of the decorative symbol has been repeated a predetermined number of times, and the player has greater expectations for the pseudo-sequence effect. be able to. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when a rewind effect is performed, it becomes possible to rewind the fluctuating display of losses that has already been performed in the pseudo-continuous effect and perform an effect that makes it reachable, thereby greatly improving the interest of the game. can.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the color scheme of the display screen 7a changes to monotone while the rewind effect is being executed. That is, while the rewind effect is being performed, the display screen 7a is configured to change its color scheme to a special color scheme different from the usual color scheme. According to this configuration, it is possible to strongly emphasize the rewind effect on the screen with a color scheme different from usual, and the probability that the player will overlook the rewind effect is reduced, allowing the player to play the game with great anticipation. I can do it. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, if a rewind effect is performed during one variation of the special symbol, the result of one variation of the special symbol will always be a jackpot. It is configured. More specifically, when the meter image and countdown display return to the point where the rewinding effect is performed again after the rewinding effect is performed, at that point the pseudo continuous effect will perform a reaching effect, and then the jackpot will occur. The structure is such that a notification performance is performed. According to this configuration, the rewind effect functions as a jackpot suggestion effect, and when the rewind effect is performed, the player enters the game with great expectations that if he returns to the original point, he will win the jackpot. I can come. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the rewind effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, if a rewind effect is performed during one variation of the special symbol, the result of one variation of the special symbol will always be a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a rewind effect is performed during one change in the special symbol, it will not always be a jackpot, but it is more likely to be a jackpot when the rewind effect is performed than when it is not performed. It may be. Furthermore, in this case, the award is not limited to a big win, but may be any benefit that is advantageous to the player, such as a small win or a medium win.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, only the words "Repeat" are displayed in the rewind suggestion effect as a chance-up effect. It is not limited. For example, the rewind suggestion effect may display images such as characters instead of text, or may display both text and characters (in this case, text may be replaced with audio). ).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, only one type of rewind suggestion effect is displayed as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rewind suggestion effect may be selected and displayed from among a plurality of types having different expectations (reliability). For example, the background image may be selected and displayed from among morning, noon, and night images with different expectations (reliability).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the entire display screen 7a changes to monotone while the rewind effect is being performed. It is not limited to. For example, only a part of the display screen 7a, a decorative pattern, a meter image, or a countdown display may be changed to monotone. Further, in this case, the color scheme is not limited to monotone, and the color scheme may be changed to a special color scheme different from the usual color scheme.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, when the rewind effect is performed, the meter value of the meter image moves in the opposite direction, and the countdown display switches to the countup display. , Decorative symbols are scrolled in the opposite direction, but the movement of the meter value in the opposite direction, the count-up display, and the reverse scrolling of the decorative symbols are displayed faster (displayed in a shorter time) than the normal display. You can also do this. In this way, it is possible to create an effect that makes it seem as if time has gone back.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B5-1]
A display means capable of performing multiple types of display effects,
A symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of symbols;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined meter effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The meter performance is
It includes a first image and a second image, and has at least a first aspect, a second aspect, and a third aspect,
The first aspect is a mode in which the second image is located at a first position of the first image at the time when the symbol starts to fluctuate,
The second aspect is a mode in which the second image is located at a second position of the first image at the end of the variation of the symbol,
The third aspect is a mode in which the second image moves to the second position side of the first image during the variation of the symbol,
By changing from the first aspect to the second aspect through the third aspect, it is possible to notify one variation of the symbol by the symbol display means,
Furthermore, the meter performance is
a fourth aspect in which the second image moves toward the first position of the first image during the variation of the symbol;
The fourth aspect may be executed in place of the third aspect for a predetermined period when a predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the third aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B5-2]
A display means capable of performing multiple types of display effects,
A symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of symbols;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined countdown display effect as one of the plurality of display effects, and has at least a fifth aspect, a sixth aspect, and a seventh aspect. ,
The fifth aspect is an aspect in which the first numerical value is displayed when the symbol starts to fluctuate;
The sixth aspect is a mode in which a second numerical value is displayed when the symbol changes,
The seventh aspect is a mode in which the third numerical value is subtracted a predetermined number of times during the fluctuation of the symbol,
By changing from the fifth aspect to the sixth aspect through the seventh aspect, it is possible to notify one variation of the symbol by the symbol display means,
Furthermore, the countdown display performance is
It has an eighth aspect in which the fourth numerical value is added a predetermined number of times during the fluctuation of the symbol,
The eighth aspect may be executed in place of the seventh aspect for a predetermined period if a predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the seventh aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B5-3]
The display effect executed by the display means is performed in the first color scheme when the fourth aspect or the eighth aspect is not executed, and is performed in the second color scheme when the fourth aspect or the eighth aspect is executed. ,
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1 or aspect B5-2.
[Aspect B5-4]
When the fourth aspect or the eighth aspect is executed, benefits advantageous to the player are more likely to be granted than when not executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3.
[Aspect B5-5]
comprising a decorative pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern in accordance with the variable display of the pattern by the pattern display means;
The decorative pattern display means is capable of performing a pseudo-coupling effect,
performing the pseudo continuous effect during a period when the meter effect or the countdown display effect is being executed;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-4.

The reach effect will be explained below using FIGS. 86 to 88. This reach effect is performed when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (during a single variable display), and for example, the game state is a high probability state, a time saving state, an electric chew support (the electric chew 22 is frequently released and the second This can be executed during a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the starting slot 21 (hereinafter also referred to as "densapo"). In addition, the variation time of the special symbol in which this reach effect is executed is longer than usual.

[Reach performance A]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining reach effect A.
In the ready-to-reach effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 86(A), a variation start meter countdown effect is executed when the special symbol starts to change. In this fluctuation start meter countdown effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the middle pattern display area, and the right decoration is in the right pattern display area. Symbol 8R is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 86(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("589").
Further, a meter image EM1A as an analog display is displayed below the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The meter image EM1A includes a meter frame EM2A, a meter area EM3A (the cross-hatched portion shown in FIGS. 86(B) and (C)), and the pending icon (the pending icon corresponding to the special symbol that is changing) EM5B. , the hold icon EM5B moves on the meter frame EM2A, the meter area EM3A moves within the meter frame EM2A in conjunction with the hold icon EM5B, and the meter value is determined by the movement of the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A. represents. Note that the meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged horizontally below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, EM4A will be described later.
Further, a countdown display EC1H as a digital display is arranged at the upper left of the display screen 7a. The countdown display EC1H is a mode in which a predetermined number is displayed within the display area of the round frame EC2H, and in the meter countdown performance B that is performed at the start of the fluctuation of this special symbol, the initial value "10" is displayed. It looks like this.
That is, in this meter countdown effect B, the meter image EM1A including the pending icon EM5B as an analog display and the countdown display EC1H as a digital display are displayed simultaneously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), a fluctuating meter countdown effect is executed while the special symbols are fluctuating. In this fluctuating meter performance/countdown, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R execute the above-mentioned pseudo continuous performance.
In this pseudo-continuous performance in the meter countdown performance during fluctuation, during one fluctuation of the special symbol, a performance that temporarily stops the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after starting their fluctuation is repeated a predetermined number of times (maximum 10 times). That is, in the pseudo-continuous performance in this fluctuating meter countdown performance, a performance is performed to make it appear as if the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern has continued a predetermined number of times during one fluctuation of the special symbol.
In addition, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, in the meter image EM1A, the pending icon EM5B moves from the left on the meter frame EM2A according to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (according to the number of changes in the pseudo decorative pattern). Move a fixed amount to the right. The meter area EM3A moves by a fixed amount from left to right within the meter frame EM2A in conjunction with the hold icon EM5B. In other words, the meter value increases. More specifically, the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A are located at the left end (starting point) P1 of the meter frame EM2A in the fluctuation start meter countdown effect shown in FIG. Accordingly (according to the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. 86(B), the meter frame EM2A moves by a fixed amount to the right end (end point) P3 side. Therefore, the rate at which the meter value increases changes depending on the execution time of one pseudo continuous performance. For example, if a performance with a long execution time (for example, a reach performance) is performed in the current pseudo-continuous performance, the meter value will rise more slowly than a performance with a short execution time (for example, a winning performance). In addition, FIG. 86(B) shows that the pseudo decorative pattern has been changed five times and the pending icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A have reached the center (middle point) P2A of the meter frame EM2A. . In addition, a reservation icon indicating the number of reservations of the special symbol is displayed at the right end of the meter frame EM2A, and HA1 indicates the first reservation, and HA2 indicates the second reservation. Further, EM4A will be described later.
Further, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, the countdown display EC1H is counted down according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect (according to the number of times the pseudo continuous effect changes). More specifically, the countdown display EC1H indicates the initial value "10" in the variation start meter countdown effect shown in FIG. ``1'' is decremented each time ``is executed once.'' Therefore, since FIG. 86(B) shows a state in which the number of changes in the pseudo decorative pattern has been performed five times, the countdown display EC1H shows "5". In other words, this suggests that the number of pseudo-runs can be executed five more times, including the one in question. Furthermore, for the same reason as above, the speed at which the countdown display EC1H is counted down changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), a pseudo consecutive reach effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuous reach effect, the pseudo-continuous reach effect is performed one more time from the state shown in FIG. ing. Further, the countdown display EC1H shows the numerical value "4" which is obtained by subtracting "1" from "5" shown in FIG. 86(B). That is, when the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A reach P2B and when the value of the countdown display EC1H becomes "4", the ready-to-reach performance is always executed in the pseudo continuous performance. That is, in the present invention, when the meter value or countdown value reaches a predetermined value, the fluctuating display of the pseudo-continuous effect is always performed as a reach effect (a highly anticipated effect). Note that "4" in the countdown display EC1H suggests that the number of pseudo consecutive runs can be executed four more times. Further, the number of reserved special symbols shows that the third reserved HA3 is increased by one from the number shown in FIG. 86(B). Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. This jackpot notification performance shows a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are completely stopped at the jackpot symbol arrangement "777" as a result of the execution of the pseudo consecutive reach performance shown in FIG. 86(E). Further, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Jackpot!" are displayed. That is, in the jackpot notification performance, during one variation of the special symbol, multiple pseudo-continuations (six times in this example) are performed in the pseudo-continuation performance, and the pending icon EM5B and meter area EM3A move from the starting point P1. When P2B is reached, the countdown display EC1H changes from the initial value "10" to "4", indicating that the change in the special symbol has become a jackpot. This jackpot notification performance notifies the user that one variation of the special symbol has ended. In other words, in this one variation of the special symbol, the number of pseudo consecutives is not repeated 10 times, and the jackpot is reached on the seventh pseudo consecutive number, and it is announced that the one variation of the special symbol has ended. There is.
If this one variation of the special symbol is repeated the maximum number of times (10 times) without becoming a jackpot, the meter area EM3A will reach the end point P3 of the meter frame EM2A. When the meter value becomes full (the remaining variation time EM4A in one variation of the special symbol becomes 0), the value of the countdown display EC1H becomes "0", and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are losing symbols. Stop completely on the array. This makes it possible to notify one change in the special symbol. Therefore, EM4A in the meter image EM1A shown in FIGS. 86(A), 86(B), and 86(C) represents the remaining variation time in one variation of the special symbol. Further, the numerical value indicated by the countdown display EC1H indicates the remaining number of pseudo consecutives in one variation of the special symbol (it can also be said to represent the remaining variation time).

[Reach performance B]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining reach effect B.
In the ready-to-reach effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 87(A), a variation start meter countdown effect is executed when the special symbol starts to change. In this fluctuation start meter countdown effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the middle pattern display area, and the right decoration is in the right pattern display area. Symbol 8R is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 87(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing pattern arrangement ("589").
Further, a meter image EM1A as an analog display is displayed below the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The meter image EM1A includes a meter frame EM2A, a meter area EM3A (the cross-hatched parts shown in FIGS. 87(B), (C), and (D)), and the corresponding pending icon (the pending icon corresponding to the special symbol that is changing) EM5B. , the hold icon EM5B moves on the meter frame EM2A, the meter area EM3A moves within the meter frame EM2A in conjunction with the hold icon EM5B, and the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A move. represents the meter value. Note that the meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged horizontally below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, EM4A will be described later.
Further, a countdown display EC1H as a digital display is arranged at the upper left of the display screen 7a. The countdown display EC1H is a mode in which a predetermined number is displayed within the display area of the round frame EC2H, and in the meter countdown performance B that is performed at the start of the fluctuation of this special symbol, the initial value "10" is displayed. It looks like this.
That is, in this meter countdown effect B, the meter image EM1A including the pending icon EM5B as an analog display and the countdown display EC1H as a digital display are displayed simultaneously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), a fluctuating meter countdown effect is executed while the special symbols are fluctuating. In this fluctuating meter performance/countdown, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R execute the above-mentioned pseudo continuous performance.
In this pseudo-continuous performance in the meter countdown performance during fluctuation, during one fluctuation of the special symbol, a performance that temporarily stops the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after starting their fluctuation is repeated a predetermined number of times (maximum 10 times). That is, in the pseudo-continuous performance in this fluctuating meter countdown performance, a performance is performed to make it appear as if the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern has continued a predetermined number of times during one fluctuation of the special symbol.
In addition, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, in the meter image EM1A, the pending icon EM5B moves from the left on the meter frame EM2A according to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (according to the number of changes in the pseudo decorative pattern). Move a fixed amount to the right. The meter area EM3A moves by a fixed amount from left to right within the meter frame EM2A in conjunction with the hold icon EM5B. In other words, the meter value increases. More specifically, the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A are located at the left end (starting point) P1 of the meter frame EM2A in the fluctuation start meter countdown effect shown in FIG. Accordingly (according to the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. 87(B), the meter frame EM2A moves to the right end (end point) P3 side by a fixed amount. Therefore, the rate at which the meter value increases changes depending on the execution time of one pseudo continuous effect. For example, if a performance with a long execution time (for example, a reach performance) is performed in the current pseudo continuous performance, the meter value will rise more slowly than a performance with a short execution time (for example, a winning performance). In addition, FIG. 87(B) shows that the pseudo decorative pattern has been changed five times and the pending icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A have reached the center (middle point) P2A of the meter frame EM2A. . In addition, a reservation icon indicating the number of reservations of the special symbol is displayed at the right end of the meter frame EM2A, and HA1 indicates the first reservation, and HA2 indicates the second reservation. Further, EM4A will be described later.
Further, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, the countdown display EC1H is counted down according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect (according to the number of times the pseudo continuous effect changes). More specifically, the countdown display EC1H indicates the initial value "10" in the variation start meter countdown effect shown in FIG. ``1'' is decremented each time ``is executed once.'' Therefore, since FIG. 87(B) shows a state in which the number of changes of the pseudo decorative pattern has been performed five times, the countdown display EC1H shows "5". In other words, this suggests that the number of pseudo-runs can be executed five more times, including the one in question. Furthermore, for the same reason as above, the speed at which the countdown display EC1H is counted down changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), a pseudo-continuation final fluctuation reach effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuation final fluctuation reach performance, the pseudo-continuation performance is performed four more times from the state shown in FIG. It is shown. Further, the countdown display EC1H shows the numerical value "1" obtained by subtracting "4" from "5" shown in FIG. 87(B). That is, when the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A reach P2D and when the value of the countdown display EC1H becomes "1", the ready-to-reach performance is always executed in the pseudo continuous performance. Here, the time when the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A reach P2D, and the time when the countdown display EC1H shows "1", suggests that the number of pseudo consecutive runs will be executed one more time. In other words, the time when the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A reach P2D and the time when the countdown display EC1H shows "1" suggests that the last variable display in the pseudo-continuous performance will be executed. That is, in the present invention, when the meter value or countdown value reaches a predetermined value and the last variable display in the pseudo-sequential effect is executed, the last variable display in the pseudo-series effect is always a reach effect (a highly anticipated effect). is now executed. Note that the number of reserved special symbols indicates that the third reserved HA3 and fourth reserved HA4 have increased from the number shown in FIG. 87(B). Further, EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a variation end meter countdown effect is executed. In this variation end meter countdown effect, the meter value is calculated when the effect of temporarily stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after the start of variation is repeated a predetermined number of times (up to 10 times) during one variation of the special symbol. and a countdown display. That is, in the variation end meter countdown performance, as a result of the predetermined number of pseudo consecutive performances being performed during one variation of the special symbol, the pending icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A are changed to the meter frame EM2A. This indicates that the right end (end point) P3 has been reached and the meter value has become full. On the other hand, the countdown display EC1H shows "0". In other words, this suggests that the pseudo-run count is not executed.
Further, almost at the same time when the countdown display EC1H becomes "0" and the meter value becomes full, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R come to a completely stopped state. In the meter image EM1A, the meter value has become full, the countdown display EC1H has become "0", and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have completely stopped. Notify that the fluctuation of has ended. Therefore, EM4A in the meter image EM1A shown in (A), (B), and (C) represents the remaining fluctuation time in one fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, the numerical value indicated by the countdown display EC1H indicates the remaining number of pseudo consecutives in one variation of the special symbol (it can also be said that it indicates the remaining variation time). In addition, in FIG. 87(C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown stopped in the losing symbol arrangement ("958").

[Reach performance C]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining reach effect C.
In the ready-to-win effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 88(A), a time-saving start effect is executed when a jackpot game based on a specific jackpot ends. In this time-saving start effect, the words ``Start time-saving!'' are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and below the words ``Start time-saving!'' is a message to encourage the player to play right. The right-handed arrow YAR is displayed. Note that within the display area of the right-handed hit arrow YAR, the words "right-handed hit" are displayed. The player is prompted by the right-hand arrow YAR to hit the game ball to the right, thereby placing the game ball in the second starting opening 21 (electronic support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened, making it easier to win. can be done. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, the display screen 7a starts to display the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in a variable manner that is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state. In addition, in FIG. 88(A), a time saving number display ZTC indicating the number of time saving times is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This time saving number display ZTC represents the remaining number of time saving times, and is "5 times" in this example.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), the time-saving final fluctuation suggestion effect is executed. In this time-saving final change suggestion performance, the characters ``Start time-saving!'', the number-of-time-savings display ZTC, and the right arrow YAR are deleted, and instead, the words ``Last time!'' are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the time-saving final variation suggestion performance is a performance that is displayed when the variation display of the decorative pattern related to the second special symbol is performed four times and only one time remains after the time-saving game is started. In addition, in the time-saving final variation suggestion performance, the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R display the immediately preceding stop symbol "589". Further, in the time-saving final variation suggestion performance, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), a variation start meter countdown effect is executed at the start of variation of the last second special symbol in the time saving state. In this fluctuation start meter countdown effect, the upper right stop symbol "589" shown in FIG. A medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the pattern display area, and a right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. That is, the losing symbol array "589" is displayed in a large stop at the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a meter image EM1A is displayed below the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The meter image EM1A includes a meter frame EM2A, a meter area EM3A (the cross-hatched portion shown in FIGS. The meter area EM3A moves within the meter frame EM2A in conjunction with the pointer EM5C, and the meter value is expressed by the movement of the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A. Note that the meter image EM1A has a circular shape and is arranged approximately at the center below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, EM4A will be described later.
Further, a countdown display EC3H as a digital display is arranged on the outer periphery of the meter frame EM2A. As shown in FIG. 88(C), the countdown display EC3H displays numbers from "10" to "0" at equal intervals along the outer periphery of the meter frame EM2A, so that the tip of the pointer EM5C points to these numbers. are arranged in memory. In the countdown display EC3H, the pointer EM5C points to the initial value "10" in the meter countdown performance C performed when the second special symbol changes.
That is, in this meter countdown effect C, the meter image EM1A as an analog display and the countdown display EC3H as a digital display are displayed integrally.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), a fluctuating meter countdown effect is executed while the second special symbol is fluctuating. In this fluctuating meter countdown performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R execute the above-mentioned pseudo continuous performance.
In this pseudo continuous performance in the meter countdown performance during fluctuation, during one fluctuation of the second special symbol, a performance that temporarily stops the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after the fluctuation starts is repeated a predetermined number of times (maximum 10 times). . That is, in the pseudo-continuous performance in this fluctuating meter countdown performance, a performance is performed to make it appear as if the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern has continued a predetermined number of times during one fluctuation of the second special symbol.
Moreover, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, in the meter image EM1A, the pointer EM5C moves on the meter frame EM2A according to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (according to the number of changes in the pseudo decorative pattern) as shown in FIG. As shown in D), it rotates clockwise around point CP by a fixed amount. The meter area EM3A rotates clockwise within the meter frame EM2A by fixed amounts in conjunction with the pointer EM5C (cross-hatched portion shown in FIG. 88(D)). In other words, the meter value increases.
More specifically, the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A are located at the lower left (starting point) of the meter frame EM2A in the variation start meter countdown effect shown in FIG. 88(C), and point to the initial value "10" of the countdown display EC3H. As shown in FIG. 88(D), depending on the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (according to the number of changes in the pseudo-decoration pattern), the lower right of the meter frame EM2A (end point, countdown display EC3H) The countdown display EC3H is rotated one scale at a time toward the position where "0" is indicated. Therefore, the rate at which the meter value increases changes depending on the execution time of one pseudo continuous effect. For example, if a performance with a long execution time (for example, a reach performance) is performed in the current pseudo-continuous performance, the meter value will rise more slowly than a performance with a short execution time (for example, a winning performance). Furthermore, for the same reason, the speed at which the countdown display EC3H is counted down changes. In addition, in FIG. 88(D), the number of fluctuations of the pseudo decorative pattern is performed five times, the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A are at the midpoint of the meter frame EM2A, and the countdown display EC3H is at the position where it shows "5". It shows how it has been reached. Note that EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(E), a pseudo consecutive reach effect is executed. This pseudo-continuous reach effect is performed 5 times in the fluctuating meter countdown effect shown in FIG. It shows that the state is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern 8C is changing, and the state is "7↓7". Here, in this example, when the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A reach a position where the value of the countdown display EC3H indicates "5", a reach effect is executed in the pseudo continuous effect. The timing at which the reach effect is executed in this pseudo continuous effect may be other than when the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A reach the position where the value of the countdown display EC3H indicates "5". The ready-to-reach effect may be executed in any of the variable displays of the pseudo-continuous effect, which is performed in conjunction with the variation of the second special symbol. That is, in the present invention, in the pseudo-continuous performance related to the variation of the last second special symbol in the time saving state, the reach performance (highly expected performance) is always executed. Furthermore, in the pseudo-continuous reach effect shown in FIG. 88(E), the entire meter image EM1A is shown turning red and blinking. Note that EM4A will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(F), a jackpot notification effect is executed. This jackpot notification performance shows a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are completely stopped at the jackpot symbol arrangement "777" as a result of the execution of the pseudo consecutive reach performance shown in FIG. 88(E). Further, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Jackpot!" are displayed. In other words, in the jackpot notification performance, during one fluctuation of the second special symbol, multiple pseudo-continuations (5 times in this example) are performed in the pseudo-continuation performance, and as a result, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is It shows that you hit the jackpot. By this jackpot notification performance, it is reported that one variation of the second special symbol, that is, the last variation of the second special symbol to save time has ended. In other words, with one variation of the second special symbol this time, the number of pseudo series is not performed 10 times, and the jackpot is reached on the 6th number of pseudo series, and it is notified that the one variation of the special symbol has ended. are doing.
If the second special symbol changes once this time, if the maximum number of pseudo consecutive runs (10 times) is achieved without becoming a jackpot, the pointer EM5C and the meter area EM3A will change to the scale of the countdown display EC3H. When it reaches "0", the meter value becomes full (the remaining variation time EM4A in one variation of the second special symbol becomes 0), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are complete in the losing symbol arrangement. Stop at. This makes it possible to notify one change in the second special symbol. Therefore, EM4A in the meter image EM1A shown in FIGS. (C), (D), and (E) represents the remaining fluctuation time in one fluctuation of the second special symbol. Further, the numerical value indicated by the countdown display EC3H indicates the remaining number of pseudo consecutives in one variation of the second special symbol (it can also be said to represent the remaining variation time).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of reach effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to display a meter image EM1A that notifies one change in the special symbol. Then, when the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A reach P2B, the ready-to-reach effect is always executed in the pseudo-continuous effect. That is, in the present invention, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the fluctuating display of the pseudo-linked effect is always performed to provide a highly anticipated effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify a single change in a monotonous special symbol with a meter image in which the meter value visually changes over time without using decorative symbols, and the player can At the same time, expectations can be maintained. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the player can play the game with a great sense of expectation, thinking that he may win a jackpot when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, and as a result, he can improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 2]
As shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to display a countdown display EC1H (countdown display EC3H) that notifies one change in the special symbol. Then, when the value of the countdown display EC1H becomes "4", the ready-to-win performance is always executed in the pseudo-continuous performance. That is, in the present invention, when the countdown value reaches a predetermined value, the fluctuating display of the pseudo-linked effect is such that a highly anticipated effect is always executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually notify a single change in a monotonous special symbol with a countdown display over time without using decorative symbols, and the player maintains a sense of anticipation over time. can be done. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the player can play the game with a great sense of expectation, thinking that he may win a jackpot when the countdown value reaches a predetermined value, and as a result, he can improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 3]
As shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a configuration in which a meter image EM1A and a countdown display EC1H (countdown display EC3H) are displayed to notify one change in the special symbol. There is. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify a single change in a monotonous special symbol with a meter image and a countdown display in which the meter value visually changes over time without using decorative symbols, and the player can maintain a sense of anticipation over time. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since the player can recognize one change in the special symbol in multiple types of notification formats, such as analog display and digital display, the player can also grasp the gaming situation extremely accurately. Furthermore, when at least one of the meter value or the countdown value reaches a predetermined value, the player can play the game with great expectations, knowing that he or she may win the jackpot, and as a result, the player becomes more interested in the game. can be improved.
[Effect 4]
As shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a configuration in which a meter image EM1A and a countdown display EC1H (countdown display EC3H) are displayed to notify one change in the special symbol. There is. Then, when the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A reach P2D, and when the countdown display EC1H shows "1", the reach effect (highly expected effect) is always executed in the pseudo continuous effect. It has become. That is, in the present invention, when the meter value or countdown value reaches a predetermined value and the last fluctuating display in the pseudo-sequential performance is executed, the final fluctuating display in the pseudo-synchronized performance is always a highly anticipated performance. It looks like this. According to this configuration, the player can play the game with high expectations for the final variable display in the pseudo-continuous performance, and as a result, can improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, a meter image EM1A and a countdown display EC3H are displayed, which notify the change of the last second special symbol in the time saving state, and the meter image EM1A and the countdown display EC3H are displayed. The pseudo continuous effect is executed while the is displayed. In the present invention, in the pseudo-continuous performance related to the variation of the last second special symbol in the time saving state, the reach performance (highly expected performance) is always executed. According to this configuration, the player can play the game with high expectations for the variable display of the last second special symbol in the time saving state, and as a result, can improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the time saving start effect shown in FIG. 88(A), the time saving number display ZTC indicating the number of time saving times is displayed, and in the effect after the time saving final change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 88(B), The configuration is such that a pseudo continuous performance is performed without displaying the time saving number display ZTC. According to this configuration, in the performance after the time-saving final fluctuation suggestion performance, in the pseudo-continuous performance, a performance is performed in which the last fluctuation of the special symbol is made to appear as if the fluctuation display of the decorative design has continued a predetermined number of times. , it is possible to make the player feel as if the number of time savings has increased. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the reach effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86, in the reach effect, when the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A reach P2B of the meter frame EM2A, and when the countdown display EC1H shows "4" In this case, the reach effect is always executed in the pseudo continuous effect, that is, the reach effect is always executed when the pseudo continuous number is displayed for the seventh time, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the ready-to-win effect may be executed without fail when the pseudo consecutive number is a predetermined number of times other than the seventh time. Further, as shown in FIG. 86(D), the variation result of the pseudo-continuous reach effect is a jackpot, but this is not limited to this, and it may also be a loss. Furthermore, before executing the pseudo-continuous reach performance, a cut-in performance or a predetermined character may be displayed as a chance-up performance.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87(C), the countdown display EC1H is set to show "1" when the last variable display in the pseudo continuous performance is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the countdown display EC1H that suggests the final variation display of this pseudo-continuous performance may display characters such as "LAST", "final variation", "last", etc. instead of the number "1". . In this case, it is even better to use audio at the same time. Further, as shown in FIG. 87(D), the variation result of the pseudo-continuation final variation reach effect is a loss, but this is not limited to this, and it may be made to be a jackpot. Further, before executing the pseudo-continuation final fluctuation reach effect, a cut-in effect or a predetermined character may be displayed as a chance-up effect.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88(A), in the time saving start effect, the words "Start time saving!" are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of "Start saving time!", characters such as "Start electric chew support!", "Aim for electric chew", or "FULL CHARGE" may be used. In this case, it is even better to use audio at the same time.
In addition, below the words "Start saving time!", a right-handed arrow YAR was displayed to encourage the player to play right-handed, and within that display area, the words "right-handed" were displayed. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of "Right hit", characters such as "Denchu CHARGE!", "Aim to the right", "Hold charge", etc. may be used. In addition, characters were displayed within the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR, but this could be displayed in the vicinity of the right-handed arrow YAR or displayed so that it partially overlapped with the right-handed arrow YAR. Good too.
Furthermore, during the reach effect shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the right hit arrow YAR may be continuously displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88(E), when the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A reach the position where the value of the countdown display EC3H indicates "5", in the pseudo continuous performance, Although the reach effect is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timing at which the reach effect is executed in the pseudo continuous effect may be other than when the hold icon EM5B and the meter area EM3A reach the position where the value of the countdown display EC3H indicates "5" (for example, "3" or "7'', etc.), that is, the ready-to-reach effect may be executed in some variation display of the pseudo-continuous effect, which is performed in relation to the change of the last second special symbol in the time saving state.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B6-1]
A display means capable of performing multiple types of display effects,
A symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of symbols;
Decorative pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern in accordance with the variable display of the pattern by the pattern display device;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined meter effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The meter effect has a first image and a second image, and the second image moves on the first image from the first position to the second position according to the fluctuating display of the symbol. It is possible to notify one change in the symbol,
The decorative pattern display means is capable of performing a pseudo-coupling effect,
During the period when the meter effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect is performed, and when the second image moves to a predetermined position of the first image in the meter effect, the variable display of the pseudo continuous effect is set to reach. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B6-2]
When the second image moves to the second position of the first image in the meter effect, the variable display of the pseudo continuous effect is set to reach;
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1, characterized in that:
[Aspect B6-3]
A display means capable of performing multiple types of display effects,
A symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of symbols;
Decorative pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern in accordance with the variable display of the pattern by the pattern display device;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined countdown display effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The countdown display performance is capable of notifying one change in the symbol by subtracting a predetermined number from the first number in the countdown display to become a second number,
The decorative pattern display means is capable of performing a pseudo-coupling effect,
During the period in which the countdown display effect is being executed, the pseudo continuous effect is performed, and when the countdown display reaches a predetermined value in the countdown display effect, the variable display of the pseudo continuous effect is set to reach;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B6-4]
In the countdown display performance, when the countdown display reaches the second number, the variable display of the pseudo continuous performance is set to reach;
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-3, characterized in that:
[Aspect B6-5]
It has a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and in the second gaming state, the fluctuating display of the symbols by the symbol display means is predetermined. A gaming machine that continues until the game is executed a specified number of times,
The meter performance or the countdown display performance is executed when the final variation display of the symbols in the second gaming state is being performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-4, characterized in that:

The jackpot confirmation suggestion effect will be explained below using FIGS. 89 to 91. This jackpot confirmation suggestion performance is performed while the special symbols are being displayed, and for example, when the gaming state is normal, high probability state, time saving state, electric chew support (the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and the second starting port 21 This may be executed during a state in which it is easy to win a prize (hereinafter also referred to as "den support"), or when a hold is being used.

[Jackpot confirmed suggestion performance A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining jackpot confirmation suggestion production A.
In the jackpot confirmation suggestion performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 89(A), the first decorative symbol variation performance is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this first decorative pattern variation performance, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left first decorative pattern 8L is in the left pattern display area, the middle first decorative pattern 8C is in the middle pattern display area, and the right pattern display area is The first right decorative pattern 8R is displayed. Furthermore, a left second decorative pattern 1L, a middle second decorative pattern 1C, and a right second decorative pattern 1R are displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. The second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed extremely small compared to the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and are also called the fourth pattern. This fourth symbol is always displayed on the display screen 7a even if the first decorative symbol is erased due to performance or the like. Note that FIG. 89(A) shows that the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, 1R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, in the left center of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically side by side. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In addition, in the first decorative pattern variation performance shown in FIG. 89(A), H1 indicates "0" and H2 indicates "4". That is, it is suggested that the number of reservations for the first special symbol is "0" and the number of reservations for the second special symbol is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle performance, an image of a battle between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB is displayed. In addition, in this battle performance, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and only the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed. The second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R indicate that they are being changed, and the reserved numbers H1 and H2 indicate "0" and "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), a jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot confirmation suggestion production, the words "Victory!" are displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, indicating that the friendly character CRA has won as a result of the battle between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB. By displaying the words "Win!", the player can be made to think that he or she will win the jackpot (an advantageous benefit will be given to the player). In addition, in this jackpot confirmation suggestion production, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and only the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed. The second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R indicate that they are being changed, and the reserved numbers H1 and H2 indicate "0" and "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a second decorative pattern loss effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this second decorative pattern loss effect, the characters "Victory!" indicating that the ally character CRA has won, as shown in FIG. is stopped and the losing symbol array "589" is displayed. That is, in this second decorative pattern loss performance, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and only the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R move on the display screen 7a. The losing pattern array "589" shown by the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R indicates the fluctuation results of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 89(A). In other words, even though the change result of the special symbol this time was a loss, the display screen 7a executes the jackpot confirmation suggestion (display of the words "Win!") shown in FIG. 89(C). . Note that the pending numbers H1 and H2 indicate "0" and "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), a loss pending performance is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss pending extinguishing performance is performed with the characters "Victory!" indicating that the ally character CRA has won, shown in FIGS. Only this is an effect in which a variable display is performed according to the pending numbers H1 and H2. In this losing pending/extinguishing effect, the variable display of the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R (first and second pending/extinguishing) is performed in an extremely short time.
Here, in the lose-holding/extinguishing effect shown in FIG. 89(E), the holding number H1 shows "0" as before, but the holding number H2 has been changed from "4" to "2". In other words, in this loss pending performance, after showing the variation result of the current special symbol (loss symbol array "589") in the second decorative symbol loss performance shown in FIG. 89(D), the second special symbol is This shows that 2 pending items have been used up. The losing symbol array "474" indicated by the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R indicates the fluctuation result of the second reservation of the second special symbol. Note that the fluctuation result (loss) of the first pending second special symbol is not shown. Further, the reservation of the second special symbol is given priority over the reservation of the first special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(F), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot confirmation performance, instead of the words "Victory!" indicating that the ally character CRA shown in FIGS. 89(C), (D), and (E) has won, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shows a state where it has completely stopped at the jackpot symbol arrangement "777", and the words "Jackpot~!" are displayed above the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R also show a completely stopped state in the jackpot symbol arrangement "777". This jackpot confirmation performance makes the player confident that he will win the jackpot.
Here, in the jackpot confirmation performance shown in FIG. 89(F), the pending number H1 shows "0" as before, but the pending number H2 has been changed from "2" to "0". In other words, in this jackpot confirmation performance, after the first and second hold (both are loses) of the second special symbol are exhausted in the loss hold consumption performance shown in FIG. 89(E), the third and fourth This shows that the reservations have been cleared. The jackpot symbol arrangement "777" indicated by the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R indicates the fluctuation result of the fourth reservation of the second special symbol. Note that the variation result (loss) of the third pending second special symbol is not shown. Further, the third and fourth pending digestions are also carried out in an extremely short time.

In other words, in the jackpot confirmation suggestion performance A shown in FIG. Even before the fluctuation stops, an image (the words "Victory!") other than the symbols (first and second decorative symbols) is used to create a performance that suggests a confirmed jackpot. After the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed, only the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R move on the display screen 7a (the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed), and the special symbol and the pending The fluctuation result (loss) is displayed in a short time, and then, depending on the pending jackpot, a jackpot confirmation is performed with the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, 1R (jackpot symbol array).

[Jackpot confirmed suggestion performance B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining jackpot confirmation suggestion production B.
In the jackpot confirmation suggestion performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 90(A), the first decorative symbol variation performance is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this first decorative pattern variation performance, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left first decorative pattern 8L is in the left pattern display area, the middle first decorative pattern 8C is in the middle pattern display area, and the right pattern display area is The first right decorative pattern 8R is displayed. Furthermore, a left second decorative pattern 1L, a middle second decorative pattern 1C, and a right second decorative pattern 1R are displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. The second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed extremely small compared to the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and are also called the fourth pattern. This fourth symbol is always displayed on the display screen 7a even if the first decorative symbol is erased due to performance or the like. Note that FIG. 90(A) shows that the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, 1R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, in the left center of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically side by side. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In addition, in the first decorative pattern variation performance shown in FIG. 90(A), H1 indicates "0" and H2 indicates "4". That is, it is suggested that the number of reservations for the first special symbol is "0" and the number of reservations for the second special symbol is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle performance, an image of a battle between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB is displayed. In addition, in this battle performance, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and only the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed. The second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R indicate that they are being changed, and the reserved numbers H1 and H2 indicate "0" and "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), a loss suggesting effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this loss-suggesting performance, as a result of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the words "Defeat!" indicating that the ally character CRA has been defeated are displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the words "defeat!", it is possible to make the player think that he will not win the jackpot (that he will not be given advantageous benefits). In addition, in this loss suggesting performance, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and only the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed. The second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R indicate that they are being changed, and the reserved numbers H1 and H2 indicate "0" and "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), a second decorative symbol jackpot confirmation suggestion performance is executed on the display screen 7a. This second decorative pattern jackpot confirmation indication effect is performed when the characters "defeat!" indicating that the ally character CRA has been defeated, as shown in FIG. stops fluctuating and displays the losing symbol arrangement "4V4". In other words, in this second decorative pattern jackpot confirmed suggestion performance, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and only the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R move on the display screen 7a. . The losing pattern arrangement “4V4” shown by the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R is
It shows the variation results of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 90(A). In other words, this shows that the special symbol fluctuation result is a loss.
Here, the losing pattern arrangement "4V4" shown by the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R is not the normally displayed losing pattern arrangement, but the left second decorative pattern 1L and the right second decorative pattern 1R are the same number. (reach state), the middle second decorative pattern 1C shows "V", and is a loss pattern arrangement that suggests a jackpot confirmation, which is displayed only during this second decorative pattern jackpot confirmation suggestion performance. In other words, this losing symbol arrangement "4V4" also serves as a hint that the jackpot is confirmed. In other words, the symbol arrangement "4V4" indicated by the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R suggests that although the change result of this special symbol is a loss, there will be a jackpot in the subsequent pending digestion. are doing. Therefore, by displaying this "4V4" jackpot confirmation effect, it is possible to make the player think that he will win the jackpot (an advantageous benefit will be given to the player). Note that the pending numbers H1 and H2 indicate "0" and "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), a loss pending performance is executed on the display screen 7a. In this loss pending performance, the character ``Defeat!'' indicating that the ally character CRA shown in FIGS. 90(C) and 90(D) has been defeated is changed to the character ``Resurrection!''. In the losing pending performance, the pending number H1 shows "0" as before, but the pending number H2 has been changed from "4" to "2". In other words, in this loss pending consumption performance, after showing the fluctuation result of the current special symbol (loss symbol arrangement "4V4") with the second decorative symbol jackpot confirmation suggestion performance shown in FIG. 90(D), the second special This indicates that two reserved symbols have been used up. The losing symbol arrangement "9V9" indicated by the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R indicates the fluctuation result of the second reservation of the second special symbol. Although the fluctuation result (loss) of the first reservation of the second special symbol is not shown, a losing symbol arrangement, such as "6V6", which similarly suggests a confirmed jackpot, is displayed. In addition, in this losing pending/extinguishing performance, the variable display of the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R (first and second pending/extinguishing) is performed in an extremely short time. Here, the timing at which the characters "defeat!" change to the characters "revival!" is when the second pending variation result "9V9" of the second special symbol is shown. Therefore, by displaying the words "Revival!", the player can be almost convinced that he or she will win the jackpot (an advantageous benefit will be given to the player). Further, the reservation of the second special symbol is given priority over the reservation of the first special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot confirmation production, instead of the words "Resurrection!" shown in FIG. Above the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Jackpot~!" are displayed. In other words, the player is notified that the revival jackpot has been confirmed. Further, the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R also show a completely stopped state in the jackpot symbol arrangement "777". This jackpot confirmation performance makes the player confident that he will win the jackpot.
Here, in the jackpot confirmation performance shown in FIG. 90(F), the pending number H1 shows "0" as before, but the pending number H2 has been changed from "2" to "1". In other words, in this jackpot confirmation performance, the first and second holds (both losers) of the second special symbol are exhausted in the loss hold consumption performance shown in FIG. 90(E), and then the third hold is completed. It shows how it has been digested. The jackpot symbol arrangement "777" indicated by the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R indicates the fluctuation result of the third reservation of the second special symbol. Note that this third pending digestion is also performed in an extremely short time.

In other words, in the jackpot confirmation suggestion performance B shown in FIG. The system uses an image (the words ``defeat!'') other than the pattern (design) to suggest defeat. After execution of the loss suggestion effect, the second decorative pattern 1L is displayed on the display screen 7a.
Only 1C and 1R move (the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed), and the special symbol and the change result (loss) of the reservation are displayed in a short time. At this time, the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R display a loss in a loss pattern arrangement ("*V*") that suggests a confirmed jackpot, and at this timing, an image suggesting a loss (the words "defeat!" ) switches to an image (the words "Victory!") suggesting the return of the jackpot. Thereafter, in response to the suspension of the jackpot, a jackpot confirmation effect is performed (a jackpot pattern arrangement is displayed) using the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, 1R.

[Jackpot confirmed suggestion performance C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining jackpot confirmation suggestion performance C.
In the jackpot confirmation suggestion performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 91(A), a time-saving start performance is executed when a jackpot game due to a specific jackpot ends. In this time-saving start effect, the words ``Start time-saving!'' are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and below the words ``Start time-saving!'' is a message to encourage the player to play right. The right arrow YAR will be displayed. Note that within the display area of the right-handed hit arrow YAR, the words "right-handed hit" are displayed. The player is prompted by the right-hand arrow YAR to hit the game ball to the right, thereby placing the game ball in the second starting opening 21 (electronic support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened, making it easier to win. can be done. When the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the display screen 7a displays the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, which are synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state. A variable display of 1R is started. In addition, in FIG. 91(A), a time saving number display ZTC indicating the number of time saving times is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This time saving number display ZTC represents the remaining number of time saving times, and is "5 times" in this example. Moreover, in FIG. 91(A), the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and only the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed. The second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed extremely small compared to the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and are also called the fourth pattern. This fourth pattern is always displayed on the display screen 7a even if the first decorative pattern is erased due to performance, etc. In this example, the second decorative pattern 1L, 1C, 1R indicates that it is changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a time-saving final fluctuation suggestion effect is executed. In this time-saving final change suggestion performance, the characters ``Start time-saving!'', the number-of-time-savings display ZTC, and the right arrow YAR are deleted, and instead, the words ``Last time!'' are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the time-saving final variation suggestion performance is a performance that is displayed when the decorative symbols related to the second special symbol have been varied four times and only one display remains after the time-saving game is started. In addition, in the time saving final variation suggestion performance, the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R display the immediately preceding stop symbol "589". Further, in the time-saving final variation suggestion performance, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), the first decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this first decorative pattern variation performance, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left first decorative pattern 8L is in the left pattern display area, the middle first decorative pattern 8C is in the middle pattern display area, and the right pattern display area is The first right decorative pattern 8R is displayed. Moreover, FIG. 91(C) shows that the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, 1R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, in the left center of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically side by side. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In addition, in the first decorative pattern variation performance shown in FIG. 91(C), H1 indicates "0" and H2 indicates "4". That is, it is suggested that the number of reservations for the first special symbol is "0" and the number of reservations for the second special symbol is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle performance, an image of a battle between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB is displayed. In addition, in this battle performance, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and only the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed. The second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R indicate that they are being changed, and the reserved numbers H1 and H2 indicate "0" and "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), a jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot confirmation suggestion performance, a victory image VCG indicating that the ally character CRA has won as a result of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this winning image VCG, it is possible to make the player think that he or she will win a jackpot (an advantageous benefit will be given to the player). In addition, in this jackpot confirmation suggestion performance, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and only the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed. The second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R indicate that they are being changed, and the reserved numbers H1 and H2 indicate "0" and "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a second decorative symbol jackpot confirmation suggestion performance is executed on the display screen 7a. This second decorative pattern jackpot confirmation suggestion performance is such that while the winning image VCG shown in FIG. 91(E) remains still, the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R stop changing, resulting in a loss pattern arrangement "4V4". Display. Then, in this second decorative pattern jackpot confirmed suggestion performance, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and only the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R move on the display screen 7a. . In other words, the losing pattern array "4V4" shown by the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R indicates the fluctuation results of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 91(C). In other words, the fluctuation result of the second special symbol this time indicates that it is a loss. That is, even though the second special symbol variation result this time was a loss, the winning image VCG shown in FIG. 91(E) is displayed on the display screen 7a.
Here, the losing pattern arrangement "4V4" shown by the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R is not the normally displayed losing pattern arrangement, but the left second decorative pattern 1L and the right second decorative pattern 1R are the same number. (reach state), the middle second decorative pattern 1C shows "V", and is a loss pattern arrangement that suggests a jackpot confirmation, which is displayed only during this second decorative pattern jackpot confirmation suggestion performance. In other words, this losing symbol arrangement "4V4" also serves as a hint that the jackpot is confirmed. In other words, the symbol arrangement "4V4" indicated by the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R means that although the fluctuation result of the second special symbol this time is a loss, there will be a jackpot in the subsequent pending digestion. It suggests. Therefore, by displaying this "4V4" jackpot confirmation effect, the player can be almost convinced that he will win the jackpot (an advantageous benefit will be given to the player). Note that the pending numbers H1 and H2 indicate "0" and "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), a loss pending performance is executed on the display screen 7a. In this losing pending performance, the winning image VCG shown in FIGS. 91(E) and (F) remains stationary, and only the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed in a variable manner according to the pending numbers H1 and H2. It is a performance that performs. In this loss pending performance, the pending number H1 shows "0" as before, but the pending number H2 has been changed from "4" to "3". In other words, in this loss pending consumption performance, after showing the fluctuation result of the second special symbol (loss symbol arrangement "4V4") in the second decorative symbol jackpot confirmation suggestion performance shown in FIG. 91(F), the second special This indicates that one symbol has been reserved. The losing symbol arrangement "9V9" indicated by the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R indicates the result of the change in the holding of the second special symbol this time. This losing symbol arrangement ``9V9'' also serves as a hint that a jackpot is guaranteed, just like ``4V4''. In addition, in this loss pending performance, the variable display of the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R is performed in an extremely short time. In addition, the reservation of the second special symbol is given priority over the reservation of the first special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(H), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot confirmation production, instead of the winning images VCG shown in FIGS. 91(E), (F), and (G), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R completely stopped at the jackpot symbol arrangement "777". Indicating the status, the words "Jackpot~!" are displayed above the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R also show a completely stopped state in the jackpot symbol arrangement "777". This jackpot confirmation performance makes the player confident that he will win the jackpot.
Here, in the jackpot confirmation performance shown in FIG. 91(H), the number of reservations H1 shows "0" as before, but the number of reservations H2 has been changed from "3" to "2". In other words, in this jackpot confirmation performance, after the second special symbol's reservation (loss) is completed in the loss-retention-extinguishment performance shown in FIG. 91(G), the next reservation is further completed. The jackpot symbol arrangement "777" indicated by the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R indicates the result of the current pending fluctuation of the second special symbol. Note that this pending digestion is also carried out in an extremely short time.

In other words, in the jackpot confirmation suggestion performance C shown in FIG. Even before the fluctuation stops, an image (winning image VCG) other than the symbols (first and second decorative symbols) is used to perform a jackpot confirmation suggestion effect. After the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed, only the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R move on the display screen 7a (the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed), and the special symbol and the pending Display the fluctuation results (losses) in a short time. At this time, the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R display a loss in a loss pattern arrangement ("*V*") that suggests a confirmed jackpot. Thereafter, in response to the suspension of the jackpot, a jackpot confirmation effect is performed (a jackpot pattern arrangement is displayed) using the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, 1R.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, a jackpot confirmation image is displayed during a predetermined variation of the special symbol, and a decorative symbol is used to win the jackpot during a variation after the predetermined variation of the special symbol. It is configured to display a pattern array. More specifically, in a predetermined variation of the special symbol, the contents of the reservation are read in advance, and a jackpot confirmation suggestion image is displayed during or as a result of the variation of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest that a jackpot will occur with a change that precedes a change that will lead to a jackpot, and the player can be sure that the jackpot will be won as soon as possible. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, the decorative patterns include first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R, which suggest jackpot confirmation. If there is a variation between the predetermined variation of the special symbol that displays the image and the variation that displays the jackpot symbol arrangement, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed in that variation, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed. It is configured to display a losing symbol arrangement only with symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R. Moreover, the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed extremely small compared to the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the time required to display the losing pattern arrangement only with the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R. is extremely short. Therefore, according to this configuration, while displaying the jackpot confirmation suggestion image, only the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R are inconspicuously varied to display the losing symbol arrangement, and then the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C are displayed. , 8R, it becomes possible to display a jackpot symbol arrangement, and the player can feel as if the jackpot has been confirmed directly from the jackpot confirmation suggestion image. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, an image is displayed that suggests that the number of reservations is reduced in a change after a predetermined change in the special symbol compared to the previous change. It is configured. According to this configuration, even if the losing symbol arrangement is displayed by changing only the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R while the jackpot confirmation suggestion image is being displayed, the player can see that the number of pending symbols is decreasing. This makes it possible to understand that the special symbols have changed during this time. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, the jackpot confirmation suggestion image is configured to be displayed using an image other than the symbol. More specifically, the jackpot confirmation suggestion image is configured to be displayed using the words "Victory!" and a victory image VCG indicating that the ally character CRA has won. According to this configuration, compared to the case where the jackpot confirmation suggestion image is displayed using a pattern, it is possible to indirectly promote the jackpot, and it is possible to give more flexibility to the subsequent performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91, the contents of the reservation are read in advance by the fluctuation of the special symbol at the end of the time saving, and the jackpot confirmation is suggested during or as a result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol. It is configured to display images. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest that a jackpot will be achieved by the final change in time saving, and the player can play the game with great joy. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the jackpot confirmation suggestion performance is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, in the second decorative symbol jackpot confirmation suggestion performance, the losing symbol array "*V*" that suggests jackpot confirmation is displayed until the jackpot fluctuation occurs. Although the images are displayed sequentially, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the first 3 out of 4 pending items are a loss and the 4th is a jackpot, the loss symbol arrangement "*V *" may be displayed. Alternatively, the losing symbol arrangement "*V*" may be displayed twice out of the first three. The point is that the losing symbol array "*V*" should be displayed at least once.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, a configuration has been described in which a jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is performed when there is a jackpot on hold, but when there is no jackpot on hold, that is, there is only a loss. It is also possible to perform effects according to the present invention. For example, if there is no jackpot on hold, the enemy character CRB wins in the battle effect, and the words "defeat!" are displayed as a loss-suggesting effect. Then, while the words "Defeat!" remain displayed, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and only the extremely small displayed second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R are changed to complete the losing symbol arrangement. An example of this would be to display a ``disappearance'' and use this to clear up all the reservations in a short period of time.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90, in the loss pending performance, the timing at which the words "Defeat!" change to the words "Resurrection!" is the second of the second special symbol. The present invention is not limited to this example, but the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, the timing of this change may be during the fluctuation of the second pending symbol of the second special symbol, or after "9V9" is shown until the jackpot confirmation effect is performed. It may be.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89, the words "Win!" are displayed in the jackpot confirmation effect, and as shown in FIG. 90, the characters "defeat!" are displayed in the loss suggestion effect. Although the characters "Resurrection!" are displayed when a loss is suspended and the game ends, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, these display positions and display sizes are arbitrary. Also, predetermined characters may be used instead of letters. In short, any image other than the symbols that indirectly appeals to the player may be used.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is explained using a battle effect in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB battle. It is not limited. For example, instead of the battle effect, a story effect (for example, an effect that shows whether the main character's wish will come true) or a step-up effect (an effect that shows whether the player can step up to the end) may be used. Moreover, the battle performance does not have to be a mode in which the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. For example, the battle performance may be a performance in which a large number of characters compete and whether or not the selected character wins.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B7-1]
A display means capable of performing multiple types of display effects,
A symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of symbols;
Decorative pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern in accordance with the variable display of the pattern by the pattern display device;
A gaming machine comprising:
In a predetermined variation of the symbol by the symbol display means, the display means displays a jackpot confirmation suggestion image;
displaying a jackpot pattern arrangement using the decorative pattern by the decorative pattern display means in the variation after the predetermined variation;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B7-2]
The decorative pattern has a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern,
If there is a variation between the predetermined variation and the variation in which the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed, in that variation, the first decorative symbol is not displayed and only the second decorative symbol is used to display the losing symbol arrangement. display,
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1.
[Aspect B7-3]
The decorative pattern has a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern,
In the predetermined variation, the second decorative pattern is used to suggest a jackpot confirmation;
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1 or aspect B7-2.
[Aspect B7-4]
In the variation after the predetermined variation, the display means displays an image suggesting that the number of reservations is reduced compared to the previous variation.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B7-1 to B7-3.
[Aspect B7-5]
The jackpot confirmed suggestion image uses an image other than the symbol,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B7-1 to B7-4, characterized in that:

The pseudo consecutive reach effect will be explained below using FIGS. 92 to 94. This pseudo consecutive reach effect is performed when the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter simply referred to as "special symbol") is being displayed in a variable manner (during a single variable display), and the gaming state is normal or high. It can be executed during a probability state, a time saving state, an electric chew support (a state in which the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it is easy to win at the second starting port 21, hereinafter also referred to as "electric support").

[Pseudo continuous reach performance A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining pseudo consecutive reach effect A.
In the pseudo-continuous reach effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 92(A), a pseudo-continuous start effect is executed while the special symbols are changing.
Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the fluctuating display of decorative symbols is repeated a predetermined number of times in a pseudo manner, and is an effect that can be executed at the start of the fluctuation, at the ready-to-reach effect, and the like. For example, pseudo-continuous effects include effects that repeat the effects of starting and temporarily stopping the decorative patterns, effects that repeat the effects of temporarily stopping at least a part of a predetermined pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns, and effects that repeat the effects of a predetermined logo (for example, NEXT). This includes a performance that repeats a performance that temporarily stops the , or a display that associates a pseudo series such as "x2", "x3", and "pseudo", as well as a performance that executes a fluctuating performance of decorative symbols. Note that the number of times the performance is repeated is also referred to as the number of pseudo consecutive performances, and may be expressed as "pseudo 2" or "x2" if it is repeated two times, "pseudo 3" or "x3" if it is three times.
In this pseudo consecutive start effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. is displayed. Note that FIG. 92(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. Moreover, "x1" is displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, thereby informing that the number of pseudo consecutive runs is the first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the first pseudo consecutive reach effect is executed. In this pseudo consecutive reach 1st production, when the pseudo consecutive number changes for the first time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stop at the jackpot symbol arrangement, and the middle decorative symbol 8C The reach state is shown as being fluctuating (in the illustration, "8↓8"). Further, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Reach!" are displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop is such that the left decorative pattern 8L stops first, then the right decorative pattern 8R, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), a losing symbol stop effect is executed. This loss symbol stop performance indicates that the result of the reach shown in FIG. 92(B) is a loss. In this example, "858" is shown as this losing symbol arrangement. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporarily stopped state (for example, a state in which they swing up and down by two or three frames).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(D), a pseudo series third performance is executed. Furthermore, after the first pseudo-continuation performance (pseudo-continuation reach first production) ends with the execution of the losing symbol stop performance shown in FIG. 92(C), the second pseudo-continuation performance is executed. , illustration of the second pseudo-run performance is omitted. In this second pseudo series performance, it is assumed that a loss symbol stop performance is executed with a symbol arrangement of a winning result without becoming a reach.
In the third pseudo-run, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be changing, and "x3" is displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which increases the number of pseudo-runs to 3. We are announcing that this is the second time.

Next, the loss notification effect shown in FIG. 92(E) or the pseudo continuous reach second time effect shown in FIG. 92(F) is executed. First, the loss notification performance will be explained. The loss notification performance indicates that the variation result of the third pseudo series performance shown in FIG. 92(D) is a loss. In this example, "958" is shown as this losing pattern arrangement. Here, in this losing pattern arrangement "958", the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are completely stopped for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds), and as a result, the fluctuation related to this pseudo-continuous performance is confirmed to be a loss. This will be announced. Then, when the loss notification effect shown in FIG. 92(E) is executed, a series of pseudo continuous effects (FIGS. 92(A), (B), (C), (D), (E)) are completed. .
On the other hand, the pseudo consecutive reach second performance shown in FIG. 92(F) indicates that the reach state has been reached during the fluctuation of the pseudo consecutive third performance shown in FIG. 92(D), and in this example, this The reach symbol arrangement is "7↓7". Further, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Reach!" are displayed. When this second pseudo consecutive reach performance is performed, the next jackpot notification performance shown in FIG. 92(G) is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(G), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification performance, as a result of the execution of the pseudo consecutive reach second performance shown in FIG. 92(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are completely stopped at the jackpot symbol arrangement "777". . Further, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Jackpot!" are displayed. This notifies you that the jackpot has been confirmed. Then, when the jackpot notification effect shown in FIG. 92(G) is executed, a series of pseudo consecutive effects (FIGS. 92(A), (B), (C), (D), (F), (G) ) ends.

In other words, in the pseudo-continuous reach performance A shown in FIG. If the reach is performed twice, in other words, if the reach is performed multiple times, it is shown that the fluctuation result is a jackpot. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous reach performance A, there may be cases where a reach occurs multiple times in the pseudo-continuation performance, and when a reach occurs multiple times, benefits that are more advantageous to the player are more likely to be given than when no reach occurs. It has become.

[Pseudo continuous reach performance B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining pseudo consecutive reach effect B.
In the pseudo-continuous reach performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 93(A), a pseudo-continuation start performance is executed while the special symbols are changing. In this pseudo consecutive start effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. is displayed. Note that FIG. 93(A) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. Moreover, "x1" is displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, thereby informing that the number of pseudo consecutive runs is the first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(B), the first pseudo consecutive reach effect is executed. In this pseudo consecutive reach 1st production, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate for the first pseudo consecutive number, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stop at the jackpot symbol arrangement, and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates. The reach state is medium (in the illustration, "8↓8"). Further, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Reach!" are displayed. The order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop is such that the left decorative pattern 8L stops first, then the right decorative pattern 8R, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(C), a pseudo consecutive reach shift effect is executed. This pseudo consecutive reach shift performance is a performance in which only the right decorative symbol 8R indicating "8" is shifted by one symbol to become "9" in the reach symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 93(B). In other words, in the pseudo-continuous reach-shift effect, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 to 5 seconds) has elapsed after the pseudo-continuous reach state is reached, one of the stopped symbols shifts and the reach-to-reach state is canceled. It becomes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(D), a losing symbol stop effect is executed. This loss symbol stop performance indicates that the result of the reach shown in FIG. 93(B) is a loss. In this example, "859" is shown as this losing pattern arrangement. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporarily stopped state (for example, a state in which they swing up and down by two or three frames).

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(E), a pseudo series third performance is executed. Furthermore, after the first pseudo-continuation performance (pseudo-continuation reach first production) ends with the execution of the losing symbol stop performance shown in FIG. 93(D), the second pseudo-continuation performance is executed. , illustration of the second pseudo-run performance is omitted. In this second pseudo series performance, it is assumed that a loss symbol stop performance is executed with a symbol arrangement of a winning result without becoming a reach.
In the third pseudo-run, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown to be changing, and "x3" is displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which increases the number of pseudo-runs to 3. We are announcing that this is the second time.

Next, the loss notification effect shown in FIG. 93(F) or the pseudo continuous reach second time effect shown in FIG. 93(G) is executed. First, the loss notification performance will be explained. The loss notification performance indicates that the variation result of the third pseudo series performance shown in FIG. 93(E) is a loss. In this example, "958" is shown as this losing pattern arrangement. Here, in this losing pattern arrangement "958", the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are completely stopped for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds), so the fluctuations related to this pseudo-continuous performance are confirmed to be a loss. You will be notified of what has happened. Then, when the loss notification effect shown in FIG. 93(E) is executed, a series of pseudo continuous effects (FIGS. 93(A), (B), (C), (D), (E), (F) ) ends.
On the other hand, the pseudo consecutive reach second performance shown in FIG. 93(G) indicates that the reach state has been reached during the fluctuation of the pseudo consecutive third performance shown in FIG. 93(D), and in this example, this The reach symbol arrangement is "7↓7". Further, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Reach!" are displayed. When this second pseudo consecutive reach performance is performed, the next jackpot notification performance shown in FIG. 93(G) is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(H), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification performance, as a result of the execution of the second pseudo consecutive reach performance shown in FIG. 93(G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are completely stopped at the jackpot symbol arrangement "777". . Further, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Jackpot!" are displayed. This notifies you that the jackpot has been confirmed. Then, when the jackpot notification effect shown in FIG. 93(G) is executed, a series of pseudo continuous effects (FIGS. 93(A), (B), (C), (D), (E), (G) , (H)) ends.

In other words, in the pseudo-continuous reach performance B shown in FIG. If the reach is performed twice, in other words, if the reach is performed multiple times, it is shown that the fluctuation result is a jackpot. In other words, in pseudo-continuous reach performance B, there are cases where a reach occurs multiple times in the pseudo-continuous performance, and when a reach occurs multiple times, benefits that are more advantageous to the player are more likely to be granted than when no reach occurs. It has become. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 93(B) and (C), in a pseudo-run, once the reach symbol arrangement is temporarily stopped at the reach symbol arrangement, the reach symbol arrangement shifts and becomes a losing symbol arrangement, even if the reach symbol arrangement occurs once. will be counted as.

[Pseudo continuous reach performance C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo consecutive reach effect C.
In the pseudo-continuous reach performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 94(A), a pseudo-continuation start performance is executed while the special symbols are changing. In this pseudo consecutive start effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the first medium decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right symbol display area is the first left decorative symbol 8L. The first right decorative pattern 8R is displayed. Furthermore, a second left decorative pattern 1L, a second middle decorative pattern 1C, and a second right decorative pattern 1R are displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. The second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed extremely small compared to the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and are also called the fourth pattern. This fourth symbol is always displayed on the display screen 7a even if the first decorative symbol is erased due to performance or the like. In addition, in FIG. 94(A), the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, 1R are shown to be changing. Moreover, "x1" is displayed above the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, thereby informing that the number of pseudo consecutive runs is the first. In addition, the stopping order of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is that the first left decorative pattern 8L stops first, then the first right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the first medium decorative pattern 8C stops. It is supposed to be done. The stopping order of the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R is such that the second left decorative pattern 1L stops first, then the second right decorative pattern 1R stops, and finally the second medium decorative pattern 1C stops. It has become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), a pseudo-continuation effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuation effect, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are erased, and instead, the word "NEXT" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R stop displaying the losing symbol array "589". In other words, in the pseudo continuous continuous performance, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and only the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed, and the first variation of the pseudo continuous shown in FIG. 94(A) is displayed. It suggests a result (loss). Then, the characters "NEXT" are displayed in place of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, suggesting that the pseudo continuous performance will be continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), a pseudo series third performance is executed. Note that after the first pseudo-sequence performance ends with the execution of the pseudo-series continuation performance shown in FIG. 94(B), the second pseudo-series performance is executed, but the illustration of the second pseudo-series performance is omitted. In this second pseudo series performance, it is assumed that a loss symbol stop performance is executed with a symbol arrangement of a winning result without becoming a reach.
In the third pseudo-sequence performance, it is shown that the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, 1R are changing, and above the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, "×3" is displayed, thereby informing that the number of pseudo-repeat times is the third.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(D), the first pseudo consecutive reach effect is executed. In this first pseudo consecutive reach performance, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are erased, and the character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a instead. In addition, in the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R, the second left decorative pattern 1L and the second right decorative pattern 1R are temporarily stopped in the jackpot pattern arrangement, and the second medium decorative pattern 1C is fluctuating (in the illustration, "8↓ 8”). In other words, in the first pseudo-run reach, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and only the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed, and the third variation of the pseudo-run becomes a reach. It suggests. It should be noted that the character CRA performs a performance that makes the player expect a big hit in this first pseudo consecutive reach performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(E), a losing symbol stop effect is executed. This loss symbol stop performance indicates that the result of the reach shown in FIG. 94(D) is a loss. In other words, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, 1R represent a losing symbol arrangement "858". Note that the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R are in a temporarily stopped state (for example, a state in which they swing up and down by two or three frames).

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(F), the fourth pseudo series effect is executed. In this fourth pseudo-series performance, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, 1R are shown to be changing, and above the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, "x4" is displayed, thereby informing that the number of pseudo-runs is the fourth.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(G), a second pseudo consecutive reach effect is executed. In this second pseudo consecutive reach performance, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are erased, and instead, the characters CRA and CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R, the second left decorative pattern 1L and the second right decorative pattern 1R are temporarily stopped in the jackpot pattern arrangement, and the second medium decorative pattern 1C is fluctuating (in the illustration, "7↓ 7”). In other words, in the second pseudo-receive reach, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and only the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R are displayed, and the fourth variation of the pseudo-receive is a reach. It suggests. In addition, character CRA and character CRB perform various elaborate performances in this pseudo consecutive reach second performance to make the players expect a big hit. In other words, in the second pseudo consecutive reach performance, compared to the first pseudo continuous reach performance, more characters appear and an elaborate performance with high jackpot reliability is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(H), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification performance, as a result of the execution of the second pseudo consecutive reach performance shown in FIG. Array "777" indicates a completely stopped state. Further, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Jackpot!" are displayed. This notifies you that the jackpot has been confirmed. Then, when the jackpot notification effect shown in FIG. 94(G) is executed, a series of pseudo-continuous effects (FIGS. 94(A) to (H)) are completed.

In other words, in the pseudo-continuous reach effect C shown in FIG. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and the reach pattern arrangement is displayed only with the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R. On the other hand, when displaying a losing pattern arrangement or a jackpot pattern arrangement after becoming a reach in the pseudo-continuous performance, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 1L, 1C, 1R are used. Furthermore, it is shown that if the reach is performed twice in a series of pseudo-continuous performances, or in other words, if the reach is performed multiple times, the fluctuation result becomes a jackpot.

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of the pseudo-continuous reach effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the pseudo-continuous performance executed while the special symbols are changing, there may be a case where the reach occurs multiple times, and when the reach occurs multiple times, , the configuration is such that advantageous benefits are more likely to be awarded to the player than if the event had not occurred. According to this configuration, the player can face the game with great expectations when a reach occurs multiple times in the pseudo-continuous performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, the reach that occurs in the pseudo-continuous performance is configured such that after once stopping at the reach symbol arrangement, the reach symbol arrangement may shift and become a losing symbol arrangement. It has become. According to this configuration, even if the reach symbol arrangement shifts and becomes a losing symbol arrangement, it is considered that a reach has occurred once, and including this form of reach, the player is given various possibilities in pseudo-continuous performance. It is possible to perform reach effects in different ways. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, the decorative symbols include first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R, and the pseudo-continuous effect increases reach. In this case, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and the reach symbol arrangement is displayed only with the second decorative symbols 1L, 1C, and 1R. According to this configuration, in the pseudo continuous effect, instead of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display area of the display screen 7a is effectively utilized to display a reach effect for a long time with elaborately elaborated images other than the symbols. It becomes possible to do so. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, when displaying the losing symbol arrangement or the jackpot symbol arrangement after reaching reach in the pseudo-continuous performance, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R It is configured to be performed with two decorative patterns 1L, 1C, and 1R. According to this configuration, it becomes possible to clearly notify the player of the fluctuation result after reaching the reach in the pseudo-continuous performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, the larger the number of reach times that occur in the pseudo-continuous performance, the more advantageous benefits are likely to be given to the player. According to this configuration, the player can face the game with great expectations every time a reach occurs in the pseudo-continuous performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the pseudo-continuous reach effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the pseudo consecutive reach shift effect, only the right decorative symbol 8R is shifted down by one symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the right decorative pattern 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L may be shifted. Alternatively, both the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L may be shifted. Furthermore, instead of shifting one symbol downward, two or more symbols may shift upward. Furthermore, the symbols may be shifted by using an effect in which a character or the like pushes or pulls the symbols.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the pseudo continuous reach effect, the pseudo continuous number is displayed as "x1", "x2", etc. It is not limited to. For example, the first pseudo-run may be displayed using characters such as "START" and "FIRST," and the fourth pseudo-run may be displayed using characters such as "MAX" and "FULL." In this case, it is even better if it is displayed with audio.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, in the pseudo consecutive reach performance, in the pseudo consecutive reach first performance and the pseudo consecutive reach second performance, instead of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, Although the reach effect is performed using the characters, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the character presentation, a story presentation (for example, a presentation indicating whether the main character's wish will come true) or a step-up presentation (a presentation indicating whether or not he can step up to the end) may be used. In this case, the second pseudo consecutive reach performance may be a story performance or step-up performance that has a higher jackpot reliability compared to the first pseudo consecutive reach performance.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, the characters "NEXT" are displayed in the pseudo continuous reach effect in the pseudo continuous reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, predetermined characters or scenes may be used instead of letters. In short, any image may be used as long as it can indirectly appeal to the player that the pseudo-series continues. Further, although "NEXT" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, the display position and display size are arbitrary.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the pseudo-continuous reach effect, if the reach is performed only once in a series of pseudo-continuous effects, the fluctuation result becomes a loss. , when the reach is performed twice in a series of pseudo-continuous performances, the fluctuation result becomes a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation result may be a jackpot even if the reach is once, and the variation result may be a loss even if the reach is twice. In short, there are cases where a reach is achieved multiple times due to a pseudo-continuous performance, and when the reach occurs multiple times, it is sufficient that the jackpot is more likely to occur than when it does not occur.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B8-1]
A symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of symbols;
Decorative pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern in accordance with the variable display of the pattern by the pattern display device;
A gaming machine comprising:
The decorative pattern display means is capable of performing a pseudo-coupling effect,
In the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous performance, there may be multiple reaches,
When reach occurs multiple times, advantageous benefits are more likely to be granted to the player than when reach does not occur.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B8-2]
The above-mentioned reach that occurs in the pseudo-continuous performance may once stop at the reach symbol arrangement, and then the reach symbol arrangement may shift and become a losing symbol arrangement.
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-1.
[Aspect B8-3]
The decorative pattern has a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern,
When the pseudo-continuous performance results in a reach, the first decorative pattern is not displayed and the reach pattern arrangement is displayed only with the second decorative pattern.
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-1 or aspect B8-2.
[Aspect B8-4]
When displaying a losing pattern arrangement or a jackpot pattern arrangement after becoming a reach in the pseudo-continuous performance, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are used;
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-3, characterized in that:
[Aspect B8-5]
The greater the number of reaches that occur in the pseudo-continuous performance, the more advantageous benefits are likely to be granted to the player.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B8-1 to B8-4.

The pending icon display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 95 to 97. This pending icon display performance can be executed during a fluctuating display of decorative symbols, a stopped display, or the like. For example, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the held pitch count command and fluctuation stop command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a held icon display effect, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. This is a display effect that is read out and displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Pending icon display effect A]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon display effect A. In the hold icon display effect A, first, four hold icons are displayed as shown in FIG. 95(A). Specifically, first, the display screen 7a displays the first pending image 9A1, the second pending image 9A2, the third pending image 9A3, the fourth pending image 9A4, the pending image 9C, and the first image IM1. , a second image IM2, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. The first held image 9A1 is the leftmost held image among the held images (held icons) 9A, and the second held image 9A2 is the second held image from the left among the held images 9A. The third pending image 9A3 is the third pending image from the left among the pending images 9A, and the fourth pending image 9A4 is the rightmost pending image among the pending images 9A. The four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 have approximately the same size.

The first image IM1 is a substantially semicircular image, and four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are arranged at substantially equal intervals around the circumference. Thereby, the first pending image 9A1 and the fourth pending image 9A4 are at the same position in the vertical direction (up and down direction) of the display screen 7a. Further, the second pending image 9A2 and the third pending image 9A3 are at the same position in the vertical direction (up and down direction) of the display screen 7a. That is, the second pending image 9A2 is located above the first pending image 9A1, and the third pending image 9A3 is located above the fourth pending image 9A4. The sizes of the four pending images 9A1 to 9A4 are smaller than the corresponding pending image 9C. Further, the upper end of the held image 9C is located above the display screen 7a than the upper end of the first held image 9A1, and is located below the display screen 7a than the upper end of the second held image 9A2. are doing. The four pending images 9A1 to 9A4 have different positions in the horizontal direction (left and right direction) of the display screen 7a. Here, in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a, a first pending image 9A1, a second pending image 9A2, a third pending image 9A3, and a fourth pending image 9A4 are arranged at approximately equal intervals from the left side.

The second image IM2 is a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular image provided on both sides of the first image IM1, and is in contact with the reserved image 9C. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, and a portion of the pending image 9C and the second image IM2 are visible through the first movable accessory 14. In FIG. 95(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the pending consumption effect shown in FIG. 95(B) is executed. Specifically, the held image 9C disappears, and the first held image 9A1 moves to the position where the held image 9C was located. Thereafter, the pending icon movement effect shown in FIG. 95(C) is executed. Specifically, the first image IM1 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, and the second pending image 9A2 is moved to the position where the first pending image 9A1 was. Further, the third pending image 9A3 moves to the position where the second pending image 9A2 was located. Further, the fourth pending image 9A4 moves to the position where the third pending image 9A3 was located. Thereafter, as the game ball enters the first starting port 20, additional display of the hold icon shown in FIG. 95(D) is executed. Specifically, the fifth pending image 9A5 is displayed at the position where the fourth pending image 9A4 was located.

[Pending icon display effect B]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon display effect B. Pending icon display effect B differs from the pending icon display effect A in FIG. 95 in the mutual positional relationships of the four pending images 9A1 to 9A4. In the four-holding display of FIG. 96(A), the display screen 7a displays a first holding image 9A1, a second holding image 9A2, a third holding image 9A3, a fourth holding image 9A4, and the holding image 9C. , a fourth image IM4, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed.

The fourth image IM4 is a substantially step-like image, and four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are arranged at substantially equal intervals. Thereby, the second pending image 9A2 and the third pending image 9A3 are at the same position in the vertical direction (up and down direction) of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the first pending image 9A1, the fourth pending image 9A4, and the second pending image 9A2 have different positions in the vertical direction (up and down direction) of the display screen 7a. That is, the second pending image 9A2 is located above the first pending image 9A1, and the fourth pending image 9A4 is located above the second pending image 9A2. The sizes of the four pending images 9A1 to 9A4 are smaller than the corresponding pending image 9C. Further, the upper end of the held image 9C is located above the display screen 7a than the upper end of the first held image 9A1, and is located below the display screen 7a than the upper end of the second held image 9A2. are doing. The four pending images 9A1 to 9A4 have different positions in the horizontal direction (left and right direction) of the display screen 7a. Here, in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a, a first pending image 9A1, a second pending image 9A2, a third pending image 9A3, and a fourth pending image 9A4 are arranged at approximately equal intervals from the left side.

The left side of the fourth image IM4 is in contact with the pending image 9C. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, and a portion of the reserved image 9C and the fourth image IM4 are visible through the first movable accessory 14. In FIG. 96(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the pending consumption effect shown in FIG. 96(B) is executed. Specifically, the held image 9C disappears, and the first held image 9A1 moves to the position where the held image 9C was located. Thereafter, the pending icon movement effect shown in FIG. 96(C) is executed. Specifically, the second pending image 9A2 moves to the position where the first pending image 9A1 was located. Further, the third pending image 9A3 moves to the position where the second pending image 9A2 was located. Further, the fourth pending image 9A4 moves to the position where the third pending image 9A3 was located. Thereafter, as the game ball enters the first starting port 20, additional display of the hold icon shown in FIG. 96(D) is executed. Specifically, the fifth pending image 9A5 is displayed at the position where the fourth pending image 9A4 was located.

[Pending icon display effect C]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon display effect C. Pending icon display effect C differs from the pending icon display effect A in FIG. 95 in the mutual positional relationships of the four pending images 9A1 to 9A4. In the four-holding display of FIG. 97(A), the display screen 7a displays a first holding image 9A1, a second holding image 9A2, a third holding image 9A3, a fourth holding image 9A4, and the holding image 9C. , a fifth image IM5, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed.

The fifth image IM5 is a substantially sloped image, and four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 are arranged at substantially equal intervals. This results in
The four held images 9A1 to 9A4 have different positions in the vertical direction (up and down direction) of the display screen 7a. That is, the second pending image 9A2 is located above the first pending image 9A1, the third pending image 9A3 is located above the second pending image 9A2, and the fourth pending image 9A4 is located above the third pending image 9A2. It is located above image 9A3. The sizes of the four pending images 9A1 to 9A4 are smaller than the corresponding pending image 9C. Further, the upper end of the held image 9C is located above the display screen 7a than the upper end of the first held image 9A1, and is located below the display screen 7a than the upper end of the second held image 9A2. are doing. The four pending images 9A1 to 9A4 have different positions in the horizontal direction (left and right direction) of the display screen 7a. Here, in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a, a first pending image 9A1, a second pending image 9A2, a third pending image 9A3, and a fourth pending image 9A4 are arranged at approximately equal intervals from the left side.

The left side of the fifth image IM5 is in contact with the pending image 9C. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, and a portion of the reserved image 9C and the fifth image IM5 are visible through the first movable accessory 14. In FIG. 97(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the pending consumption effect shown in FIG. 97(B) is executed. Specifically, the held image 9C disappears, and the first held image 9A1 moves to the position where the held image 9C was located. Thereafter, the pending icon movement effect shown in FIG. 97(C) is executed. Specifically, the second pending image 9A2 moves to the position where the first pending image 9A1 was located. Further, the third pending image 9A3 moves to the position where the second pending image 9A2 was located. Further, the fourth pending image 9A4 moves to the position where the third pending image 9A3 was located. Thereafter, as the game ball enters the first starting port 20, additional display of the hold icon shown in FIG. 97(D) is executed. Specifically, the fifth pending image 9A5 is displayed at the position where the fourth pending image 9A4 was located.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, the display screen 7a includes a first pending image 9A1, a second pending image 9A2, a third pending image 9A3, and a fourth pending image 9A4. is displayed, the first pending image 9A1 and the second pending image 9A2 have different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a, and the third pending image 9A3 and the fourth pending image 9A4 have different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. The position in is different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the second pending image 9A2 and the third pending image 9A3 displayed on the display screen 7a are at the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, the first pending image 9A1 and the fourth pending image 9A4 displayed on the display screen 7a are at the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, the first pending image 9A1 is smaller than the pending image 9C. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, the first pending image 9A1, the second pending image 9A2, the third pending image 9A3, and the fourth pending image displayed on the display screen 7a are The images 9A4 have different positions in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modification of the above-described hold icon display performance will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the four pending images 9A1 to 9A4 and the pending image 9C have a circular shape. However, these retained images can have any shape.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pending image 9C is larger in size than the four pending images 9A1 to 9A4. However, the size of the pending image 9C may be the same size as the four pending images 9A1 to 9A4, or may be smaller than these. Further, the shapes and colors of the four reserved images 9A1 to 9A4 may be different from each other.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 partially covers the reserved image 9C. However, the reserved image 9C does not need to be covered by the first movable accessory 14. Similarly, the second image IM2, the fourth image IM4, and the fifth image IM5 do not need to be covered with the first movable accessory 14.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fourth pending icon,
When the first hold icon, the second hold icon, the third hold icon, and the fourth hold icon are displayed on the display means, the first hold icon and the second hold icon are The means have different positions in the first direction, and the third hold icon and the fourth hold icon have different positions in the first direction of the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
The second hold icon and the third hold icon displayed on the display means are at the same position in the first direction of the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2,
The first hold icon and the fourth hold icon displayed on the display means are at the same position in the first direction of the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images includes the pending image,
the first hold icon is smaller than the hold image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-4,
The first hold icon, the second hold icon, the third hold icon, and the fourth hold icon displayed on the display means have different positions in the second direction of the display means. There is,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The hold icon visibility difficulty effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 98 to 100. This hold icon visibility difficulty effect may be executed during a decorative pattern variation effect, a reach effect (super reach effect), or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the hold icon visibility effect, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it. Screen 7a
This is a display effect that is displayed on the screen.

[Difficult to see hold icon A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon visibility difficulty effect A. In the hold icon visibility difficulty effect A, the hold extinguishing effect shown in FIG. 98(A) is executed. Specifically, four pending images 9A, the pending image 9C, a first image IM1, a second image IM2, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. The first image IM1 is a substantially semicircular image, and four reserved images 9A are arranged at substantially equal intervals around the circumference of the first image IM1. The sizes of the four pending images 9A are smaller than the corresponding pending image 9C. The second image IM2 is a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular image provided on both sides of the first image IM1, and is in contact with the reserved image 9C. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, and a portion of the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 are visible through the first movable accessory 14.

When the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed after being displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIG. moves to the position where the pending image 9C was located. Thereafter, the pending icon movement effect shown in FIG. 98(B) is executed. Specifically, the first image IM1 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, and the second reserved image 9A from the left is moved to the leftmost position. Furthermore, the reserved image 9A that was third from the left moves to the second position from the left. Further, the rightmost reserved image 9A is also moved one place to the left. That is, the first image IM1 rotates as the reserved image 9A is shifted. Then, variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is started.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a pending icon fade-out effect shown in FIG. 98(C) is executed. Here, the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 fade out from the display screen 7a, making them difficult to see. Specifically, the reserved image 9A and the first image IM1 become gradually thinner, and thus become increasingly difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the pending image 9C and the second image IM2 do not fade out from the display screen 7a. By gradually fading the pending image 9A and the first image IM1, the pending icon visibility difficulty effect shown in FIG. 98(D) is executed. That is, due to the pending icon fade-out effect, the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 become difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the pending image 9C and the second image IM2 are not difficult to view.

[Difficult to see hold icon B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon visibility difficulty effect B. The hold icon hard-to-see effect B differs from the hold icon hard-to-see effect A in FIG. 98 in the aspect of the first image IM1. 99(A), the display screen 7a displays four pending images 9A, the corresponding pending image 9C, a first image IM1, a second image IM2, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, is displayed. The first image IM1 is a rectangular frame image, and each of the four reserved images 9A is arranged within the frame. Also here, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the first image IM1. The sizes of the four pending images 9A are smaller than the corresponding pending image 9C. The second image IM2 is a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular image provided on both sides of the first image IM1, and is in contact with the reserved image 9C. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, and a portion of the pending image 9C and the second image IM2 are visible through the first movable accessory 14.

When the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed after being displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIG. moves to the position where the pending image 9C was located. Thereafter, the pending icon movement effect shown in FIG. 99(B) is executed. Specifically, the frame inside the first image IM1 moves to the left by a predetermined distance, and the reserved image 9A, which was second from the left, moves together with the frame to the leftmost position. Furthermore, the reserved image 9A that was third from the left moves to the second position from the left. Further, the rightmost reserved image 9A is also moved one place to the left. At the right end of the first image IM1, a frame image that does not include the reserved image 9A appears from the right end toward the left. In other words, the first image IM1 slides as the reserved image 9A shifts. Then, variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is started.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a pending icon fade-out effect shown in FIG. 99(C) is executed. Here, the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 fade out from the display screen 7a, making them difficult to see. Specifically, as the reserved image 9A and the first image IM1 move downward, it becomes increasingly difficult to visually recognize them. At this time, the pending image 9C and the second image IM2 do not fade out from the display screen 7a. By moving the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 downward, the pending icon visibility difficulty effect shown in FIG. 99(D) is executed. That is, due to the pending icon fade-out effect, the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 become difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the pending image 9C and the second image IM2 are not difficult to view.

[Difficult to see hold icon C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon visibility difficulty effect C. The hold icon difficult-to-see effect C differs from the hold icon difficult-to-see effect A in FIG. 98 in the aspect of the first image IM1. 100(A), on the display screen 7a, four pending images 9A, the corresponding pending image 9C, a first image IM1, a second image IM2, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, is displayed. The first image IM1 is an image representing a conveyor (belt conveyor), and four pending images 9A are arranged at approximately equal intervals on the conveyor. That is, here as well, the pending image 9A is displayed on the first image IM1. The sizes of the four pending images 9A are smaller than the corresponding pending image 9C. The second image IM2 is a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular image provided along the lower end of 7a, and the reserved image 9C and the first image IM1 are in contact with each other. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, and a portion of the reserved image 9C and the second image IM2 are visible through the first movable accessory 14.

When the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed after being displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIG. moves to the position where the pending image 9C was located. Thereafter, the pending icon movement effect shown in FIG. 100(B) is executed. Specifically, the conveyor for the first image IM1 is driven, and the second pending image 9A from the left moves to the leftmost position. Furthermore, the reserved image 9A that was third from the left moves to the second position from the left. Further, the rightmost reserved image 9A is also moved one place to the left. In other words, the first image IM1 performs a driving operation as the reserved image 9A is shifted. Then, variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is started.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a pending icon fade-out effect shown in FIG. 100(C) is executed. Here, the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 fade out from the display screen 7a, making them difficult to see. Specifically, a rectangular third image IM3 appears from the lower right of the display screen 7a and covers the reserved image 9A and first image IM1, making it gradually difficult to see. At this time, the pending image 9C and the second image IM2 are not covered by the third image IM3 and do not fade out from the display screen 7a. By covering the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 with the third image IM3, the pending icon visibility difficulty effect shown in FIG. 100(D) is executed. That is, due to the pending icon fade-out effect, the pending image 9A and the first image IM1 become difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the pending image 9C and the second image IM2 are not difficult to view.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of rendering the hold icon difficult to see is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, the first image IM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the first image 9A is displayed on the first image IM1. It is possible to execute the effect and the second effect in which the first image IM1 gradually becomes difficult to see. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, in the second effect, the first image IM1 gradually becomes thinner, making it difficult to see. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, in a state where the reserved image 9A is displayed on the first image IM1, the first image IM1 operates as the reserved image 9A moves. It is possible to perform the third performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, in the first effect, while the second image IM2 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the pending image 9C is the second image IM2. displayed so as to be in contact with at least a portion of it. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, in the second effect, the second image IM2 and the pending image 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the first image IM1 is gradually visible. Although the situation becomes difficult, the second image IM2 and the pending image 9C do not become difficult to see. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the above-described hold icon rendering difficult to visually recognize is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the pending image 9A and the pending image 9C have a circular shape. However, these retained images can have any shape.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pending image 9C is larger in size than the pending image 9A. However, the size of the pending image 9C may be the same as that of the pending image 9A, or may be smaller than these. Furthermore, the shapes and colors of the reserved images 9A may be different from each other.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 partially covers the pending image 9C. However, the reserved image 9C does not need to be covered by the first movable accessory 14. Similarly, the second image IM2 does not need to be covered by the first movable accessory 14.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
a first effect in which the hold icon is displayed on the first image while the first image is displayed on the display means;
A second effect in which the first image becomes gradually difficult to see;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
In the second effect, the first image gradually becomes thinner and becomes difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2,
capable of executing a third effect in which the first image moves as the hold icon moves while the hold icon is displayed on the first image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is the pending image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
In the first effect, with the second image displayed on the display means, the pending image is displayed so as to be in contact with at least a portion of the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-4,
In the second effect, the second image and the pending image are displayed on the display means, and while the first image gradually becomes difficult to see, the second image and the pending image are displayed on the display means. The retained image will not become difficult to view.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern variation display performance will be explained below using FIGS. 101 to 103. This decorative pattern variation display performance is performed during the variation display of the decorative symbol (during one variation display) that is synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also simply referred to as "special symbol"). , the gaming state is normal, high probability state, time saving state, during electric chew support (a state where the electric chew 22 is opened frequently and it is easier to win at the second starting opening 21, hereinafter also referred to as "electric support"). etc. can be executed.

[Decorative pattern variation display effect A]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern variation display effect A.
In the decorative pattern variation display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 101(A), a decorative pattern variation start effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative pattern variation start production, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is in the left pattern display area, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in the middle pattern display area, and the right decorative pattern is in the right pattern display area. 8R is displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in parallel at the same height, as shown in FIG. 101(A), and are scrolled downward as shown by arrows YL and YR. . The middle decorative pattern 8C is located above the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and rotates and scrolls counterclockwise as shown by the arrow YC. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation start performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown in a stopped state in the losing symbol arrangement ("589"). Moreover, the order of stopping of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L stops first, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), a decorative symbol reach effect is executed. In this decorative pattern ready-to-win performance, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuated, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R stop at the jackpot pattern arrangement, and the middle decorative pattern 8C shows a fluctuating ready-to-win state. In addition, in this example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R stop at "9", and the middle decorative pattern 8C shows that it is changing with the arrow YC.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), a medium decorative pattern display position change effect is executed. This medium decorative symbol display position change effect shows how the display position of the medium decorative symbol 8C changes downward from the ready-to-reach symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 101(B) when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change. There is. More specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R show a ready-to-reach pattern arrangement at the display positions shown in FIG. 101(B). On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in a position that is straight downward from the display position shown in FIG. 101(B) as shown by the arrow YD, and is lower than the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R The display position changes depending on the position. Then, the medium decorative pattern 8C changes in a manner such that it rotates and scrolls counterclockwise in its lowered position.

In other words, in the decorative pattern fluctuation display performance A shown in FIG. When variable display is performed on the upper side and a reach is formed between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the display position of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes and it is displayed below the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. to display the fluctuation.
That is, in the decorative pattern fluctuation display performance A, the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R as the first decorative pattern fluctuate in the vertical direction as the first direction, and the middle decorative pattern 8C as the second decorative pattern changes in the vertical direction as the first direction. When the first decorative pattern becomes a reach as a predetermined pattern arrangement, the display position of the second decorative pattern is changed.

[Decorative pattern variation display effect B]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern variation display effect B.
In the decorative symbol fluctuation display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 102(A), a decorative symbol fluctuation start/suspension extinguishment effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation start/suspension extinguishment performance, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right symbol display area is The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in parallel at the same height position, as shown in FIG. 102(A), and are scrolled downward as shown by arrows YL and YR. . The middle decorative pattern 8C is located above the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and rotates and scrolls counterclockwise as shown by the arrow YC. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation start/suspension extinguishment performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown in a stopped state in the losing symbol arrangement ("589"). Moreover, the order of stopping of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L stops first, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops.
In addition, in the decorative symbol variation start/suspension performance, a suspension performance image HG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a. The hold effect image HG is displayed in an arc shape, and a hold icon indicating the number of hold of the special symbol is displayed within the display area. Note that in FIG. 102(A), a first hold H1 and a second hold H2 are displayed as hold icons. Moreover, the hold icon HT is displayed on the left side of the hold effect image HG. The pending effect image HG rotates counterclockwise as shown by the arrow YH1 when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing. Therefore, the hold icon within the display area of the hold effect image HG also rotates counterclockwise. When the hold effect image HG rotates, the first hold H1 moves to the position of the hold icon HT, as shown by the arrow YH2, and at the same time, the hold icons within the display area of the hold effect image HG are shifted one by one. (For example, the second reservation H2 is moved to the display position of the first reservation H1, and the other third and fourth reservations are similarly moved). In addition, FIG. 102(A) shows the state when the variation of the decorative pattern is started in a state where there are three pending items.
In other words, in the decorative pattern variation start/suspension performance, when the decorative pattern is opened, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move vertically as shown by arrows YL and YR, and the middle decorative pattern 8C moves vertically as shown by arrows YL and YR. As shown by arrow YC, the hold icon moves counterclockwise along the arc, and the hold icon moves counterclockwise along the arc, as shown by arrow YH1. In other words, the medium decorative pattern 8C and the hold icon move in opposite directions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), a decorative symbol reach effect is executed. In this decorative pattern ready-to-win performance, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuated, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R stop at the jackpot pattern arrangement, and the middle decorative pattern 8C shows a fluctuating ready-to-win state. In addition, in this example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R stop at "9", and the middle decorative pattern 8C shows that it is changing with the arrow YC. In addition, in this decorative symbol ready-to-win performance, the number of reserved special symbols indicates that the third reserved H3 and the fourth reserved H4 have increased (increased by two) from the number shown in FIG. 102(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), a medium decoration symbol display position change effect is executed. This medium decorative symbol display position change effect shows how the display position of the medium decorative symbol 8C changes downward from the ready-to-reach symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 102(B) when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change. There is. More specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R show a ready-to-reach pattern arrangement at the display position shown in FIG. 102(B). On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C is at a position lowered from the display position shown in FIG. 102(B) in a direction approaching the hold icon (hold effect image HG) straight downward, as shown by the arrow YD, and The display position changes to a position lower than the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. Then, the medium decorative pattern 8C changes in a manner such that it rotates and scrolls counterclockwise in its lowered position.

In other words, in the decorative pattern fluctuation display performance B shown in FIG. The pending icon moves counterclockwise in the direction along the circular arc, which is opposite to the medium decorative pattern 8C. In addition, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate before reaching reach, the middle decorative pattern 8C performs a variable display above the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern When a reach is formed with the pattern 8R, the display position of the medium decorative pattern 8C changes and it moves downward toward the hold icon (hold effect image HG) side, and is lower than the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. Fluctuations are displayed at the bottom.
That is, in the decorative pattern fluctuation display performance B, the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R as the first decorative pattern fluctuate in the vertical direction as the first direction, and the middle decorative pattern 8C as the second decorative pattern fluctuates in the vertical direction as the first direction. The hold icon moves in the left-right direction as the second direction, and the hold icon moves in the left-right direction as the third direction, which is the opposite direction to the second direction, and the first decorative pattern is in the reach as a predetermined pattern arrangement. When this happens, the second decorative pattern is configured such that the display position of the variable display changes in a direction closer to the hold icon side.

[Decorative design variation display production C]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern variation display effect C.
In the decorative symbol variation display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 103(A), a decorative symbol variation start/suspension extinguishment effect is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation start/suspension extinguishment performance, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right symbol display area is The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed. As shown in Figure (A), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in parallel at the same height position, and scroll downward as shown by arrows YL and YR. The middle decorative pattern 8C is located above the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and rotates and scrolls counterclockwise as shown by the arrow YC. In addition, in this decorative symbol variation start/suspension extinguishment performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown in a stopped state in the losing symbol arrangement ("589"). Moreover, the order of stopping of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative pattern 8L stops first, then the right decorative pattern 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative pattern 8C stops.
In addition, in the decorative symbol variation start/suspension performance, a suspension performance image HG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a. The hold effect image HG is displayed in an arc shape, and a hold icon indicating the number of hold of the special symbol is displayed within the display area. Note that in FIG. 103(A), a first hold H1 and a second hold H2 are displayed as hold icons. Moreover, the hold icon HT is displayed on the left side of the hold effect image HG. The pending effect image HG rotates counterclockwise as shown by the arrow YH1 when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing. Therefore, the hold icon within the display area of the hold effect image HG also rotates counterclockwise. When the hold effect image HG rotates, the first hold H1 moves to the position of the hold icon HT, as shown by the arrow YH2, and at the same time, the hold icons within the display area of the hold effect image HG are shifted one by one. (For example, the second reservation H2 is moved to the display position of the first reservation H1, and the other third and fourth reservations are similarly moved). In addition, FIG. 103(A) shows the state when the variation of the decorative pattern is started in a state where there are three pending items.
In other words, in the decorative pattern variation start/suspension performance, when the decorative pattern is opened, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move vertically as shown by arrows YL and YR, and the middle decorative pattern 8C moves vertically as shown by arrows YL and YR. As shown by arrow YC, the hold icon moves counterclockwise along the arc, and the hold icon moves counterclockwise along the arc, as shown by arrow YH1. In other words, the medium decorative pattern 8C and the hold icon move in opposite directions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), a decorative symbol reach effect is executed. In this decorative pattern ready-to-win performance, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuated, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R stop at the jackpot pattern arrangement, and the middle decorative pattern 8C shows a fluctuating ready-to-win state. In addition, in this example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R stop at "9", and the middle decorative pattern 8C shows that it is changing with the arrow YC. In addition, in this decorative symbol ready-to-win performance, the number of reserved special symbols shows that the third reserved H3 and the fourth reserved H4 have increased (increased by two) from the number shown in FIG. 103(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), a medium decorative pattern display position change effect is executed. This medium decorative symbol display position change effect shows how the display position of the medium decorative symbol 8C changes downward from the ready-to-reach symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 103(B) when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change. There is. More specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R show a ready-to-reach pattern arrangement at the display position shown in FIG. 103(B). On the other hand, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed at a position lowered from the display position shown in FIG. changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), a medium decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this medium decorative pattern variation performance, the changing display mode of the medium decorative pattern 8C is shown after the medium decorative pattern display position change performance shown in FIG. 103(C) is executed. In this lowered position, the medium decorative pattern 8C rotates and scrolls counterclockwise. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves in front of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, as shown in FIG. 103(D). Therefore, due to this variation of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R partially overlap with the middle decorative pattern 8C and become invisible. Further, when the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches approximately the middle of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C is located at almost the same height as the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R. In addition, in the medium decorative pattern variation performance, in the medium decorative pattern 8C, "8" is located between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, "9" overlaps with the left decorative pattern 8L, and "7" is located between the right decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8L. It shows how it overlaps with the decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), a jackpot notification effect is executed. This jackpot notification performance shows a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are completely stopped at the jackpot symbol arrangement "999" as a result of executing the medium decorative symbol variation performance shown in FIG. 103(D). Further, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Jackpot!" are displayed. This notifies you that the jackpot has been confirmed.
Here, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the jackpot pattern arrangement, the middle decorative pattern 8C is located at almost the same height as the left and right decorative patterns 8L, 8R, and is horizontally aligned, as shown by the horizontal line HL. Stop in parallel. In other words, if the middle decorative pattern 8C is a losing pattern in the winning combination without going through the reach, it will stop above the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R, as shown in FIG. In the case of a losing pattern arrangement or a jackpot pattern arrangement, as shown in FIG. 103(E), the symbols stop aligned in a straight line with the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R.

In other words, in the decorative pattern variation display performance C shown in FIG. It descends in a direction approaching the production image HG) side, and at this lowered position, it moves passing in front of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, and is paralleled horizontally between the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R. Stop.
That is, in the decorative pattern variation display performance C, when the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R as the first decorative pattern reach the reach as a predetermined pattern arrangement, the middle decorative pattern 8C as the second decorative pattern is It passes in front of the first decorative pattern and stops in line with the first decorative pattern.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern variation display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 103, the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R as the first decorative pattern fluctuate in the vertical direction as the first direction, and the second decorative pattern The medium decorative pattern 8C moves in the horizontal direction, which is the second direction, and when the first decorative pattern reaches the reach as a predetermined pattern arrangement, the second decorative pattern moves to the display position of the variable display. The structure is such that it changes. According to this configuration, when the reach is reached, the display position of the second decorative symbol changes, so the player can play the game with high expectations when the reach is reached. I can do it. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R as the first decorative symbols fluctuate in the vertical direction as the first direction. However, the medium decorative pattern 8C as the second decorative pattern moves in the left-right direction along the arc as the second direction, and the hold icon moves in the third direction opposite to the second direction. It is configured to move left and right along an arc. According to this configuration, when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the hold icon move in different directions and in different manners, so that the player can easily understand when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate. You can enjoy the effects of various movements over time. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R as the first decorative pattern fluctuate in the vertical direction as the first direction, and the second decorative pattern The medium decorative pattern 8C moves in the left-right direction along the arc as the second direction, and the hold icon moves in the left-right direction along the arc as the third direction, which is the opposite direction to the second direction. When the first decorative pattern moves and reaches a reach as a predetermined pattern arrangement, the second decorative pattern is configured such that the display position of the variable display changes in a direction closer to the reservation icon side. According to this configuration, when the reach is reached, the display position of the variable display of the second decorative pattern changes in a direction approaching the pending icon side, and the second decorative pattern and the pending icon are close to each other. Since the movement is made along the arc in the opposite direction, the player can greatly enjoy the effect produced by the movement of the second decorative symbol and the hold icon at the time of reach. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, when the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R as the first decorative symbol reach the reach as a predetermined symbol arrangement, they are used as the second decorative symbol. The middle decorative pattern 8C is configured to pass in front of the first decorative pattern and stop in line with the first decorative pattern in a straight line. According to this configuration, when the reach is reached, the second decorative symbol, which is the final stop symbol, is shown in close-up, so the player concentrates on the fluctuating display of the second decorative symbol to see if he or she will hit the jackpot. You can have joys and sorrows all at once. Furthermore, when the second decorative pattern is stopped, it stops in line with the first decorative pattern, so the determined pattern arrangement is extremely easy to see, and the player can easily confirm the determined pattern pattern. be able to. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the decorative pattern variation display performance will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 103, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are made to move vertically, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is made to change horizontally. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may vary in the horizontal direction, and the middle decorative pattern 8C may vary in the vertical direction. In short, it is sufficient that the fluctuation directions of the symbols other than the final stop symbol and the final stop symbol are different directions.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 103, when the reach is reached, the display position of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes while the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it becomes a reach, the display position of the middle decorative pattern 8C may not change, and the display position may be changed while the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, when the reach is reached, the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped, and the display position of the middle decorative pattern 8C is Although the display position is changed to a position lowered in a direction approaching the hold icon (hold effect image HG) straight down, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the game reaches a reach, the medium decorative pattern 8C may swing downward as it approaches the hold icon side. Alternatively, the display position may be raised so that the medium decorative pattern 8C approaches the pending icon side and the pending icon also approaches the medium decorative pattern 8C side.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, when it becomes a reach, the middle decorative pattern 8C passes through the front side of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and moves between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. Although a part of the right decorative pattern 8R overlaps with the middle decorative pattern 8C and becomes invisible, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when reaching reach, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves in front of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R so that the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are completely invisible. Good too. In this case, only the medium decorative pattern 8C may be displayed in an enlarged manner.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, when the display position of the medium decorative pattern 8C descends to the hold icon (hold effect image HG) side when the medium decorative pattern 8C and the hold icon ( Although a predetermined interval is formed between the hold effect image HG), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it becomes a reach and the display position of the medium decorative pattern 8C is lowered, the medium decorative pattern 8C and the hold icon (hold effect image HG) may contact or partially overlap.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a decorative pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns,
The decorative pattern display means includes:
At least a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern can be displayed variably,
the first decorative pattern varies in a first direction;
the second decorative pattern varies in a second direction and stops after the first decorative pattern;
When the first decorative pattern becomes a predetermined pattern arrangement, the display position of the variable display of the second decorative pattern changes;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C3-2]
Equipped with a display means capable of displaying a pending icon,
The display means moves the hold icon in a third direction that is opposite to the second direction when the decorative pattern starts changing.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1, characterized in that:
[Aspect C3-3]
When the first decorative pattern is in the predetermined pattern arrangement, the display position of the second decorative pattern changes in a direction closer to the reservation icon.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-2, characterized in that:
[Aspect C3-4]
The first decorative pattern is a left and right decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern is a middle decorative pattern,
The first direction is an up-down direction, and the second direction and the third direction are directions along an arc.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-2 or aspect C3-3.
[Aspect C3-5]
When the first decorative pattern is in the predetermined pattern arrangement, the second decorative pattern passes in front of the first decorative pattern and is lined up in a straight line with the first decorative pattern. Stop,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4.

The hold response effect will be explained below using FIGS. 104 to 106. This suspension corresponding performance may be executed, for example, at the start of the variable display of special symbols.

[Holding performance A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the hold response effect A.
First, in the hold corresponding effect A, as shown in FIG. 104(A), a hold display effect is executed. In this hold display effect, a hold display area C41 and a character CRA are displayed. The hold display area C41 is a display area for displaying hold icons, and displays a first hold icon 9A and a second hold icon 9C. The hold display area C41 is divided into five sections so that four first hold icons 9A and one second hold icon 9C can be stored therein. In addition, in the hold display performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed. In addition, in this hold display effect, the color of the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C is white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a corresponding area display effect is executed. In this corresponding area display effect, a hold corresponding area C42 corresponding to the hold display area C41 is displayed. The hold corresponding area C42 is provided adjacent to the hold display area C41, and more specifically, is provided connected to the upper part of the hold display area C41. The hold corresponding area C42 includes four areas respectively corresponding to the four sections storing the first hold icon 9A in the hold display area C41. Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), a corresponding area selection effect is executed. In this corresponding area selection performance, a plurality of performance options are variably displayed in any of the four areas of the pending corresponding area C42. These options include displays that suggest pending changes, displays that suggest reach effects that will develop in the future, displays that suggest increased chances such as "super hot" and "chance," displays that suggest a jackpot, etc. . Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), a pending change suggestion effect is executed. In this suspension change suggestion performance, the options that have been fluctuating in the corresponding area selection performance in the suspension corresponding area C42 are stopped, and a display suggesting a suspension change is performed. In the example of FIG. 104(D), the display suggesting a pending change is expressed as "permanent change." Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), a pending change effect is executed. In this hold change production, a display that changes the hold icon is performed for the first hold icon 9A in the section of the hold display area C41 that corresponds to the area in which the display suggesting the hold change has been displayed in the hold corresponding area C42. . In this case, the color of the first hold icon 9A is changed to red or the like. There are multiple types of colors in which the pending icon changes, such as blue, yellow, and green, and each may have a different jackpot expectation.
Note that FIGS. 104(C) to 104(E) are performances with at least the same variation.

[Holding compatible performance B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the hold response effect B.
First, in the hold corresponding effect B, as shown in FIG. 105(A), a hold display effect is executed. In this hold display effect, a hold display area C41 and a character CRA are displayed. The hold display area C41 is a display area for displaying hold icons, and displays a first hold icon 9A and a second hold icon 9C. The hold display area C41 is divided into five areas so that four first hold icons 9A and one second hold icon 9C can be stored therein. In addition, in the hold display performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed. In addition, in this hold display effect, the color of the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C is white. Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), a corresponding area display effect is executed. In this corresponding area display effect, a hold corresponding area C42 corresponding to the hold display area C41 is displayed. The hold corresponding area C42 is provided adjacent to the hold display area C41, and more specifically, is provided connected to the upper part of the hold display area C41. The hold corresponding area C42 includes four areas respectively corresponding to the four sections storing the first hold icon 9A in the hold display area C41. Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), a corresponding area selection effect is executed. In this corresponding area selection performance, a plurality of performance options are variably displayed in any of the four areas of the pending corresponding area C42. These options include displays that suggest pending changes, displays that suggest reach effects that will develop in the future, displays that suggest increased chances such as "super hot" and "chance," displays that suggest a jackpot, etc. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), a reach suggestion effect is executed. In this reach-suggesting performance, the options that have been fluctuating in the corresponding area selection performance are stopped in the pending corresponding area C42, and a display suggesting a future likely-to-reach performance is performed. In the example of FIG. 105(D), the display suggesting the reach effect is expressed as "Super Reach A", that is, the reach effect to be developed in the future is the super reach effect, and the super reach effect in the super reach effect is expressed as "Super Reach A". It is shown that reach is A. Next, as shown in FIG. 105(E), a super reach effect is executed. In this super reach performance, a battle between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB is performed. This super reach effect is performed with a variation different from the variation in which the reach suggestion effect in FIG. The first hold icon 9A in the section of the hold display area C41 that corresponds to the area where the hold has been performed is changed to be held.

[Holding performance C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the hold response effect C.
First, in the hold corresponding effect C, as shown in FIG. 106(A), a hold display effect is executed. In this hold display effect, a hold display area C41 and a character CRA are displayed. The hold display area C41 is a display area for displaying hold icons, and displays a first hold icon 9A and a second hold icon 9C. The hold display area C41 is divided into five areas so that four first hold icons 9A and one second hold icon 9C can be stored therein. In addition, in the hold display performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed. In addition, in this hold display effect, the color of the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C is white. Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), a corresponding area display effect is executed. In this corresponding area display effect, a hold corresponding area C42 corresponding to the hold display area C41 is displayed. The hold corresponding area C42 is provided adjacent to the hold display area C41, and more specifically, is provided connected to the upper part of the hold display area C41. The hold corresponding area C42 includes one area corresponding to the four sections that store the first hold icons 9A in the hold display area C41. Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), a corresponding area selection effect is executed. In this corresponding area selection effect, a plurality of options are variably displayed in the pending corresponding area C42. These options include displays that suggest pending changes, displays that suggest reach effects that will develop in the future, displays that suggest increased chances such as "super hot" and "chance," displays that suggest a jackpot, etc. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), a reach suggestion effect is executed. In this reach-suggesting performance, the options that have been fluctuating in the corresponding area selection performance are stopped in the pending corresponding area C42, and a display suggesting a future likely-to-reach performance is performed. In the example of FIG. 106(D), the display suggesting the reach effect is expressed as "Super Reach A", that is, the reach effect to be developed in the future is the super reach effect, and the super reach effect in the super reach effect is expressed as "Super Reach A". It is shown that reach is A. Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), a super reach effect is executed. In this super reach performance, a battle between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB is performed. This super reach effect is performed with a variation different from the variation in which the reach suggestion effect of FIG. 106(D) is performed or the variation in which the reach suggestion effect is performed in FIG. 106(D).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold response effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold-compatible performance, a plurality of performance options are variably displayed in the hold-compatible area C42 corresponding to the hold display area C41, one of the options is selected, and the selected performance is selected. I am trying to execute it. According to this configuration, since one of the plurality of performances is performed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold-compatible performance, a plurality of performance options are displayed in a variable manner in the hold-compatible area C42 corresponding to the hold display area C41, and a display suggesting a hold change is selected from among the options. , to execute the selected performance. According to this configuration, since a display suggesting a change in reservation is performed in the reservation display area C41, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold-compatible performance, a plurality of performance options are displayed in a variable manner in the hold-compatible area C42 corresponding to the hold display area C41, and a display suggesting a reach effect is selected from among the options. , to execute the selected performance. According to this configuration, since a display suggesting a reach effect is performed in the hold display area C41, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, in the hold-compatible performance, the hold-compatible area C42 is divided into a plurality of areas so as to correspond to the hold display area C41. According to this configuration, a suggestion of a predetermined effect can be displayed in the hold corresponding area C42 in correspondence with the hold icon in the hold display area C41, so that the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold-compatible performance, the hold-compatible area C42 is arranged adjacent to the hold display area C41. According to this configuration, a suggestion of a predetermined performance can be displayed in the reservation corresponding area C42 in correspondence with the reservation icon in the reservation display area C41, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the suspension-compatible performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold changing performance of the hold compatible performance A, the target of the first hold icon 9A to be changed on hold corresponds to the area where the display suggesting the hold change is displayed in the hold compatible area C42. Although the first hold icon 9A is located in a section of the hold display area C41, the present invention is not limited to this, and the target of the first hold icon 9A to be changed to hold is indicated by a hold change in the hold corresponding area C42. The first hold icon 9A or the second hold icon 9C may be used in a section other than the hold display area C41 corresponding to the area where the display is performed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the super reach performance of the hold compatible performance B, the target to perform the reach performance suggested by the reach suggestion performance is moved to the area where the display suggesting the reach performance is performed in the hold compatible area C42. Although the first hold icon 9A is located in the section of the corresponding hold display area C41, the present invention is not limited to this. The first hold icon 9A or the second hold icon 9C may be used in a section other than the hold display area C41 corresponding to the area where the display suggesting the performance is performed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the hold-compatible performances A to C, a hold-compatible area C42 corresponding to the second hold icon 9C may be provided.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold compatible effects A and B, the hold compatible area C42 is divided into four areas corresponding to the four areas storing the first hold icon 9A in the hold display area C41. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be divided into two or three areas.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays the first mode in a hold corresponding area corresponding to a hold display area that displays a hold,
The second display performance is a performance that displays a second mode in the hold corresponding area corresponding to the hold display area,
The third display performance is a performance that selects one aspect from a plurality of aspects including the first aspect and the second aspect, and displays the selected aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The display of the first aspect of the first display effect includes a hold change suggestion display that suggests that the hold is changing;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
The display of the second aspect of the second display effect includes a reach suggestion display that suggests the type of reach effect to be performed with the variation;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The hold display area is divided into a plurality of areas including a first hold display area and a second hold display area,
The hold corresponding area includes a plurality of corresponding areas respectively corresponding to the plurality of areas divided in the hold display area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The hold corresponding area is arranged adjacent to the hold display area,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The hold response effect will be explained below using FIGS. 107 to 109. This hold jumping effect may be executed, for example, at the start of the variable display of special symbols.

[Jumping over hold performance A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the hold jumping effect A.
First, in the hold jumping effect A, as shown in FIG. 107(A), a hold display effect is executed. In this hold display effect, a hold display area C51 and a character CRA are displayed. The hold display area C51 is a display area for displaying hold icons, and displays a first hold icon 9A and a second hold icon 9C. The hold display area C51 is divided into five areas so that four first hold icons 9A and one second hold icon 9C can be stored therein. In addition, in the hold display performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed. In addition, in this hold display effect, the color of the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C is white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), a pending change suggestion effect is executed. In this hold change suggestion performance, the ally character CRA throws a pseudo hold icon C52 having the same shape as the hold icon and moves it so as to straddle the hold icon displayed in the hold display area C51. Note that the pseudo-hold icon C52 is red. Next, FIG. 107(C)
As shown in , the pending change suggestion image superimposition effect is executed. In this hold change suggestion image superimposition performance, the pseudo hold icon C52 thrown by the ally character CRA in the hold change suggestion effect moves to the second hold icon 9C, and the pseudo hold icon C52 and the second hold icon 9C are superimposed. It is a performance that Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), a pending change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, in the hold display area C51, a display is performed in which the pseudo hold icon C52 moves and the superimposed second hold icon 9C changes. In this case, the color of the second hold icon 9C is changed to red, which is the same as the pseudo hold icon C52. There are multiple types of colors in which the pending icon changes, such as blue, yellow, and green, and each may have a different level of jackpot expectation.
Note that FIGS. 107(A) to 107(D) are performances with the same variation.

[Jumping over hold performance B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining hold jumping effect B.
First, in hold jumping effect B, as shown in FIG. 108(A), a hold display effect is executed. In this hold display effect, a hold display area C51 and a character CRA are displayed. The hold display area C51 is a display area for displaying hold icons, and displays a first hold icon 9A and a second hold icon 9C. The hold display area C51 is divided into five sections so that four first hold icons 9A and one second hold icon 9C can be stored therein. In addition, in the hold display performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed. In addition, in this hold display effect, the color of the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C is white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(B), a pending change suggestion effect is executed. In this hold change suggestion performance, the ally character CRA throws a pseudo hold icon C52 having the same shape as the hold icon and moves it so as to straddle the hold icon displayed in the hold display area C51. Note that the pseudo-hold icon C52 is red. Next, as shown in FIG. 108(C), the pending change suggestion image disappearing effect is executed. In this suspension change suggestion image disappearance performance, the pseudo suspension icon C52 thrown by the ally character CRA in the suspension change suggestion performance passes the second suspension icon 9C, and the pseudo suspension icon C52 disappears from the screen. Note that the pseudo hold icon C52 may disappear from the screen without passing over the second hold icon 9C. For example, the pseudo hold icon C52 may pass between the second hold icon 9C and the first hold icon 9A and disappear from the screen. Next, as shown in FIG. 108(D), a pending non-change effect is executed. In this hold non-change effect, the pseudo hold icon C52 does not act in the hold display area C51, and neither the second hold icon 9C nor the first hold icon 9A changes to hold.
Note that FIGS. 108(A) to 108(D) are performances with the same variation.

[Jumping over hold performance C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the hold jumping effect C.
First, in hold jumping effect B, as shown in FIG. 109(A), a hold display effect is executed. In this hold display effect, a hold display area C51 and a character CRA are displayed. The hold display area C51 is a display area for displaying hold icons, and displays a first hold icon 9A and a second hold icon 9C. The hold display area C51 is divided into five areas so that four first hold icons 9A and one second hold icon 9C can be stored therein. In addition, in the hold display performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed. In addition, in this hold display effect, the color of the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C is white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(B), a pending change suggestion effect is executed. In this hold change suggestion performance, the ally character CRA throws a pseudo hold icon C52 having the same shape as the hold icon and moves it so as to straddle the hold icon displayed in the hold display area C51. Note that the pseudo-hold icon C52 is red. Next, FIG. 109(C)
As shown in , the pending change suggestion image disappearing effect is executed. In this suspension change suggestion image disappearance performance, the pseudo suspension icon C52 thrown by the ally character CRA in the suspension change suggestion performance passes the second suspension icon 9C, and the pseudo suspension icon C52 disappears from the screen. Note that the pseudo hold icon C52 may disappear from the screen without passing over the second hold icon 9C. For example, the pseudo hold icon C52 may pass between the second hold icon 9C and the first hold icon 9A and disappear from the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(D), a pending non-change effect is executed. In this hold non-change effect, the pseudo hold icon C52 does not act in the hold display area C51, and neither the second hold icon 9C nor the first hold icon 9A changes to hold. Next, as shown in FIG. 109(E), a pending change suggestion effect is executed. In this hold change suggestion performance, the ally character CRA throws the pseudo hold icon C52 again and moves it so as to straddle the hold icon displayed in the hold display area C51. Next, as shown in FIG. 109(F), a pending change suggestion image superimposition effect is executed. In this hold change suggestion image superimposition performance, the pseudo hold icon C52 thrown by the ally character CRA in the hold change suggestion effect moves to the second hold icon 9C, and the pseudo hold icon C52 and the second hold icon 9C are superimposed. It is a performance that Next, as shown in FIG. 109(G), a pending change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, in the hold display area C51, a display is performed in which the pseudo hold icon C52 moves and the superimposed second hold icon 9C changes. In this case, the color of the second hold icon 9C is changed to red, which is the same as the pseudo hold icon C52. There are multiple types of colors in which the pending icon changes, such as blue, yellow, and green, and each may have a different jackpot expectation.
Note that FIGS. 109(A) to 109(G) are performances with the same variation.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold jumping effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold jumping performance, when the hold display area C51 is being displayed, the hold change suggestion effect is performed, and then the hold change effect is performed. According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by the reservation change suggestion performance and the reservation change performance.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the hold jumping performance, after the hold change suggestion performance, the hold change suggestion image superimposition performance is performed, and then the hold change performance is performed. According to this configuration, since the hold change performance is performed after the hold change suggestion image superimposed performance, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, in the hold jumping performance, after the hold change suggestion performance, the hold change suggestion image disappearing performance is performed, and then the hold change performance is performed. According to this configuration, after the player is once discouraged by the retention change suggestion image disappearing performance, the retention change performance is performed thereafter, so that the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold jumping performance, after the hold change suggestion performance, the hold change suggestion image disappearing performance is performed, and after that, the hold change suggestion performance is performed again, and then the hold change performance is performed. It has become. According to this configuration, after the player is once discouraged by the retention change suggestion image disappearing performance, the retention change performance is performed through the retention change suggestion performance after that, so that the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold jumping effect, the pseudo hold icon C52 has the same shape as the hold icon. According to this configuration, the player can expect a change in holding by looking at the pseudo-holding icon C52, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the hold jumping effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold jumping effects A and C, the pseudo hold icon C52 is superimposed on the second hold icon 9C, and the second hold icon 9C changes to hold. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the pseudo hold icon C52 may be superimposed on the first hold icon 9A, and the first hold icon 9A may change to hold.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold jumping effects A to C, the pseudo hold icon C52 has the same shape as the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the pseudo-hold icon C52 may have a different shape. In this case as well, the color of the pseudo hold icon C52 is set to the color in which the hold change is desired.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons,
The hold icon includes an icon representing a hold and an icon representing the hold,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays a hold display area that displays the hold icon,
The second display effect is an effect that moves a hold change suggestion image that suggests a change in hold so as to straddle the hold icon displayed in the hold display area,
The third display performance is a performance that changes the hold,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and after the second display effect, the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect that superimposes the hold change suggestion image on a specific hold icon displayed in the hold display area,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the fourth display performance,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display performance is a performance that temporarily causes the hold change suggestion image to disappear outside the hold display area,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the fifth display performance,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect 3,
In the combination effect, after the second display effect, the fifth display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed again, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The suspension change suggestion image has a similar shape to the suspension icon,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern display performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 110 to 112. This decorative pattern display performance can be executed during the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern or before the stop display. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern display performance, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen. This is a display effect to be displayed on 7a.

[Decorative pattern display effect A]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern display performance A. In the decorative pattern display effect A, first, the decorative pattern rotation effect shown in FIG. 110(A) is executed. Specifically, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the right decorative pattern 8R is larger than the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is larger than the left decorative pattern 8L. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each horizontally rotated with the vertical direction of the display screen 7a as a rotation axis. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode.

Next, the decorative pattern right superimposition effect shown in FIG. 110(B) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping a portion of the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed overlapping a portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than the left decorative pattern 8L. A part of the right decorative pattern 8R is covered with the first movable accessory 14 and is visible through the first movable accessory 14. The main surfaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R each face leftward. The main surface is the main surface on which numbers are expressed in the three-dimensional decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and is formed on both sides of the end surface shown in FIG. 110(A). Here, the direction in which the number "7" is facing is all to the left.

Next, the decorative pattern left superimposition effect shown in FIG. 110(C) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping a portion of the right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed overlapping a portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Further, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than the right decorative pattern 8R. A part of the left decorative pattern 8L is covered with the first movable accessory 14 and is visible through the first movable accessory 14. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R have their main surfaces facing right. In other words, the direction in which the number "7" is facing is all to the right.

Next, the medium decorative pattern small display effect shown in FIG. 110(D) is executed. Specifically, a medium decorative pattern 8C smaller than both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed without overlapping both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. Further, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with their main surfaces facing different directions. Here, it means that the direction in which the number "7" is facing is different. Parts of each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are covered by the first movable accessory 14 and are visible through the first movable accessory 14.

Next, the decorative pattern center superimposition effect shown in FIG. 110(E) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping a portion of each of the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed so that a portion of each of them protrudes from the display screen 7a. Next, the shape rendering of decorative patterns and the like shown in FIG. 110(F) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R have the same size and are displayed at regular intervals.

[Decorative pattern display performance B]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern display performance B. Decorative pattern display effect B differs from decorative pattern display effect A in FIG. 110 in the aspects of left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. In the decorative symbol rotation performance of FIG. 111(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, similar to the decorative symbol display performance A of FIG. 110. On the other hand, unlike the decorative pattern display performance A in FIG. 110, in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are equal.

Next, the decorative pattern right superimposition effect shown in FIG. 111(B) is executed. Specifically, similar to the decorative pattern display effect A in FIG. 110, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping a part of the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R is overlapped with a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. On the other hand, unlike the decorative pattern display performance A of FIG. 110, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are equal. Next, the decorative pattern left superimposition effect shown in FIG. 111(C) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping a portion of the right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed overlapping a portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are equal.

Next, the medium decorative pattern small display effect shown in FIG. 111(D) is executed. Specifically, a medium decorative pattern 8C smaller than both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed without overlapping both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. Unlike the decorative pattern display effect A in FIG. 110, the main surfaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R face the same direction.

Next, the decorative pattern center superimposition effect shown in FIG. 111(E) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping a portion of each of the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L. Unlike the decorative pattern display effect A in FIG. 110, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R do not protrude from the display screen 7a. Next, the shape rendering of decorative patterns and the like shown in FIG. 111(F) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R have the same size and are displayed at regular intervals.

[Decorative pattern display production C]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern display effect C. The decorative pattern display effect C is different from the decorative pattern display effect A in FIG. 110 in the aspects of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 112(A), a decorative pattern reversal effect is executed. Specifically, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are equal. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each display a horizontally inverted number. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode.

Next, the decorative pattern right superimposition effect shown in FIG. 112(B) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping a portion of the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed overlapping a portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are equal. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each have their main surfaces facing forward. Next, the decorative pattern left superimposition effect shown in FIG. 112(C) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping a portion of the right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed overlapping a portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are equal. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each have their main surfaces facing forward.

Next, the medium decorative pattern small display effect shown in FIG. 112(D) is executed. Specifically, a medium decorative pattern 8C smaller than both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed without overlapping both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. The main surfaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R each face the front.

Next, the decorative pattern center superimposition effect shown in FIG. 112(E) is executed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping a portion of each of the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not protrude from the display screen 7a. Next, the shape rendering of decorative patterns and the like shown in FIG. 112(F) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R have the same size and are displayed at regular intervals.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern A first effect in which the middle decorative pattern 8C overlaps a part of 8R and a left decorative pattern 8L overlaps a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and after the first effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. It is possible to perform a second effect in which a medium decorative pattern 8C smaller than both of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R is displayed without overlapping with each other. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, after the second performance, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping a portion of each of the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L. The third effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, in the first performance, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than the right decorative pattern 8R. is also displayed larger. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, in the second performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with their main surfaces facing different directions. be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, in the third effect, a portion of each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes from the display screen 7a. will be displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modification of the above-described decorative pattern display performance will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all set to "7". However, the decorative pattern display effect can be performed even when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are numbers other than "7". Further, the decorative pattern display effect may be executed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are different numbers.

[Modification 2]
The decorative pattern reversal effect of FIG. 112(A) only needs to be such that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are left and right reversed even momentarily. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are rotated vertically and horizontally, respectively, and may temporarily be in a horizontally reversed state, or the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern The pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be rotated vertically or horizontally as a whole, and temporarily be in a horizontally reversed state.

[Modification 3]
The decorative pattern display effects shown in FIGS. 110 to 112 include effects such as a decorative pattern overlapping effect on the right side, a decorative pattern overlapping effect on the left side, a medium decorative pattern small display effect, a decorative pattern center overlapping effect, and a shape effect such as a decorative pattern etc. . However, it is not necessary to include some of these. Furthermore, performances other than these performances may be included.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a left decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a medium decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a right decorative pattern,
In a state where the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed on the display means, the middle decorative pattern overlaps a part of the right decorative pattern, and the left decorative pattern overlaps a part of the middle decorative pattern. A first effect in which the designs are displayed overlapping each other,
After the first performance, a second display is performed in which the medium decorative pattern, which is smaller than both the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern, is displayed without overlapping with both the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern. capable of directing and executing
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
After the second performance, a third performance can be performed in which the middle decorative pattern is displayed overlapping a portion of each of the right decorative pattern and the left decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2,
In the first performance, the left decorative pattern is displayed larger than the middle decorative pattern, and the middle decorative pattern is displayed larger than the right decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3,
In the second performance, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed with their main surfaces facing different directions.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-4,
In the third performance, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are displayed such that a portion of each of them protrudes from the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning type suggestion image display performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 113 to 115. This winning type suggesting image display performance may be executed, for example, during a fluctuating display of decorative symbols during rush hours. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the winning type suggestion image display performance, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. This is a display effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Win type suggestion image display effect A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the win type suggestion image display effect A. In the winning type suggestion image display effect A, first, the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 113(A) is executed. Specifically, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and a winning type suggestion image SH are displayed on the display screen 7a. The winning type suggestion image SH is an image that suggests the contents of a series of winning games during rush hours. In other words, the winning type suggestion image SH is an image that suggests the type of jackpot executed in the past. In FIG. 113(A), three types of jackpots are displayed: "Super", "Miracle", and "Bonus". Further, in FIG. 113(A), eight winning type suggestion images SH are displayed in two rows, suggesting that eight jackpot games have been executed in the past. In FIG. 113(A), the first to fifth jackpot types are displayed in the upper row, and the sixth to eighth jackpot types are displayed in the lower row. The winning type suggestion images SH are displayed in order from the left side to the right side near the center of the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode, and a portion of the winning type suggestion image SH is visible through the first movable accessory 14.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shift from a variable display to a stationary display as shown in the order of FIGS. 113(A) to 113(C). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed overlapping a portion of the winning type suggestion image SH, as shown in FIGS. 113(A) to 113(C). That is, some of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed overlapping the hit type suggestion image SH even when the variable display shown in FIG. It is displayed overlapping the hit type suggestion image SH. After the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in FIG. 113(C), the decorative pattern variation effect is executed again as shown in FIG. 113(D). Also at this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed overlapping a part of the winning type suggestion image SH.

[Win type suggestion image display effect B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the win type suggestion image display effect B. The winning type suggestion image display effect B is different from the winning type suggestion image display effect A in FIG.
The difference is that S1, the acquired pitches image BA1, and the remaining period suggestion image are displayed. In the decorative symbol variation effect of FIG. 114(A), the display screen 7a displays decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a hit type suggestion image SH, a suggestion image IS1, an acquired ball count image BA1, and a first image IM1. , a second image IM2, and a third image IM3 are displayed. The win type suggestion image SH is similar to the win type suggestion image display effect A in FIG. 113. Here, nine winning type suggestion images SH are displayed in two rows, suggesting that nine jackpot games have been executed in the past. The suggestion image IS1 is an image that suggests the player to play right-handed. The number of balls acquired image BA1 represents the number of balls acquired by the player in a series of winning games.

The first image IM1 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a smiling face. Note that a specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, letters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. etc. are also included. The first image IM1 is displayed on the second image IM2. Here, the first image IM1 is displayed at the left end on the second image IM2. The second image IM2 is a substantially rectangular figure that is long in the horizontal direction, and is displayed below the display screen 7a. The third image IM3 is a reservation icon (reservation image) representing the number of reservations, and is displayed on the second image IM2. Here, a pending number of 4 is suggested.

The first image IM1 moves rightward on the second image IM2. The first image IM1 and the second image IM2 function as remaining period suggestion images that suggest the remaining period until the predetermined period expires, depending on the position of the first image IM1 with respect to the second image IM2. That is, it is suggested that the predetermined period has expired when the first image IM1 is located at the right end of the second image IM2. The predetermined period is, for example, a period from the start to the end of one fluctuation pattern.

The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a. A portion of each of the suggestion image IS1, the acquired pitch count image BA1, the first image IM1, the second image IM2, and the hit type suggestion image SH is covered with the first movable accessory 14, and the first movable It is visible through the accessory 14.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shift from a variable display to a stationary display as shown in the order of FIGS. 114(A) to 114(C). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed overlapping a portion of the winning type suggestion image SH, as shown in FIGS. 114(A) to 114(C). That is, some of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed overlapping the hit type suggestion image SH even during the fluctuating display shown in FIG. It is displayed overlapping the hit type suggestion image SH. After the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in FIG. 114(C), the decorative pattern variation effect is executed again as shown in FIG. 114(D). Also at this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed overlapping a part of the winning type suggestion image SH.

[Win type suggestion image display performance C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the win type suggestion image display effect C. The win type suggestion image display effect C differs from the win type suggestion image display effect A in FIG. 113 in that second decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r and remaining period suggestion images are displayed. In the decorative pattern variation effect of FIG. 115(A), the display screen 7a displays decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a hit type suggestion image SH, second decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, and a first image IM1. A second image IM2 and a third image IM3 are displayed. The win type suggestion image SH is similar to the win type suggestion image display effect A in FIG. 113. Note that here, three winning type suggestion images SH are displayed in a row, suggesting that three jackpot games have been executed in the past. Here, during the period from a single fluctuating display of the second decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r to a stop display, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R perform a pseudo continuous effect that repeats multiple fluctuating displays and temporary stop displays. Let's do it.

The first image IM1, the second image IM2, and the third image are the same as the win type suggestion image display effect B in FIG. 114. That is, the first image IM1 and the second image IM2 function as remaining period suggestion images that suggest the remaining period until the predetermined period expires, depending on the position of the first image IM1 with respect to the second image IM2. Here, it corresponds to the period from the one-time variable display to the stop display of the second decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r.

The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a. A portion of each of the second decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, the first image IM1, the second image IM2, and the winning type suggestion image SH is covered with the first movable accessory 14, and the first movable accessory It is visible through the object 14.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R perform a pseudo-connection effect as shown in the order of FIGS. 115(A) to 115(D). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed overlapping a part of the winning type suggestion image SH, as shown in FIGS. 115(A) to 114(D). That is, some of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed overlapping the hit type suggestion image SH even when the variable display shown in FIG. It is displayed overlapping the hit type suggestion image SH.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the winning type suggesting image display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, in a state where the hit type suggestion image SH suggesting the jackpot type executed in the past is displayed on the display screen 7a, the hit type suggestion image A first effect in which decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed overlapping a part of SH can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, the second effect is such that the variable effect is started with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R at least partially overlapping the winning type suggestion image SH. is possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, in the first effect, remaining period suggestion images IM1 and IM2 indicating the remaining period until the predetermined period expires are displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, in the first performance, an acquired ball number image BA1 indicating the number of balls acquired by jackpots executed in the past is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, at least a portion of the acquired ball count image BA1 is visible via the first movable accessory 14, as shown in FIG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the type-suggesting image display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The contents of the winning type suggestion image SH shown in FIGS. 113 to 115 are not limited to the above, and can be any winning type. Further, the shape and arrangement of the winning type suggestion image SH are not limited to those described above, and may be any shape or arrangement.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. However, the first movable accessory 14 may have other aspects. For example, the first movable accessory 14 may be stationary at the home position and difficult to see in the third mode, or may cover the entire display screen 7a as the second mode.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hit type suggestion image that suggests the type of jackpot executed in the past,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
in a state where the win type suggestion image is displayed on the display means, a first effect can be executed in which the decorative pattern is displayed overlapping a part of the win type suggestion image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
capable of executing a second performance in which a variable performance is started in a state where the decorative pattern at least partially overlaps the winning type suggestion image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2,
In the first performance, a remaining period suggestion image indicating the remaining period until the predetermined period expires is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-3,
In the first performance, an acquired pitch number image indicating the number of pitches acquired by jackpots executed in the past is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-4 further includes:
Equipped with a transparent accessory,
At least a portion of the acquired pitch count image is visible through the accessory;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The two-reach effect will be explained below using FIGS. 116 to 118. This two-reach performance may be executed, for example, at the start of the variable display of special symbols.
[Two reach performance A]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the two-reach effect A.
First, in the two-reach effect A, as shown in FIG. 116(A), a variation start effect is executed. This fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing. Next, as shown in FIG. 116(B), the first reach effect is executed. In this first reach effect, a reach state is formed in which the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R stop at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating, and in the reach state, the decorative pattern 8C moves from left to right. It's a performance. In FIG. 116(B), a reach state is formed using seven symbols. Next, Figure 116
As shown in (C), the second reach effect is executed. In this second reach effect, a ready-to-reach state is formed in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R stop at the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating, and in the ready-to-reach state, the decorative symbol 8C moves from right to left. It's a performance. In FIG. 116(C), a reach state is formed using seven symbols.
Note that FIGS. 116(A) to 116(C) are effects of the same variation. Therefore, in the same variation, the first reach effect and the second reach effect are executed, in other words, two different reach effects are executed.

[Two reach performance B]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the two-reach effect B.
First, in the two-reach effect B, as shown in FIG. 117(A), a variation start effect is executed. This fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(B), the first reach effect is executed. In this first reach effect, a ready-to-reach state is formed in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R stop at the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating, and in the ready-to-reach state, the decorative symbol 8C moves from left to right. It's a performance. In FIG. 117(B), a reach state is formed using seven symbols. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(C), a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-coupling performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at a pattern suggesting a pseudo-coupling (hereinafter also referred to as a pseudo-coupling-suggesting pattern). In addition, a pseudo-continuous performance is a performance that is executed at the start of a fluctuating change or a reach performance, etc., for example, a performance that repeats a performance in which decorative symbols start to fluctuate and temporarily stop, or a performance that repeats a performance in which decorative symbols start changing and temporarily stop, or when a predetermined pattern arrangement of decorative symbols is performed. Along with a display that repeatedly temporarily stops at least a part of the logo, a display that repeatedly temporarily stops a predetermined logo, or a display that suggests a pseudo series such as "x2", "x3", or "pseudo", Includes a performance that executes a fluctuating display of decorative patterns. The same applies to the pseudo-continuous performance shown below.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(D), a second reach effect is executed. In this second reach effect, a ready-to-reach state is formed in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R stop at the same symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating, and in the ready-to-reach state, the decorative symbol 8C moves from right to left. It's a performance. In FIG. 117(D), a reach state is formed using seven symbols.
Note that FIGS. 117(A) to (D) are effects of the same variation. Therefore, in the same variation, the first reach effect and the second reach effect are executed, in other words, two different reach effects are executed.

[Two reach performance C]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the two-reach effect C.
First, in the two-reach effect C, as shown in FIG. 118(A), a variation start effect is executed. This fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing. Next, as shown in FIG. 118(B), the first reach effect is executed. In this first reach effect, a reach state is formed in which the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R stop at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating, and in the reach state, the decorative pattern 8C moves from left to right. It's a performance. In FIG. 118(B), a reach state is formed using seven symbols. Next, as shown in FIG. 118(C), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-coupling performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at a pattern suggesting a pseudo-coupling (hereinafter also referred to as a pseudo-coupling-suggesting pattern).

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(D), a second reach effect is executed. In this second reach effect, a reach state is formed in which the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R stop at the same pattern and the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating, and in the reach state, the decorative pattern 8C moves from the bottom to the top. It's a performance. In FIG. 118(D), a reach state is formed using seven symbols. Note that FIGS. 118(A) to 118(D) are effects of the same variation. Therefore, in the same variation, the first reach effect and the second reach effect are executed, in other words, two different reach effects are executed.

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of two-reach performance.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first reach effect and the second reach effect are performed with the same variation in the two reach effect. According to this configuration, since two types of reach effects are performed with the same variation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, in the two-reach performance, the second reach performance is performed after the first reach performance. According to this configuration, since the two ready-to-win effects are performed in sequence, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the two-reach performance, the first reach performance is a performance in which the decorative symbols move to the left, and the second reach performance is a performance in which the decorative symbols change to the right. According to this configuration, since the decorative symbols vary in different directions in the two ready-to-reach performances, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the two-reach performance, the first reach performance is a performance in which the decorative symbols move to the left, and the second reach performance is a performance in which the decorative symbols change to the right. According to this configuration, since the decorative symbols change in opposite directions in the two ready-to-win performances, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the two-reach performance,
The fourth display performance is a performance that performs a pseudo series,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect, the fourth display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Modified example]
A modified example of the two-reach performance is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8C that fluctuate in the first ready-to-win performance move from left to right, and the medium decorative symbols 8C that fluctuate in the second ready-to-win performance move from right to left, resulting in the same fluctuation. Although the configuration is such that two different reach performances are realized, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates in the first reach effect moves from right to left, and the fluctuating decorative symbol 8C moves from left to right in the second reach effect, thereby creating two different reach effects in the same variation. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the decorative pattern 8C that changes in the first reach performance moves from the bottom to the top, and the decorative pattern 8C that changes in the second reach performance moves from the top to the bottom, so that in the same fluctuation, It may be configured to realize two different reach effects. Also, in the first reach performance, the fluctuating decorative symbol 8C moves in front of the stopping decorative symbols 8L, 8R, and in the second reach performance, the fluctuating medium decorative symbol 8C moves behind the stopping decorative symbols 8L, 8R. By doing so, it may be configured to realize two different reach effects in the same variation.
In addition, by making the decorative symbols 8L and 8R that form a ready-to-reach state in the first ready-to-reach performance different from the decorative symbols 8L and 8R that form a ready-to-reach state in the second ready-to-reach performance, in the same variation, It may be configured to realize two different reach effects.
Furthermore, the decorative symbols 8C that fluctuate in the first reach performance move randomly, and the decorative symbols 8C that fluctuate in the second reach performance also move randomly, so that in the same fluctuation,
It may be configured to realize two different reach effects.
Note that the order of the first ready-to-win performance and the second ready-to-win performance may be reversed, and the first ready-to-win performance may be executed after the second ready-to-win performance.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that forms a reach state of the first aspect using a decorative pattern,
The second display performance is a performance that uses the decorative pattern to form a ready-to-reach state in a second mode different from the first mode,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance and the second display performance are performed in the same variation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
The reach state of the first aspect includes a stopped decorative pattern and a fluctuating decorative pattern, and is a mode in which the fluctuating decorative pattern moves in a first direction,
The reach state of the second aspect includes a stopped decorative pattern and a fluctuating decorative pattern, and is an aspect in which the fluctuating decorative pattern moves in a second direction different from the first direction. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
the second direction is opposite to the first direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance that performs a pseudo series,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect, the fourth display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The special symbol variation effect will be explained below using FIGS. 119 to 121. This special symbol variation performance may be executed, for example, at the start of the special symbol variation display.
[Special symbol variation effect A]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation effect A.
First, in special symbol variation performance A, as shown in FIG. 119(A), a first symbol variation performance is executed. In this first symbol variation performance, a variation performance is performed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R consisting only of numerical symbols. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R composed of only numerical patterns are also called normal decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(B), the first symbol pseudo continuous effect is executed. This first pattern pseudo-connection presentation is a presentation in which the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern while the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped. The decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are in a state where the number of the numerical pattern is different by one. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(C), a second symbol variation effect is executed. In this second symbol variation performance, the variation performance is performed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in which the viewing character image D41 is added to the numerical symbol. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in which the viewing character image D41 is added to the numerical pattern are also referred to as first special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the first special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the viewing character image D41 is added to all the patterns even if the numerical patterns are different. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(D), a second symbol pseudo continuous effect is executed. This second pattern pseudo-connection presentation is a presentation in which the first special decorative pattern 8L and the first special decorative pattern 8R are stopped, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern. The first special decorative pattern 8L and the first special decorative pattern 8R are in a state where the number of the numerical pattern is different by one.
Note that FIGS. 119(A) to 119(D) are effects of the same variation.

[Special symbol variation effect B]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining special symbol variation effect B.
First, in special symbol variation performance B, as shown in FIG. 120(A), a first symbol variation performance is executed. In this first symbol variation performance, a variation performance is performed using the first special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 120(B), the first symbol pseudo-continuous performance is executed. This first pattern pseudo-connection presentation is a presentation in which the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern. The decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are in a state where the number of the numerical pattern is different by one. Next, as shown in FIG. 120(C), a second symbol variation effect is executed. In this second symbol variation effect, the variation effect is executed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are the first special decorative symbols in which the viewpoint character image D41 is added to the numerical symbol and the name image D42 of the viewpoint character is added. be done. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in which the name image D42 of the viewing character is added to the first special decorative pattern are also referred to as second special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The name image D42 in FIG. 120(C) is expressed as "OARO". In the special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the name image D42 is added to all the patterns even if the numerical patterns are different. Next, as shown in FIG. 120(D), a second symbol pseudo continuous effect is executed. This second pattern pseudo-connection presentation is a presentation in which the second special decorative pattern 8L and the second special decorative pattern 8R are stopped, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern. The second special decorative pattern 8L and the second special decorative pattern 8R are in a state where the number of the numerical pattern is different by one.
Note that FIGS. 120(A) to 120(D) are effects of the same variation.

[Special symbol variation effect C]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation effect C.
First, in special symbol variation performance C, as shown in FIG. 121(A), a first symbol variation performance is executed. In this first symbol variation performance, the variation performance is executed using the third special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The third special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have numerical designs and character images added, and the characters added to each numerical design are different. For example, a viewing character image D41 is added to a decorative pattern with a number pattern of 7, and an enemy character D43 is added to a decorative pattern with a number pattern of 6. Next, as shown in FIG. 121(B), the first symbol pseudo-continuous performance is executed. This first pattern pseudo continuous effect is the third
This is an effect in which the special decorative pattern 8L and the third special decorative pattern 8R are stopped, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped as a pseudo-connection pattern. The decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are in a state where the number of the numerical pattern is different by one. Next, as shown in FIG. 121(C), a second symbol variation effect is executed. In this second symbol variation performance, a variation performance is performed using the fourth special decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The fourth special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have a numeric pattern, a character image, and a name image added, and the characters and name images added to each numeric pattern are different. For example, to a decorative pattern with a number design of 7, a viewpoint character image D41 and a name image D42 are added, and to a decorative pattern with a number design of 6, an enemy character D43 and a name image D44 are added. The name image D44 is expressed as "OORO". Next, as shown in FIG. 121(D), a second symbol pseudo continuous effect is executed. This second pattern pseudo-connection presentation is a presentation in which the fourth special decorative pattern 8L and the fourth special decorative pattern 8R are stopped, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern. The fourth special decorative pattern 8L and the fourth special decorative pattern 8R are in a state where the number of the numerical pattern is different by one.
Note that FIGS. 121(A) to 121(D) are effects of the same variation.

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of the production.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol variation production, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the first symbol variation production include one or more elements, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the second symbol variation production, In addition to the elements included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first symbol variation performance, 8R has a configuration that includes new elements that are not present in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first symbol variation production. ing. According to this configuration, two variable performances are performed using decorative symbols having different elements, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol variation performance, the second symbol variation performance is executed after the first symbol variation performance. According to this configuration, since the second symbol variation performance is performed after the first symbol variation performance, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol variation performance, the first symbol variation performance and the second symbol variation performance are performed in the same variation. According to this configuration, since the first symbol variation performance and the second symbol variation performance are performed with the same variation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol variation production B, in the second symbol variation production, elements (view character image D41) included in the decorative symbols of the second symbol variation production in the special symbol variation production, A predetermined effect is performed (Variation 3, which will be described later). According to this configuration, since a performance is performed using elements included in the decorative patterns, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol variation production, a variation production is performed using a decorative pattern including a numerical pattern, a variation production is performed using a decorative pattern including a numerical pattern and a viewpoint character image D41, and then a variation performance is performed using a decorative pattern including a numerical pattern and a viewpoint character image D41. A variable effect is performed using a decorative pattern including a character image D41 and a name image D42 of an ally character (Modification 1 to be described later). According to this configuration, since three variable effects each having a different number of elements are performed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, examples of modified effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol variation production, the normal decorative symbols 8L, 8C,
8R, the first special decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R, the second special decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R, the third special decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R, and the fourth special decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R. Three or more may be combined to realize a variation effect within the same variation.
For example, within the same variation, a performance is performed using the normal decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, then a performance is performed using the first special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and then a performance is performed using the second special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The effect may be performed using 8L, 8C, and 8R.
Also, within the same variation, a performance is performed using the normal decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, then a performance is performed using the third special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and then a performance is performed using the fourth special decorative pattern. The effect may be performed using 8L, 8C, and 8R.
Furthermore, within the same variation, a performance is performed using the normal decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, then a performance is performed using the first special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and then a performance is performed using the second special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The effect may be performed using 8L, 8C, and 8R, and then the effect may be performed using the third special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.
Furthermore, the order of these performances may be rearranged. For example, within the same variation, a performance is performed using the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, then a performance is performed using the first special decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and then a normal decorative pattern 8L is performed. , 8C, and 8R may be used to perform the effect.
Moreover, the combination effect of these decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be made to correspond to each mode. For example, in mode A, special symbol variation performance A may be performed, in mode B, special symbol variation performance B may be performed, and in mode C, special symbol variation performance C may be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the special symbol variation performance is performed within the same variation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed separately in a plurality of variations. For example, in the special symbol variation performance A, FIGS. 119(A) and (B) may be performed within the same variation, and FIGS. 119(C) and (D) may be performed within the next variation.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special symbol variation performances A to C, images including elements included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to perform predetermined performances (for example, reach performance, pseudo continuous performance, chance up performance, A presentation, a look-ahead presentation, a jackpot suggestion presentation) may be performed. For example, a chance-up effect may be performed using the viewing character image D41 included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the second symbol variation effect of the special symbol variation effect A. In this case, the chance-up effect using the viewpoint character image D41 may be performed after the second symbol variation effect.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays a decorative pattern in a first manner,
The second display performance is a performance that displays the decorative pattern in the second mode different from the first mode,
The decorative pattern of the first aspect includes one or more elements,
In addition to the elements included in the decorative pattern of the first aspect, the decorative pattern of the second aspect includes new elements not included in the decorative pattern of the first aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 2,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect in the same variation;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is a performance performed using an image including an element included in the decorative pattern of the second aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance that displays the decorative pattern in a third mode different from the second mode,
In addition to the elements included in the decorative pattern of the second aspect, the decorative pattern of the third aspect includes new elements not included in the decorative pattern of the second aspect,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The non-miss suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124. This non-missing suggestion performance may be executed, for example, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.
[Suggestive performance A other than the failure]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the non-miss suggestion effect A.
First, in the non-missing suggestion performance A, as shown in FIG. 122(A), the fluctuation performance is executed. This variation performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed. Next, as shown in FIG. 122(B), a losing symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This missed pattern array stop performance is a performance that uses the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to stop the missed symbol array that represents a miss. In FIG. 122(B), as a missed pattern arrangement, 7 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 8L, 6 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 8R, and a special pattern is used for the decorative pattern 8C. A missed pattern arrangement including this special symbol suggests something other than a missed spot. Specifically, a losing symbol arrangement including this special symbol suggests that, apart from losing, you will hit the jackpot either by holding or not. Next, as shown in FIG. 122(C), the next variation effect is executed. This next variation performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed. Next, as shown in FIG. 122(D), a jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern array stop performance is a performance that uses the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to stop the jackpot pattern array that represents a jackpot. In FIG. 122(D), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to form a row of seven symbols as the jackpot symbol arrangement.
Note that FIGS. 122(A) and 122(B) are effects related to this variation, and FIGS. 122(C) and (D) are effects related to the next variation. Figures 122 (C) and (D) may be effects related to the next change for the relevant change effect, or effects related to the next next change for the change concerned, or effects related to the next change after the change concerned. It may be a performance that involves the next next next change. That is, after the losing symbol arrangement including the special symbol is stopped in FIG. 122(B), FIGS. 122(C) and (D) are executed in a variation with a jackpot. In this case, after the effects related to the fluctuations in FIGS. 122(A) and (B) are performed, and until the effects related to the changes in FIGS. 122(C) and (D) (the jackpot effect) are performed, the predetermined If there is a fluctuation, the out-of-place symbol array including the special symbol is stopped and displayed even during that fluctuation.

[Suggestive performance B other than the failure]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the non-miss suggestion effect B.
First, in the non-missing suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. 123(A), the variation effect is executed. This variation effect changes the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R at approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and also changes the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and makes various characters appear. This is an effect that displays various things. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are formed larger than the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R. Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), a losing symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This effect of stopping the missing symbol array uses the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R approximately in the center of the display screen 7a to stop the missing symbol array that represents the missed symbol, and also uses the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R at the upper right of the display screen 7a. This is a performance that stops the pattern arrangement using . In FIG. 123(B), as a missed pattern arrangement using decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, 7 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 8L, and 6 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 8C and the decorative pattern 8R. Moreover, as a pattern arrangement using the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R, 7 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 9L, 6 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 9R, and a special pattern is used for the decorative pattern 9C. The out-of-place pattern arrangement by the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R including this special pattern suggests something other than out-of-place. Specifically, the losing pattern arrangement by the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R including this special pattern suggests that a jackpot will be won in either the hold or the loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(C), the next variation effect is executed. This next variation effect changes the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R at approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and also changes the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and makes various characters appear. This is an effect that displays various things. Next, as shown in FIG. 123(D), a jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern array stop effect uses decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R at approximately the center of the display screen 7a to stop the jackpot pattern array that represents a jackpot, and also stops the jackpot pattern array that represents a jackpot using decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R at the upper right of the display screen 7a. This is a performance that stops the jackpot symbol arrangement using . In FIG. 123(D), the jackpot symbol arrangement uses decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R to form a grid of 7 symbols. Note that FIGS. 123(A) and 123(B) are effects related to this variation, and FIGS. 123(C) and (D) are effects related to the next variation. Figures 123 (C) and (D) may be effects related to the next change to the fluctuation effect, or effects related to the next next change to the change; It may be a performance that involves the next next next change. That is, after the losing symbol arrangement including the special symbol is stopped in FIG. 123(B), FIGS. 123(C) and (D) are executed in a variation with a jackpot. In this case, after the effects related to the fluctuations in FIGS. 123(A) and (B) are performed, and until the effects related to the changes in FIGS. 123(C) and (D) are performed (the jackpot effect), the predetermined If there is a fluctuation, the out-of-place symbol array including the special symbol is stopped and displayed even during the fluctuation.

[Suggestive performance C other than the failure]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the non-miss suggestion effect C.
First, in the non-missing suggesting effect C, as shown in FIG. 124(A), the variation effect is executed. This variation performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(B), a losing symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This missed pattern array stop performance is a performance that uses the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to stop the missed symbol array that represents a miss. In FIG. 124(B), as a missed pattern arrangement, 7 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 8L, 6 patterns are used for the decorative pattern 8R, and a special pattern is used for the decorative pattern 8C. A missed pattern arrangement including this special symbol suggests something other than a missed spot. Specifically, a losing symbol arrangement including this special symbol suggests that a pseudo-continuous performance will occur in either a pending state, in addition to a missed state. Next, as shown in FIG. 124(C), the next variation effect is executed. This next variation performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed. Next, as shown in FIG. 124(D), a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. This pseudo-connection performance is a performance in which the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern. Note that FIGS. 124(A) and 124(B) are effects related to this variation, and FIGS. 124(C) and (D) are effects related to the next variation. Figures 124 (C) and (D) may be effects related to the next change for the relevant change effect, or effects related to the next next change for the change concerned, or effects related to the next change after the change concerned. It may be a performance that involves the next next next change. That is, after the losing symbol arrangement including the special symbol is stopped in FIG. 124(B), FIGS. 124(C) and (D) are executed in a variation with a jackpot. In this case, after the effects related to the fluctuations in FIGS. 124(A) and (B) are performed, and until the effects related to FIGS. 124(C) and (D) (the jackpot effect) are performed, the predetermined If there is a fluctuation, the out-of-place symbol array including the special symbol is stopped and displayed even during the fluctuation.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the effect of suggesting other than a failure is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the non-missing suggestion performance, the missing symbol array stop performance is performed after the fluctuating performance, and the losing symbol array that is stopped and displayed in the losing symbol array stop performance does not give a predetermined suggestion other than losing. Contains special designs. According to this configuration, even if the missed symbol arrangement is stopped, a predetermined suggestion is made using the special symbol, so that the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to display the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in a variable manner when the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R are displayed in a variable manner in the non-loss suggesting performance. According to this configuration, since the two decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the non-loss suggesting performance, the losing symbol array including the special symbol includes a display suggesting that there is a jackpot on hold. According to this configuration, the losing symbol arrangement suggests that there is a jackpot on hold, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the non-losing suggestive performance, after the fluctuation performance, a losing symbol array including special symbols is stopped and displayed, and then a losing symbol array including special symbols is stopped and displayed in the next variation. According to this configuration, since the predetermined suggestion by the special symbol continues,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the non-loss suggestion performance B, after the losing symbol array stop performance including a special symbol, the jackpot symbol array stop performance is performed in the next variation, and the special symbol is included in the jackpot symbol array. The configuration does not include. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the non-missing suggestive effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the non-loss suggestion performances A to C, a losing symbol arrangement including special symbols is used as a suggestion other than a loss, such as a suggestion of hitting the jackpot in any of the pending situations, or a pseudo-continuation in any of the pending situations. Although it is suggested that a performance will occur, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a losing symbol arrangement that includes a special symbol is a suggestion other than a losing one that a specific reach effect (for example, a story reach effect or a premium reach effect) will appear in one of the pending cases, or a suggestion that a specific reach effect (for example, a story reach effect or a premium reach effect) will appear in one of the pending cases. It may also be possible to suggest that a specific character (for example, a premium character) will appear.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the non-losing suggestion effect B, a losing symbol array including special symbols is formed only in the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R, but the present invention is not limited to this. isn't it. For example, if one of the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, or both of the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R have a missed pattern arrangement that includes a special pattern, It is good also as a structure where it is formed. In this case, if a missed pattern array including special patterns is formed in both the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, It may be configured to suggest that the player will be in a more advantageous situation than when a missing symbol array including a special symbol is formed on either one of 8R. For example, if a losing symbol array is formed that includes special symbols in both decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, this suggests that there are two or more jackpots in the hold. You can do it like this.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, in the non-loss suggestion performances A to C, if there is a predetermined variation after stopping the losing symbol array including special symbols until the variation with a jackpot, in that variation, Although the configuration is such that the missing symbol array including the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the missing symbol array including the special symbol may not be stopped and displayed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that changes a decorative pattern,
The second display performance is a performance that causes the decorative pattern to stop in an out-of-place pattern arrangement that is one of a plurality of modes,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the second display performance may be performed after the first display performance, and in the second display performance, the decorative symbols may be stopped in an out-of-line pattern arrangement of the first aspect. ,
The missed pattern arrangement of the first aspect includes a predetermined suggestion display other than missed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is a performance that changes another decorative pattern that is larger than the decorative pattern,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed at the time of the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
The missed symbol arrangement of the first aspect includes, as the predetermined suggestion display, a display suggesting that there is a hit on hold.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
In the combination performance, after the decorative symbols are stopped in the outlying pattern arrangement of the first mode, the first display performance is performed again in the next variation, and then the second display performance is performed. and in the second display performance, the predetermined suggestion display is stopped at the outlying symbol arrangement of the first aspect that includes a specific symbol;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance that causes the decorative symbols to stop at a jackpot symbol arrangement,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, after the decorative patterns are stopped in the out-of-line pattern arrangement of the first mode, the first display effect is performed again in the next variation, and then the fourth display effect is performed. It is done,
A gaming machine characterized in that the jackpot arrangement of decorative patterns does not include the predetermined suggestion display.

The decorative pattern moving effect will be explained below using FIGS. 125 to 127. This decorative symbol movement effect may be executed, for example, at the start of the variable display of special symbols.

[Decorative pattern movement effect A]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern movement effect A.
First, in the decorative symbol movement effect A, as shown in FIG. 125(A), a variation start effect is executed. This fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing. Next, as shown in FIG. 125(B), the decorative symbol front movement reach effect is executed. In this reach direction movement of decorative symbols, a reach state is formed in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R stop at the same pattern, and the decorative symbols 8C are fluctuating.In the reach state, the decorative symbols 8C move from left to right. This is an effect in which the decorative pattern 8C moves in front of the stationary decorative patterns 8L and 8R. In FIG. 125(B), a reach state is formed using seven symbols. Next, as shown in FIG. 125(C), a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuous performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive pattern. The decorative pattern 8C is arranged adjacent to the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, and stops between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R.
Note that FIGS. 125(A) to 125(C) are effects of the same variation.

[Decorative pattern movement effect B]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern movement effect B.
First, in the decorative symbol movement effect B, as shown in FIG. 126(A), a variation start effect is executed. This fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing. Next, as shown in FIG. 126(B), the decorative symbol front movement reach effect is executed. In this reach direction movement of decorative symbols, a reach state is formed in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R stop at the same pattern, and the decorative symbols 8C are fluctuating.In the reach state, the decorative symbols 8C move from left to right. This is an effect in which the decorative pattern 8C moves in front of the stationary decorative patterns 8L and 8R. In FIG. 126(B), a reach state is formed using seven symbols. Next, as shown in FIG. 126(C), a decorative symbol backward movement reach effect is executed. In this decorative pattern backward moving reach effect, a reach state is formed in which the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R stop at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating, and in the reach state, the decorative pattern 8C moves from left to right. This is an effect in which the decorative pattern 8C moves behind the stationary decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 126(C), a reach state is formed using seven symbols.
Note that the decorative symbol forward moving ready-to-reach effect shown in FIG. 126(B) may be performed after the decorative symbol backward moving ready-to-reach effect shown in FIG. 126(C). Next, as shown in FIG. 126(D), a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuous performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive pattern. The decorative pattern 8C is arranged adjacent to the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, and stops between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R.
Note that FIGS. 126(A) to 126(D) are effects of the same variation.

[Decorative pattern movement effect C]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern movement effect C.
First, in the decorative symbol movement effect C, as shown in FIG. 127(A), a variation start effect is executed. This fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing. Next, as shown in FIG. 127(B), the decorative symbol front movement reach effect is executed. In this reach direction movement of decorative symbols, a reach state is formed in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R stop at the same pattern, and the decorative symbols 8C are fluctuating.In the reach state, the decorative symbols 8C move from left to right. This is an effect in which the decorative pattern 8C moves in front of the stationary decorative patterns 8L and 8R. In FIG. 127(B), a reach state is formed using seven symbols. Next, as shown in FIG. 127(C), a decorative symbol backward movement reach effect is executed. In this decorative pattern backward moving reach effect, a reach state is formed in which the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R stop at the same pattern and the decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating, and in the reach state, the decorative pattern 8C moves from right to left. This is an effect in which the decorative pattern 8C moves behind the stationary decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 127(C), a reach state is formed using seven symbols. Next, as shown in FIG. 127(D), a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-continuous presentation, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive pattern. The decorative pattern 8C is arranged adjacent to the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, and stops between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R.
Note that FIGS. 127(A) to 127(D) are effects of the same variation.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern movement effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement performance, after the fluctuation start performance, the decorative symbol front movement reach performance is performed. According to this configuration, since the decorative pattern moves so as to pass in front of other decorative patterns, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol moving performance, the decorative symbol 8C is passed in front of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in a state where a reach state is formed with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. According to this configuration, since the decorative pattern 8C moves so as to pass in front of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement performance, the moving direction of the decorative symbol 8C in the variation start performance is downward, and the moving direction of the decorative symbol 8C in the decorative symbol front movement reach performance is the horizontal direction. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the movement of the decorative symbols and can improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement performance B, the decorative symbol forward movement reach effect is performed, and then the decorative symbol backward movement reach effect is performed. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the movement of the decorative symbols and can improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement performance, after the decorative symbol front movement reach performance, a pseudo continuous performance is performed in which the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed adjacent to the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern movement effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative pattern movement effects A to C, the decorative pattern 8C is arranged adjacent to the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, and between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R. Although it is configured to stop, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern 8C may be configured to be stopped apart from the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol movement effects A to C, the decorative symbol front movement reach effect is such that when the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are in the reach state (the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern), the decorative pattern 8C stops. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at different patterns, the decorative pattern 8C may move in front of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative pattern movement effects A to C, the decorative pattern front movement reach effect is such that when the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are in a stopped state, the decorative pattern 8C moves with the decorative pattern 8L. Although it is configured to move in front of the decorative pattern 8R, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are in a moving state, the decorative pattern 8C may move in front of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that variably displays a plurality of decorative patterns including a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern,
The second display performance is a performance in which the first decorative pattern is stopped and the second decorative pattern is moved so as to pass in front of the first decorative pattern,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The second display effect is to move the second decorative pattern so as to pass in front of the first decorative pattern in a state where a reach state is formed by decorative patterns including the first decorative pattern. It is a performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
In the first display performance, the direction of variation of the second decorative pattern is a first direction,
In the second display performance, the moving direction of the second decorative pattern is a second direction different from the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is a performance that causes the first decorative pattern to be in a stopped state and moves the second decorative pattern to pass behind the first decorative pattern,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect, either the second display effect or the third display effect is performed, and then the other display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance that causes the second decorative pattern to stop adjacent to the first decorative pattern in a stopped state,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and then the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The special pseudo-continuous effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 128 to 130. This special pseudo-continuous performance may be executed, for example, at the start of the variable display of special symbols.

[Special pseudo-continuous performance A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the special pseudo-continuous effect A.
First, in special pseudo continuous effect A, as shown in FIG. 128(A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. This fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(B), a first pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this first pseudo-connection performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-connection suggesting pattern D72. This pseudo-continuation suggestion pattern D72 includes a NEXT image representing a continuation of the pseudo-continuation, and a reach effect suggestion image D71. The reach effect suggestion image D71 represents an ally character, and in other words, suggests that the reach effect will develop into a reach effect in which an ally character appears. That is, the reach effect suggestion image D71 represents the type of reach effect that will develop in the future. Moreover, the reach effect suggestion image D71 is used as a background image of the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern D72. The reach effect suggestion image D71 is expressed in a color based on blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(C), a second pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this second pseudo-continuous presentation, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive pattern D72A. Only the NEXT image is shown for the pseudo-connection suggestive pattern D72A.

[Special pseudo-continuous performance B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining special pseudo-continuous effect B.
First, in the special pseudo-continuous effect B, as shown in FIG. 129(A), a variation start effect is executed. This fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(B), the first pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this first pseudo-connection performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-connection suggesting pattern D72. This pseudo-continuation suggestion pattern D72 includes a NEXT image representing a continuation of the pseudo-continuation, and a reach effect suggestion image D71. The reach effect suggestion image D71 represents an ally character, and in other words, suggests that the reach effect will develop into a reach effect in which an ally character appears. That is, the reach effect suggestion image D71 represents the type of reach effect that will develop in the future. Moreover, the reach effect suggestion image D71 is used as a background image of the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern D72. The reach effect suggestion image D71 is expressed in a color based on blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(C), a second pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this second pseudo-connection presentation, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern D73. The pseudo-continuation suggestion pattern D73 includes a NEXT image representing a continuation of the pseudo-continuation, and a reach effect suggestion image D74. The reach effect suggestion image D74 represents an enemy character, and in other words, suggests that the reach effect will develop into a reach effect in which an enemy character appears. That is, the reach effect suggestion image D74 represents the type of reach effect that will develop in the future. Moreover, the reach effect suggestion image D74 is used as a background image of the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern D72. The reach effect suggestion image D74 is expressed in a color based on red. The ready-to-win effect suggestion image D74 suggests that the ready-to-win effect will develop with a high expectation of a jackpot compared to the ready-to-win effect suggestion image D71. In other words, the color (red) of the ready-to-win effect suggestion image D74 suggests that the jackpot expectation level is higher than the color (blue) of the ready-to-win effect suggestion image D71.

[Special pseudo-continuous performance C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the special pseudo-continuous effect C.
First, in the special pseudo-continuous effect C, as shown in FIG. 130(A), a variation start effect is executed. This fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(B), the first reach preview effect is executed. The first reach preview performance is a performance in which the reach preview image D75 is displayed. The reach preview image D75 foretells the reach performance that will develop in the future. The reach preview image D75 shown in FIG. 130(B) suggests that the reach will develop into an OARO reach where an ally character will appear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(C), a first pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this first pseudo-connection performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-connection suggesting pattern D72. This pseudo-continuation suggestion pattern D72 includes a NEXT image representing a continuation of the pseudo-continuation, and a reach effect suggestion image D71. The reach effect suggestion image D71 represents an ally character, and in other words, suggests that the reach effect will develop into a reach effect in which an ally character appears. That is, the reach effect suggestion image D71 represents the type of reach effect that will develop in the future. This reach effect suggestion image D71 is linked with the reach preview image D75, and both suggest that the reach effect will develop into an OARO reach in which an ally character will appear. Moreover, the reach effect suggestion image D71 is used as a background image of the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern D72. The reach effect suggestion image D71 is expressed in a color based on blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(D), a second reach preview effect is executed. The second reach preview performance is a performance in which the reach preview image D76 is displayed. The reach preview image D76 foretells the reach performance that will develop in the future. The reach preview image D76 shown in FIG. 130(D) suggests that the reach will develop into an OORO reach where an enemy character will appear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(E), a second pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this second pseudo-connection presentation, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern D73. The pseudo-continuation suggestion pattern D73 includes a NEXT image representing a continuation of the pseudo-continuation, and a reach effect suggestion image D74. The reach effect suggestion image D74 represents an enemy character, and in other words, suggests that the reach effect will develop into a reach effect in which an enemy character appears. That is, the reach effect suggestion image D74 represents the type of reach effect that will develop in the future. This reach effect suggestion image D74 is linked with the reach preview image D76, and both suggest that the reach effect will develop into an OORO reach in which an enemy character will appear. Moreover, the reach effect suggestion image D74 is used as a background image of the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern D72. The reach effect suggestion image D74 is expressed in a color based on red.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of special pseudo-continuous effects is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first pseudo-continuation presentation is performed in the special pseudo-continuation presentation, and in the first pseudo-continuation presentation, the pseudo-continuation suggestion pattern D72 that suggests the pseudo-continuation presentation is displayed, and the pseudo-continuation suggestion pattern D72 is displayed. A ready-to-win effect suggestion image D71 that makes a suggestion different from the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed within D72. According to this configuration, the ready-to-win effect suggestion image D71 that makes a suggestion different from the pseudo-continuation effect is displayed within the pseudo-continuation suggestion pattern D72, so that the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous performance B, the second pseudo-continuous performance is performed after the first pseudo-continuous performance, and also in the second pseudo-continuous performance, a pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol suggesting a pseudo-continuous performance D73 is displayed, and a ready-to-win effect suggestion image D74 that makes a suggestion different from the pseudo-continuation effect is displayed within the pseudo-continuation suggestion pattern D73. According to this configuration, in addition to the first pseudo-continuous presentation, in the second pseudo-continuous presentation, the reach effect suggestion image D74 that makes a suggestion different from the pseudo-continuous presentation is displayed within the pseudo-continuous suggestion pattern D73, so that the game can be improved. It can improve your interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous presentation, the ready-to-reach effect suggestion image D71 and the ready-to-reach effect suggestion image D74 used in the first pseudo-continuous presentation and the second pseudo-continuous presentation are images that suggest the type of ready-to-win presentation. It is. According to this configuration, since the player can know the type of reach effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo continuous performance, the reach effect suggestion image D71 and the reach effect suggestion image D74 used in the first pseudo continuous effect and the second pseudo continuous effect are This is a background image of the suggestive pattern D72 and the pseudo-connected suggestive pattern D73. According to this configuration, since the player can know the type of reach effect from the background image, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous presentation, the ready-to-reach presentation suggestion image D71 and the ready-to-reach presentation suggestion image D74 used in the first pseudo-continuous presentation and the second pseudo-continuous presentation are character images. According to this configuration, since the player can easily know the type of reach effect based on the character image, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the special pseudo-continuous performance is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous presentation A, the ready-to-reach effect suggestion image D71 is displayed as the background image of the pseudo-continuous suggestion pattern D72 in the first pseudo-continuous presentation, and the ready-to-reach effect suggestion is displayed in the second pseudo-continuous presentation. Although the pseudo-association suggesting pattern D72A that does not include the image D71 is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there is a third pseudo continuous effect, the second pseudo continuous effect displays the reach effect suggestion image D71 as the background image of the pseudo continuous suggestion pattern D72, and the third pseudo continuous effect includes the reach effect suggestion image D71. A pseudo-connection suggesting pattern D72A that does not exist may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous effects A to C, the reach effect suggestion image D71 and the reach effect suggestion image D74 displayed within the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern D72 and the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern D73 are based on the specific reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a chance-up suggestion image suggesting a chance up may be displayed within the pseudo-coupling suggestion pattern D72 or the pseudo-coupling suggestion pattern D73, a jackpot suggestion image suggesting a jackpot may be displayed, or a pre-reading effect may be displayed. A look-ahead effect suggestion image may be displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo-continuous effects A to C, the reach effect suggestion image D71 and the reach effect suggestion image D74 are displayed as background images of the pseudo-continuous suggestion pattern D72 and the pseudo-continuous suggestion pattern D73. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reach effect suggestion image D71 and the reach effect suggestion image D74 may be displayed as a part of the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern D72 and the pseudo-connection suggestion pattern D73, and the reach effect suggestion image D71 and the reach effect suggestion image D74 are It is displayed on the front of the connected pattern D72 and the pseudo connected pattern D73, and the N
The EXT image may be in the background.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special pseudo continuous effects A to C, the reach effect suggestion image D71 and the reach effect suggestion image D74 are character images, but the present invention is not limited to this, and character images Other images such as or landscape images may also be used.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that performs a first pseudo continuous performance,
The second display performance is a performance that performs a second pseudo continuous performance different from the first pseudo continuous performance,
The first pseudo-connection performance is a performance that displays a first pseudo-connection suggestion image that suggests a pseudo-connection performance,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and in the first display effect, a different effect from the pseudo-connection effect is included in the first pseudo-connection suggestion image. A first specific suggestion image may be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The second pseudo-connection performance is a performance that displays a second pseudo-connection suggestion image that suggests a pseudo-connection performance,
In the combination production, in the second display, a second specific suggestion image that suggests a production different from the pseudo-coupling production may be displayed within the second pseudo-coupling suggestion image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
The specific suggestive image is an image that suggests the type of reach production.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The specific suggestion image is a background image of the pseudo-coupled suggestion image,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
the specific suggestion image is a character image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The normal pseudo-connection effects and the effects A and B using pseudo-related suggestive images will be described below with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. This suspension corresponding performance may be executed, for example, at the start of the variable display of special symbols.

[Normal pseudo continuous performance]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the normal pseudo-continuous effect.
First, in the normal pseudo continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 131(A), a variation start effect is executed. This fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(B), a first pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this first pseudo-continuous performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive pattern. This pseudo-coupling suggestion pattern includes a NEXT image D81 that suggests a pseudo-coupling performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(C), a second pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this second pseudo-continuous presentation, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the pseudo-continuous suggestive pattern. This pseudo-coupling suggestion pattern includes a NEXT image D81 that suggests a pseudo-coupling performance.
Note that FIGS. 131(A) to 131(C) are performances with the same variation.

[Production A using pseudo-linked suggestive images]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the effect A using pseudo-connected suggestive images.
First, in the pseudo connected suggestive image use effect A, as shown in FIG. 132(A), a variation start effect is executed. This fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(B), a jackpot suggesting effect is executed. In this jackpot suggestion performance, the NEXT image D81 used in the normal pseudo continuous performance is displayed. This NEXT image D81 functions as an image suggesting a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(C), a reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, an ally character CRA is displayed and takes various actions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(D), a jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern array stop performance is a performance that uses the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to stop the jackpot pattern array that represents a jackpot. In FIG. 132(D), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to form a row of 7 patterns as the jackpot pattern arrangement.
Note that FIGS. 132(A) to 132(D) are performances with the same variation.

[Production B using pseudo-linked suggestive images]
FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining production B using pseudo-connected suggestive images.
First, in the pseudo-connected suggestive image use effect B, as shown in FIG. 133(A), a variation start effect is executed. This fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(B), a jackpot suggesting effect is executed. In this jackpot suggestion performance, the NEXT image D81 used in the normal pseudo continuous performance is displayed, and the second movable accessory 15 moves to take on the second mode (see FIG. 48). This NEXT image D81 functions as an image suggesting a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(C), a reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, an ally character CRA is displayed and takes various actions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(D), a jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern array stop performance is a performance that uses the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to stop the jackpot pattern array that represents a jackpot. In FIG. 133(D), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to form a row of seven patterns as the jackpot pattern arrangement.
Note that FIGS. 133(A) to 133(D) are performances with the same variation.

[Effect example]
Below, examples of effects of the normal pseudo-connection effect and the effect using pseudo-connection suggestive images are shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the normal pseudo continuous effect, a pseudo continuous effect is performed using the NEXT image D81, and in the pseudo continuous suggestion image use effect, a jackpot suggestion effect is executed using the NEXT image D81. According to this configuration, the NEXT image D81 can have various effects, and the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when performing the jackpot suggestion performance using the NEXT image D81 in the pseudo-sequential suggestive image use performance B, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to execute the accessory performance. That's what I do. According to this configuration, the effect of the jackpot suggestion of the NEXT image D81 can be further emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the performance using the pseudo-linked suggestive image is performed in the fluctuation immediately after the end of the jackpot game. According to this configuration, the appearance of the NEXT image D81 can further emphasize the suggestion of a jackpot, and can improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the NEXT image D81 is used in the jackpot suggestion presentation that suggests a jackpot in the presentation using pseudo-continuous suggestion images. According to this configuration, the NEXT image D81 is used in a jackpot suggestion effect that suggests a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the NEXT image D81 is used in the suggestive effect that suggests the gaming state in the pseudo-sequential suggestive image use effect (Modification 1). According to this configuration, the NEXT image D81 is used in a suggestive effect that suggests the gaming state, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, modified examples of the normal pseudo-connection effect and the effect using pseudo-connection suggestive images are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the NEXT image D81 is used as a jackpot suggestion in the pseudo-sequential suggestion image use effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the NEXT image D81 may be used as a suggestion for a chance-up effect, a suggestion for a look-ahead effect, or a suggestion for a gaming state. In this case, if the NEXT image D81 suggests a chance-up effect, then the chance-up effect is performed. Furthermore, if the NEXT image D81 suggests a pre-read effect, then the pre-read effect is performed. Further, when the NEXT image D81 indicates a gaming state, the gaming state is notified afterwards.
[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the NEXT image D81 is used as a jackpot suggestion in the pseudo-sequential suggestion image use effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the NEXT image D81 may be used as a chance-up effect, a look-ahead effect, or a game status notification.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pseudo-suggestive image use effect may be performed in the fluctuation immediately after the end of the jackpot game (the first rotation after the end of the jackpot game), or may be performed during the time saving. Alternatively, it may be performed during a jackpot game.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D8-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that performs a pseudo continuous performance using a specific image,
The second display performance is a performance that performs a predetermined performance,
The predetermined performance is a performance using the specific image,
The specific image is an image that suggests at least a pseudo-coupling effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is a performance in which a performance using a predetermined character is performed,
A combination effect including the second display effect and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is being performed, the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
The predetermined performance is performed in the fluctuation immediately after the end of the jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The predetermined performance is a jackpot suggesting performance that suggests a jackpot,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The predetermined suggestive performance is a gaming state suggestive performance that suggests a gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The full rotation performance will be explained below using FIGS. 134 to 136. This full rotation performance may be executed, for example, at the start of the variable display of special symbols.

[Full rotation performance A]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining full rotation effect A.
First, in the full rotation effect A, as shown in FIG. 134(A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. This fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(B), a reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, an ally character CRA is displayed and takes various actions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(C), a scrolling effect is executed. In this scroll effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear, and the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R scroll downward in the same pattern state (matched state).

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(D), a jackpot symbol stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern array stop performance is a performance that displays a jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot by stopping the scrolling decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R. In FIG. 134(D), the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R are used to form a row of 7 patterns as the jackpot pattern arrangement. It should be noted that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R also disappear in the jackpot symbol stop production.

Note that FIGS. 134(A) to 134(D) are performances with the same variation. Furthermore, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R in the variation start performance, reach performance, scroll performance, and jackpot symbol stop performance are the same.

[Full rotation performance B]
FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining full rotation effect B.
First, in full rotation effect B, as shown in FIG. 135(A), a variation start effect is executed. This fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(B), a reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, an ally character CRA is displayed and takes various actions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(C), a scroll effect is executed. In this scroll effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear, and the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R scroll downward in the same pattern state (matched state).

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(D), a jackpot symbol stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern array stop performance is a performance that displays a jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot using the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R by stopping the scrolling decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R. In addition, in this jackpot pattern array stop performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are also stopped and displayed forming a jackpot pattern array. In FIG. 135(D), as a jackpot symbol arrangement, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are used to form a grid of 7 symbols, respectively.

Note that FIGS. 135(A) to 135(D) are performances with the same variation. Furthermore, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R in the variation start performance, reach performance, scroll performance, and jackpot symbol stop performance are the same.

[Full rotation performance C]
FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the full rotation effect C.
First, in the full rotation effect C, as shown in FIG. 136(A), a variation start effect is executed. This fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(B), a reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, an ally character CRA is displayed and takes various actions.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(C), a first scroll effect is executed. In this first scroll effect, the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R are scrolled downward with the same pattern (aligned pattern), and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each in the same pattern (aligned pattern). This is an effect that scrolls downwards when the eyes are closed. The arrangement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R may be scrolled while being synchronized, or may be scrolled without being synchronized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(D), a second scroll effect is executed. In this second scrolling effect, the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R scroll in the same way as the first scrolling effect, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R scroll in a state that is larger than in the first scrolling effect. be. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be scrolled while being smaller than the first scroll effect. Further, the arrangement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, 9R may be scrolled while being synchronized, or may be scrolled without being synchronized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(D), a jackpot symbol stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern array stop production displays a jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot using the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R by stopping the scrolling decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R, and also displays the scrolling decorative patterns 8L, 9C, and 9R. By stopping 8C and 8R, this is an effect that displays a jackpot pattern array representing a jackpot using decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 136(D), as the jackpot symbol arrangement, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are used to form a grid of 7 symbols, respectively.

Note that FIGS. 136(A) to 136(D) are performances with the same variation. Furthermore, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R in the variation start performance, reach performance, scroll performance, and jackpot symbol stop performance are the same.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the full rotation performance, a variation start performance is performed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R, and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are used as jackpot symbols. The configuration is such that a scroll effect is performed that scrolls in an array. According to this configuration, since the scroll effect is executed using the decorative patterns 9L, 9C, and 9R smaller than the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the game. I can do it.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed when the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R are scrolled in the scrolling performance in the full-rotation performances A and B. . According to this configuration, attention can be drawn to the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R, thereby increasing the interest of the game.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the full rotation presentations B and C, the jackpot symbol arrangement is stopped and displayed using both the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the jackpot symbol stop processing. I have to. According to this configuration, it is possible to firmly emphasize the jackpot to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R do not change in the full rotation performance. According to this configuration, it is possible to attract attention to game effects other than scroll effects, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the full rotation performance C, the sizes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from the first scroll performance to the second scroll performance. According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by the inflection of the decorative patterns.

[Modified example]
Below, examples of modified effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R in the variable start performance, reach performance, scroll performance, and jackpot symbol stop performance are the same in the full rotation performances A to C. The present invention is not limited to this, and each may be different, or only some effects may be different. For example, the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R in the variable start performance and reach-to-win performance may be different from the sizes of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, and 9R in the scroll performance and jackpot pattern stop performance.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear during the scrolling effects in the full rotation effects A and B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, During the scroll effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may disappear for a moment. Furthermore, during the scroll effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may continue to be displayed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D9-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that causes a first decorative pattern to vary,
The second display performance is a performance that fluctuates a second decorative pattern smaller than the first decorative pattern,
The third display performance is a performance that performs a full rotation performance in which the second decorative symbols are scrolled in a jackpot pattern arrangement,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, a third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D9-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance that performs a non-display performance in which the first decorative pattern is not displayed,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the fourth display performance,
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is being performed, the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D9-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display performance is a performance that uses the first decorative pattern to stop and display the jackpot pattern array, and further uses the second decorative pattern to stop and display the jackpot pattern array,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the fifth display performance,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D9-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The size of the second decorative pattern in the second display performance and the second decorative pattern in the third display performance do not change;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D9-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display performance is a performance in which the size of the first decorative pattern changes,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the sixth display performance,
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is being performed, the sixth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The countdown variation effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 137 to 139. This countdown fluctuating performance can be executed during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the countdown fluctuation performance, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. This is a display effect that is displayed on the screen.

[Countdown variation effect A]
FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining countdown variation effect A. In countdown variation effect A, first, the countdown display of FIG. 137(A) is executed. Specifically, first, the numerical image IN1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The numerical image IN1 is a numerical value of a specific value, which is written in Roman letters here. Note that although the numerical image IN1 is written in Roman letters here, it may be written in other ways. Further, although 4 is shown here as a numerical value, this is also an example, and the numerical value can be any value. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a.

Next, the forward variation effect shown in FIG. 137(B) is executed. Specifically, after displaying the numerical image IN1, variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is started. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward and begin to fluctuate in the forward direction appearing from above the display screen 7a. The medium decorative pattern 8C has already been displayed in a variable manner.

Next, the right decorative pattern before stop effect shown in FIG. 137(C) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L is being displayed in a stopped state and the middle decorative pattern 8C is being displayed in a variable manner, the fluctuation of the right decorative pattern 8R is decelerated. And the number that is stopped and displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L (here "6")
After the speed is decelerated to such an extent as to make the player think that the right decorative symbol 8R having the same numerical value as , is stopped and displayed, the right decorative symbol sliding stop display shown in FIG. 137(D) is executed. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R, which has the same numerical value (here, "6") that is stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, is not stopped and displayed, and the next number (here, "5") is stopped and displayed. be done.

Next, a countdown display shown in FIG. 137(E) is executed. Specifically, on the display screen 7a, a numerical image IN2 having a numerical value that is one decrement (subtraction) from the numerical image IN1 displayed in FIG. 137(A) is displayed. Here, the numeric image IN2 is an image indicating 3, and is written in Roman letters like the numeric image IN1.

Next, the reverse direction variation effect shown in FIG. 137(F) is executed. Specifically, after displaying the numerical image IN2, variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is started. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move upward and begin to fluctuate in opposite directions appearing from below the display screen 7a. The medium decorative pattern 8C has already been displayed in a variable manner.

Next, the left and right decorative symbol pre-stop performance shown in FIG. 137(G) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the middle decorative pattern 8C is being displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are decelerated in parallel. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have the same numerical value (here, "6"). Then, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, so that the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 137(H) is executed.

[Countdown variation effect B]
FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining countdown variation effect B. The countdown variation effect B differs from the countdown variation effect A in FIG. 137 in the aspect of the numerical image IN1. In the countdown display of FIG. 138(A), a numerical image IN1 surrounded by a frame is displayed on the display screen 7a. Although 1 is shown here as a numerical value, this is also an example, and the numerical value can be any value. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a.

Next, the forward variation effect shown in FIG. 138(B) is executed. Here, the numerical image IN1 continues to be displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R each move downward and begin to fluctuate in the forward direction appearing from above the display screen 7a.

The right decorative symbol before stop display in FIG. 138(C) and the right decorative symbol sliding stop display in FIG. 138(D) are the same as the countdown variation performance A in FIG. 137, except that the numerical image IN1 continues to be displayed. The same is true.

Next, a countdown display shown in FIG. 138(E) is executed. Specifically, first, on the display screen 7a, a numerical image IN2 having a numerical value that is one decrement (subtraction) from the numerical image IN1 displayed in FIG. 138(A) is displayed surrounded by a frame. Here, the numerical image IN2 is an image indicating 0 (zero).

Next, the reverse direction variation effect shown in FIG. 138(F) is executed. Here, the numerical image IN1 continues to be displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R each move upward and begin to fluctuate in the opposite direction appearing from below the display screen 7a.

The left and right decorative pattern before stop effect in FIG. 138(G) and the ready-to-reach effect in FIG. 138(H) are the same as the countdown variation effect A in FIG. 137, except that the numerical image IN2 continues to be displayed.

[Countdown variation effect C]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining countdown variation effect C. The countdown variation effect C is compared with the countdown variation effect A in FIG. 137, and the countdown variation effect B is different from the countdown variation effect A in FIG. The difference is that In the countdown display of FIG. 139(A), a translucent numerical image IN1 and a specific image IMC are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the numerical image IN1 is written in Roman letters, but other writings may be used. The numerical value can be any value. The specific image IMC is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a smiling face. Note that a specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, letters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. etc. are also included. The specific image IMC is displayed overlapping the semi-transparent numerical image IN1. The first movable accessory 14 is in the first mode. That is, it is located in front of the display screen 7a.

Next, the forward variation effect shown in FIG. 139(B) is executed. Here, a specific image IMC is displayed instead of the medium decorative pattern 8C. That is, in a state where the specific image IMC is displayed between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward and appear from above the display screen 7a in the forward direction. to start the fluctuation.

The right decorative symbol before stop display in FIG. 139(C) and the right decorative symbol sliding stop display in FIG. 139(D) are the countdown in FIG. 137, except that the specific image IMC is displayed instead of the middle decorative symbol 8C. This is the same as variation effect A.

Next, a countdown display shown in FIG. 139(E) is executed. Specifically, first, on the display screen 7a, a numerical image IN2 whose numerical value is 1 decrement (subtraction) from the numerical image IN1 displayed in FIG. 139(A) and a specific image IMC are displayed. . Here, the numerical image IN2 is an image indicating 3 in Roman letters, and is displayed semitransparently like the numerical image IN1. The specific image IMC is displayed overlapping the semi-transparent numerical image IN2.

Next, the reverse direction variation effect shown in FIG. 139(F) is executed. Here, a specific image IMC is displayed instead of the medium decorative pattern 8C. That is, in a state where the specific image IMC is displayed between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move upward and appear from the bottom of the display screen 7a in the opposite direction. to start the fluctuation.

The effect before the left and right decorative symbols stop in FIG. 139(G) and the reach effect in FIG. 139(H) are the same as the countdown variation effect A in FIG. 137, except that the specific image IMC is displayed instead of the middle decorative symbol 8C. The same is true.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of countdown variation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, the first effect in which the numerical image IN1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, after the second performance, there is a third performance in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed; , and a fourth effect in which a numerical image IN2 that is one decrement from the numerical image IN2 displayed in the first effect is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, after the fourth performance, a reverse fluctuation display is performed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move in the opposite direction to the fluctuation display. The fifth effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, in the third performance, the reach performance using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not executed, and after the fifth performance, the decorative symbol 8L , 8C, and 8R perform a reach effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, in the fifth performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move from the bottom to the top. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modification of the above-mentioned countdown variation effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the forward fluctuation performance is started after the countdown display. However, after the countdown display, other effects may be performed before the forward fluctuation effect. For example, a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state may be displayed. The same applies between the countdown display and the reverse direction fluctuation effect. Further, the countdown variation effect described above may include a part of each effect shown in FIGS. 137 to 139. For example, the countdown variation effect does not need to include the right decorative symbol sliding stop effect.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the forward variation effect is such that the decorative pattern moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. However, the forward fluctuation performance may be a performance with a variation mode other than this. For example, the forward variation performance may be a performance in which a decorative pattern moves from the left to the right of the display screen 7a. The same applies to the reverse direction variation performance.

[Modification 3]
In the countdown variation effect described above, the countdown display was executed twice (for example, in FIG. 137(A) and FIG. 137(E)). However, the number of times the countdown is displayed can be set to an arbitrary number. For example, in countdown variation effect A, FIGS. 137(A) to 137(D) may be repeated multiple times, and then FIGS. 137(E) to 137(H) may be executed. At this time, the numerical image IN1 is sequentially decremented by 1.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D10-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a numerical image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the numerical image is displayed on the display means;
After the first performance, a second performance in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D10-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D10-1,
a third performance in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the second performance;
After the third effect, a fourth effect is displayed in which a numerical image that is one decrement from the numerical image displayed in the first effect is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D10-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D10-2,
After the fourth performance, a fifth performance can be performed in which a reverse fluctuation display is performed in which the decorative pattern moves in a direction opposite to the fluctuation display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D10-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D10-3,
In the third performance, the reach performance using the decorative pattern is not executed,
After the fifth performance, a reach performance is performed using the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D10-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D10-3 or aspect D10-4,
In the fifth performance, the decorative pattern moves from the bottom to the top.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation section image superimposition effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 140 to 142. This operation unit image superimposition effect may be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation part image superimposition effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it. This is a display effect displayed on the screen 7a.

[Operation unit image superimposition effect A]
FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image superimposition effect A. In operation unit image superimposition effect A, first, the specific image/operation unit image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 140(A) is executed. Specifically, first, the operation unit image BI1, the first specific image IC1, and the character image IW1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation unit image BI1 is an image showing the appearance of the operation means provided in the gaming machine 1, and here represents the appearance of the performance button 63. Note that the operation unit image BI1 may represent the appearance of an operation means other than the production button 63 as long as it is an operation means provided in the gaming machine 1. The first specific image IC1 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents the shape of a smiling face. Note that a specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, including images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, letters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. etc. are also included. The operation unit image BI1 is displayed so as to cover a portion of the lower side of the first specific image IC1. The character image IW1 represents characters related to the operation method of the operation unit image BI1. Here, "Press!" is displayed as a character related to the operation method of the effect button 63 represented by the operation unit image BI1. In addition, when the operation unit image BI1 represents the performance button 63, other examples of character images related to the operation method include "repeat hit" and "PUSH". The character image IW1 is displayed overlapping the first specific image IC1.

Next, the movement effect corresponding to the specific image shown in FIG. 140(B) is executed. Specifically, the first specific image IC1 moves in a direction corresponding to the operating direction of the operating unit image BI1. Here, the first specific image IC1 moves (vibrates) in the vertical direction. That is, the operation direction of the effect button 63 represented by the operation section image BI1 is the up-down direction. For example, when the first specific image IC1 represents the handle 60, the first specific image IC1 rotates left and right.

Next, the specific image enlarging effect shown in FIG. 140(C) is executed. Specifically, the second specific image IC2 is displayed instead of the first specific image IC1. The second specific image IC2 is an image representing the same specific object as the first specific image IC1, and is larger in size than the first specific image IC1. That is, in the specific image enlarging effect, by switching from the first specific image IC1 to the second specific image IC2, an effect is performed in which an image representing a specific object (here, a smiling face) is enlarged. Similar to the first specific image IC1, a portion of the lower side of the second specific image IC2 is covered with the operation unit image BI1. The character image IW1 is continuously displayed and is displayed overlapping the second specific image IC2.

Next, the movement effect corresponding to the specific image shown in FIG. 140(D) is executed. Specifically, like the first specific image IC1, the second specific image IC2 moves in the direction corresponding to the operating direction of the operating unit image BI1. That is, it vibrates in the vertical direction. Through a series of flows shown in FIGS. 140(A) to 140(D), an effect is performed in which the first specific image IC1 vibrating in the vertical direction is switched to the second specific image IC2 vibrating in the vertical direction.

Next, the specific image enlarging effect shown in FIG. 140(E) is executed. Specifically, the third specific image IC3 is displayed instead of the second specific image IC2. The third specific image IC3 is an image representing the same specific object as the second specific image IC2, and is larger in size than the second specific image IC2. That is, by the specific image enlarging effect shown in FIGS. 140(C) and 140(E), the first specific image IC1 is switched to the second specific image IC2, and further, the second specific image IC1 is switched to the third specific image IC2. As a result, an image representing a specific object (in this case, a smiling face) gradually becomes larger in size. Similar to the first specific image IC1 and the second specific image IC2, a portion of the lower side of the third specific image IC3 is covered by the operation unit image BI1. The character image IW1 is continuously displayed and is displayed overlapping the third specific image IC3.

Next, the movement effect corresponding to the specific image shown in FIG. 140(F) is executed. Specifically, like the first specific image IC1 and the second specific image IC2, the third specific image IC3 moves in the direction corresponding to the operating direction of the operating unit image BI1. That is, it vibrates in the vertical direction. Through the series of steps in FIGS. 140(A) to 140(F), the first specific image IC1 vibrating in the vertical direction is switched to the second specific image IC2 vibrating in the vertical direction, and then An effect of switching to the vibrating third specific image IC3 is performed.

[Operation unit image superimposition effect B]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image superimposition effect B. The operation section image superimposition effect B differs from the operation section image superposition effect A in FIG. 140 in the manner in which the specific image changes. In the specific image/operation unit image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 141(A), a first operation unit image BI1, a first specific image IC1, and a first character image IW1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The points other than the character content of the first character image IW1 are the same as the specific image/operation part image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 140(A).

Next, the enlargement/corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 141(B) is executed. Specifically, the first specific image IC1 gradually becomes larger and moves in a direction corresponding to the operating direction of the first operating unit image BI1. Here, the first specific image IC1 moves (vibrates) in the vertical direction. That is, the operation direction of the effect button 63 represented by the first operation section image BI1 is the up-down direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 141(C), an enlarging/corresponding movement effect is executed. Specifically, the first specific image IC1 further gradually becomes larger and moves in the direction corresponding to the operating direction of the first operating unit image BI1.

Next, the specific image/operation unit image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 141(D) is executed. Specifically, the display screen 7a displays the second operation unit image AS1, the fourth specific image IC4, and the second character image IW.
2 is displayed. The second operation unit image AS1 is an image showing the appearance of the operation means provided in the gaming machine 1, and here, it shows the appearance of the sword member 64 including the sword button 65. The fourth specific image IC4 is an image representing a specific object, and here represents a smile shape different from that of the first specific image IC1. The second operation unit image AS1 is displayed so as to partially cover the fourth specific image IC4. The second character image IW2 represents characters related to the operation method of the second operation section image AS1. Here, "Push!" is displayed as a character related to the operation method of the sword member 64 represented by the second operation section image AS1. The second character image IW2 is displayed overlapping the fourth specific image IC4.

Next, the enlarging/corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 141(E) is executed. Specifically, the fourth specific image IC4 gradually becomes larger and moves in the direction corresponding to the operating direction of the second operating section image AS1. Here, the fourth specific image IC4 moves in the vertical direction. That is, this is because the operation direction of the sword member 64 represented by the second operation section image AS1 is the vertical direction. Further, the enlargement/corresponding movement effect shown in FIG. 141(F) is executed. Specifically, the fourth specific image IC4 further gradually becomes larger and moves in the direction corresponding to the operating direction of the second operating section image AS1.

[Operation unit image superimposition effect C]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image superimposition effect C. In operation section image superimposition effect C, first, the specific image/operation section image superposition effect shown in FIG. 142(A) is executed. Specifically, an operation unit image BI1, a specific image IC1, and a first character image IW1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. This is the same as the specific image/operation unit image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 140(A), except that the specific image IC1 does not move up and down.

Next, the specific image visibility difficulty effect shown in FIG. 142(B) is executed. Specifically, when the player operates the effect button 63, the specific image IC1 explodes and disappears, making the specific image IC1 difficult to see. At this time, the operation unit image BI1 and the second character image IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The second character image IW2 is a character indicating that an operation by the player has been detected, and is displayed here as "Yay!". Next, as shown in FIG. 142(C), the operation unit image visibility difficulty effect is executed. Specifically, the operation unit image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the specific image IC1 and the second character image IW2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Next, a specific image change effect shown in FIG. 142(D) is executed. Specifically, the aspect of the specific image IC1 changes. A change in aspect means, for example, a change in color or shape. Here, the color of the specific image IC1 changes from the first color to the second color. Note that the color of the specific image IC1 may be changed in a manner in which the first color and the second color are alternately repeated.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation unit image superimposition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 140 to 142, with the first specific image IC1 being displayed on the display screen 7a, the operation unit image is displayed so as to cover at least a portion of the first specific image IC1. A first effect in which BI1 is displayed and a second effect in which, after the first effect, a second specific image IC2 larger than the first specific image IC1 is displayed can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 140 to 142, after the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which a third specific image IC3 larger than the second specific image IC2 is displayed. It is. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 140 to 142, in the second effect, at least a portion of the second specific image IC2 is covered with the operation unit image BI1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 140 to 142, in the third effect, at least a portion of the third specific image IC3 is covered by the operation unit image BI1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 140 to 142, in the first effect, the first specific image IC1 moves in the direction corresponding to the operating direction of the operating unit image BI1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 140 to 142, in the first effect, an image related to the operating method of the operating unit image BI1 is displayed in at least a portion of the first specific image IC1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the operation unit image superimposition effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the operation unit image superimposition effect A in FIG. 140, the operation unit image BI1 covers at least a portion of the first specific image IC1. However, the operation unit image BI1 may cover the entire first specific image IC1. Further, the operation unit image BI1 covers a portion of each of the second specific image IC2 and the third specific image IC3. However, the operation unit image BI1 does not need to cover at least one of the second specific image IC2 and the third specific image IC3.

[Modification 2]
The operation unit image superimposition effects A to C shown in FIGS. 140 to 142 are only some examples, and a part of the series of effects shown in FIGS. 140 to 142 may not be provided. Further, other effects may be included between the series of effects shown in FIGS. 140 to 142. For example, in the operation unit image superimposition effect A in FIG. 140, the specific image enlargement effect is performed twice, but it may be performed once, or three times or more.

[Modification 3]
The operation unit image superimposition effects A to C shown in FIGS. 140 to 142 are only some examples, and even if a part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a in FIGS. 140 to 142 is not displayed, Alternatively, other images may also be displayed. For example, in the operation unit image superimposition effect A of FIG. 140, the character image IW1 may not be displayed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E1-1]
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operating means image representing an appearance of the operating means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific object,
a first effect in which the operating means image is displayed so as to cover at least a portion of the first specific image while the first specific image is displayed on the display means;
After the first performance, a second performance in which a second specific image larger than the first specific image is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
After the second performance, a third performance can be executed in which a third specific image larger than the second specific image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1 or aspect E1-2,
In the second effect, at least a portion of the second specific image is covered with the operation means image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
In the third effect, at least a portion of the third specific image is covered with the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4,
In the first effect, the first specific image moves in a direction corresponding to an operating direction of the operating means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5,
In the first effect, an image related to the operating method of the operating means is displayed in at least a portion of the first specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The character appearance effect will be explained below using FIGS. 143 to 145. This character appearance effect may be executed, for example, at the start of the variable display of special symbols.

[Character appearance production A]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining character appearance effect A.
First, in character appearance effect A, as shown in FIG. 143(A), a variation start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the production that starts variation. Further, this variation start effect indicates that the effect mode is mode A, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 143(A). Next, as shown in FIG. 143(B), a first character appearance effect is executed. This first character appearance performance is a performance in which the smiling character E21 appears to fill the edge of the display screen 7a while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, in the first character appearance effect, the smiling character E21 appears so as to fill the edge of the display screen 7a, but it may also appear in a part of the edge of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(C), a second character appearance effect is performed. This second character appearance performance is a performance in which the smiling characters E21 further proliferate from the state of the first character appearance performance to the vicinity of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In this case, in the second character appearance effect, the smiling characters E21 multiply (move) toward the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. That is, the smiling characters E21 are multiplying (moving) toward a predetermined spot. Next, as shown in FIG. 143(D), a mode change effect is executed. This mode change performance is a performance that changes the performance mode from mode A to mode B, and is a performance in which a mode B image E22 is displayed. Mode B image E22 is an image that suggests mode B.
Note that FIGS. 143(A) to 143(D) are effects of the same variation.

[Character appearance B]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining character appearance effect B.
First, in character appearance effect B, as shown in FIG. 144(A), a variation start effect is executed. In this variation start production, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the production that starts variation. Further, this variation start effect indicates that the effect mode is mode A, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 144(A). Next, as shown in FIG. 144(B), a first character appearance effect is performed. This first character appearance performance is a performance in which the smiling character E21 appears to fill the edge of the display screen 7a while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In the first character appearance effect, the smiling character E21 appears so as to fill the edge of the display screen 7a, but it may also appear in a part of the edge of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 144(C), a second character appearance effect is executed. In this second character appearance production, the smiling characters E21 further proliferate from the state of the first character appearance production to the vicinity of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and finally, the smiling characters E21 fill up the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols This is an effect where 8L, 8C, and 8R become invisible.

In this case, in the second character appearance effect, the smiling characters E21 multiply (move) toward the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. That is, the smiling characters E21 are multiplying (moving) toward a predetermined spot. Next, as shown in FIG. 144(D), a mode change effect is executed. This mode change performance is a performance that changes the performance mode from mode A to mode B, and is a performance in which a mode B image E22 is displayed. Mode B image E22 is an image that suggests mode B.
Note that FIGS. 144(A) to 144(D) are effects of the same variation.

[Character appearance production C]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining character appearance effect C.
First, in character appearance effect C, as shown in FIG. 145(A), a variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are effects that start variation. Further, this variation start effect indicates that the effect mode is mode A, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 145(A). Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), a first character appearance effect is executed. This first character appearance performance is a performance in which the smiling character E21 appears filling the edge of the display screen 7a while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R include the smiling pattern E23 along with the numerical pattern. The smiling pattern E23 is the same image as the smiling character E21. Note that the smiling pattern E23 may be partially the same as the smiling character E21. Moreover, a part of the smiling face pattern E23 and a part of the smiling character E21 may be the same. Furthermore, in the first character appearance effect, the smiling character E21 appears so as to fill the edge of the display screen 7a, but may instead appear in a part of the edge of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 145(C), a second character appearance effect is performed. In this second character appearance production, the smiling characters E21 further proliferate from the state of the first character appearance production to the vicinity of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and finally, the smiling characters E21 fill up the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols This effect makes 8L, 8C, and 8R invisible.

In this case, in the second character appearance effect, the smiling characters E21 multiply (move) toward the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. That is, the smiling characters E21 are multiplying (moving) toward a predetermined spot. Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), a mode change effect is executed. This mode change performance is a performance that changes the performance mode from mode A to mode B, and is a performance in which a mode B image E22 is displayed. Mode B image E22 is an image that suggests mode B.
Note that FIGS. 145(A) to 145(D) are effects of the same variation.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character appearance effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effect, a first character appearance effect in which a smiling character E21 appears is performed, and then a second character appearance effect in which more smiling characters E21 appear than in the first character appearance effect is performed. A performance is performed, and then a mode change performance is performed. According to this configuration, as the number of smiling characters E21 increases, the expectation for transition to the mode change performance increases, and the transition to the mode change performance may occur, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second character appearance effect of the character appearance effect includes an effect in which the smiling character E21 moves toward the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. According to this configuration, since the smiling character E21 moves toward the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effects B and C, the smiling character E21 is configured to completely cover the display screen 7a in the second character appearance effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to give an impact to the player and improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, in the character appearance performance C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R having the same smiling symbol E23 as the smiling character E21 are changed in the first character appearance performance. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the smiling character using the smiling character E21 and the smiling symbol E23, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effect, the mode change effect is executed after the second character appearance effect. According to this configuration, as the number of smiling characters E21 increases, the expectation level of changing the mode increases, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Modified examples of character appearance effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the smiling character E21 appears while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the character appearance effects A to C. It is not limited. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the smiling character E21 appears while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, in the character appearance effects A to C, the mode change effect is executed after the second character appearance effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the second character appearance performance, performances such as a chance-up performance, a look-ahead performance, a jackpot suggestion performance, a pseudo-continuation performance, a jackpot notification performance, a reach preview performance, etc. may be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance performances A to C, an accessory movable performance may be performed in which the second movable accessory 15, which is the same character as the smiling character E21, is moved.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance in which a first character performance in which a predetermined character appears,
The second display performance is a performance in which a second character performance is performed in which more of the predetermined characters appear than in the first character performance,
The third display performance is a performance that performs a predetermined performance,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The second display effect includes an effect in which the predetermined character moves toward a predetermined position on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the predetermined character covers a predetermined area of the display means,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the fourth display performance,
In the combination effect, after the second display effect is performed, the fifth display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display performance is a performance that changes the decorative pattern,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the fifth display performance,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed while the fifth display effect is being performed,
A part of the decorative pattern and a part of the predetermined character have the same shape;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The predetermined performance is a mode change performance for changing the mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The suspended connection suggestion effect will be explained below using FIGS. 146 to 148. This pending series suggestion performance may be executed, for example, at the start of the variable display of special symbols.

[Suspended connection suggestion performance A]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the suspension connection suggestion performance A.
First, in the holding combination suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 146(A), a first specific holding effect is executed. This first specific reservation performance is a performance that targets the first specific reservation and predicts whether the target reservation is a jackpot or not, and a button image E31 is shown. The button image E31 is an image for prompting the player to press the production button 63. This first specific hold performance, for example, uses the first hold as the first specific hold and predicts whether the first hold is a jackpot or not. Further, this first specific reservation performance, for example, uses the first reservation and the second reservation as the first specific reservation, and predicts whether the first reservation or the second reservation is a jackpot or not.

For example, if there are 4 holds, the oldest hold will be the 1st hold, the next oldest hold will be the 2nd hold, the next oldest hold will be the 3rd hold, and the newest hold will be the 4th hold. . This also applies to the following. If there is a jackpot in the first specific hold, the first specific hold effect is followed by a hold success effect shown in FIG. 146(B). On the other hand, if there is no jackpot in the first specific hold, the first specific hold effect is followed by a hold consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 146(C).

After the first specific hold effect, a hold consecutive success effect may be executed, as shown in FIG. 146(B). When the player presses the performance button 63, this holding consecutive success effect displays a light image E33 in the place where the button image E31 was, indicating that there is a jackpot in the first specific holding, Below the light image E33, a character image E32 indicating that there is a jackpot in the first specified reservation is displayed. The light image E33 is an image showing how the light is shining, and the character image E32 is an image showing the characters "success". After the first specific hold effect, a hold consecutive failure effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 146(C). In this hold consecutive failure effect, even if the player presses the effect button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the text image suggests that there is no jackpot in the first specific hold. Display E34. The character image E34 is an image representing the characters "failure".

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(D), a second specific hold effect is executed. This second specific reservation performance is a performance that targets a second specific reservation different from the first specific reservation and predicts whether the target reservation is a jackpot or not, and a button image E31 is shown. This second specific hold performance, for example, sets the third hold as the second specific hold and predicts whether the third hold is a jackpot or not. In addition, this second specific hold performance, for example, uses the third hold and the fourth hold as the second specific hold, and predicts whether the third hold or the fourth hold is a jackpot or not. If there is a jackpot in the second specific hold, the second specific hold effect is followed by a hold success effect shown in FIG. 146(E). On the other hand, if there is no jackpot in the second specific hold, the second specific hold effect is followed by a hold consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 146(F).

After the second specific suspension performance, as shown in FIG. 146(E), a suspension series success performance may be executed. In this holding success effect, when the player presses the effect button 63, a light image E33 is displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, indicating that there is a jackpot in the first specific holding, and Below the light image E33, a character image E32 indicating that there is a jackpot in the first specified reservation is displayed. After the second specific hold effect, a hold consecutive failure effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 146(F). In this hold consecutive failure effect, even if the player presses the effect button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the text image suggesting that there is no jackpot in the first specific hold. Display E34.
Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 146(A) to (F) are effects with the same variation.

[Suspended connection suggestion performance B]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the suspension-related suggestion performance B. This suspension series suggestion performance B is a performance when there are at least four suspensions.
First, in the holding combination suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. 147(A), a first holding effect is executed. This first reservation performance is a performance for predicting whether the first reservation is a jackpot or not, and a button image E31 is shown. The button image E31 is an image for prompting the player to press the production button 63.

If there is a jackpot in the first hold, after the first hold effect, the process shifts to the hold consecutive success effect shown in FIG. 147(B). On the other hand, if there is no jackpot in the first hold, the first specific hold effect is followed by a hold consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 147(C).

After the first hold effect, a hold consecutive success effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 147(B). When the player presses the performance button 63, this holding consecutive success effect displays a light image E33 in the place where the button image E31 was, and also displays a light Below the image E33, a character image E32 indicating that there is a jackpot on the first reservation is displayed. The light image E33 is an image showing how the light is shining, and the character image E32 is an image showing the characters "success". After the first hold effect, a hold consecutive failure effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 147(C). In this holding series failure effect, even if the player presses the effect button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the character image E34 indicating that there is no jackpot in the first hold is displayed. Display. The character image E34 is an image representing the characters "failure".

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(D), a second hold effect is executed. This second reservation performance is a performance for predicting whether the second reservation is a jackpot or not, and a button image E31 is shown. If there is a jackpot in the second hold, the second hold effect is followed by a hold success effect shown in FIG. 147(E). On the other hand, if there is no jackpot in the second hold, the second hold effect is followed by a hold consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 147(F). After the second hold effect, a hold success effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 147(E). When the player presses the performance button 63, this holding success effect displays a light image E33 in the place where the button image E31 was, and also displays a light Below the image E33, a character image E32 indicating that there is a jackpot on the second reservation is displayed.

After the second hold performance, as shown in FIG. 147(F), a hold consecutive failure performance may be executed. In this holding series failure effect, even if the player presses the effect button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the text image E34 is displayed indicating that there is no jackpot in the second hold. Display. Next, as shown in FIG. 147(G), the third hold effect is executed. This third reservation performance is a performance for predicting whether the third reservation is a jackpot or not, and a button image E31 is shown. If there is a jackpot in the third hold, after the third hold effect, the process shifts to the hold consecutive success effect shown in FIG. 147(H). On the other hand, if there is no jackpot in the third hold, after the third hold effect, the process shifts to the hold consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 147(I).

After the third hold performance, a hold consecutive success performance may be executed as shown in FIG. 147(H). When the player presses the performance button 63, this holding consecutive success effect displays a light image E33 in the place where the button image E31 was, indicating that there is a jackpot in the third hold; Below the image E33, a character image E32 indicating that there is a jackpot on the third reservation is displayed. After the third hold performance, as shown in FIG. 147(I), a hold consecutive failure performance may be executed. In this holding series failure effect, even if the player presses the effect button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the character image E34 indicating that there is no jackpot in the third hold is displayed. Display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(J), a fourth hold effect is executed. This fourth reservation performance is a performance for predicting whether the fourth reservation is a jackpot or not, and a button image E31 is shown. If there is a jackpot in the fourth hold, after the fourth hold effect, the process shifts to the hold consecutive success effect shown in FIG. 147(K). On the other hand, if there is no jackpot in the fourth hold, after the fourth hold effect, the process shifts to the hold consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 147(L). After the fourth hold performance, a hold consecutive success performance may be executed as shown in FIG. 147(K). When the player presses the effect button 63, this holding consecutive success effect displays a light image E33 in the place where the button image E31 was, indicating that there is a jackpot in the fourth hold; Below the image E33, a character image E32 indicating that there is a jackpot on the fourth reservation is displayed. After the fourth hold performance, as shown in FIG. 147(L), a hold consecutive failure performance may be executed. In this holding series failure effect, even if the player presses the effect button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the text image E34 is displayed indicating that there is no jackpot in the fourth hold. Display.
Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 147(A) to (L) are effects of the same variation.

[Suspended connection suggestion performance C]
FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining the suspension combination suggestion effect C.
First, in the holding combination suggestion performance C, as shown in FIG. 148(A), the holding performance is executed. This hold effect is a play that predicts whether the hold is a jackpot or not, and a button image E31 is shown. The button image E31 is an image for prompting the player to press the production button 63. If the hold is a jackpot, after the hold effect, the process moves to the hold success effect shown in FIG. 148(B). On the other hand, if the hold is not a jackpot, after the hold effect, the process shifts to the hold consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 148(C). After the holding performance, as shown in FIG. 148(B), a holding success performance may be executed. When the player presses the performance button 63, this hold consecutive success effect suggests that the hold is a jackpot in the place where the button image E31 was (suggests that the change will lead to a jackpot) The optical image E33 is displayed, and a character image E32 suggesting that the hold is a jackpot (suggesting that the fluctuation is a jackpot) is displayed below the optical image E33. The light image E33 is an image showing how the light is shining, and the character image E32 is an image showing the characters "success". After the hold effect, a hold consecutive failure effect may be executed, as shown in FIG. 148(C). In this hold consecutive failure effect, even if the player presses the effect button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the text image suggests that there is no jackpot in the first specific hold. Display E34. The character image E34 is an image representing the characters "failure".

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(D), the first specific suspension effect is executed. This first specific reservation performance is a performance for predicting whether the first specific reservation is a jackpot or not, and a button image E31 is shown. This first specific hold performance, for example, uses the first hold as the first specific hold and predicts whether the first hold is a jackpot or not. Further, this first specific reservation performance, for example, uses the first reservation and the second reservation as the first specific reservation, and predicts whether the first reservation or the second reservation is a jackpot or not. If there is a jackpot in the first specific hold, the first specific hold effect is followed by a hold success effect shown in FIG. 148(E). On the other hand, if there is no jackpot in the first specific hold, after the first specific hold effect, the process shifts to the hold consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 148(F). After the first specific hold effect, a hold consecutive success effect may be executed, as shown in FIG. 148(E). When the player presses the performance button 63, this holding consecutive success effect displays a light image E33 in the place where the button image E31 was, indicating that there is a jackpot in the first specific holding, Below the light image E33, a character image E32 indicating that there is a jackpot in the first specified reservation is displayed. After the first specific hold effect, a hold consecutive failure effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 148(F). In this hold consecutive failure effect, even if the player presses the effect button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the text image suggests that there is no jackpot in the first specific hold. Display E34.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(G), a second specific hold effect is executed. This second specific reservation performance is a performance that targets a second specific reservation different from the first specific reservation and predicts whether the target reservation is a jackpot or not, and a button image E31 is shown. This second specific hold performance, for example, sets the third hold as the second specific hold and predicts whether the third hold is a jackpot or not. In addition, this second specific hold performance, for example, uses the third hold and the fourth hold as the second specific hold, and predicts whether the third hold or the fourth hold is a jackpot or not. If there is a jackpot in the second specific hold, the second specific hold effect is followed by a hold success effect shown in FIG. 148(H). On the other hand, if there is no jackpot in the second specific hold, the second specific hold effect is followed by a hold consecutive failure effect shown in FIG. 148(I). After the second specific suspension performance, as shown in FIG. 148(H), a suspension series success performance may be executed. When the player presses the performance button 63, this holding consecutive success effect displays a light image E33 in the place where the button image E31 was, indicating that there is a jackpot in the first specific holding, Below the light image E33, a character image E32 indicating that there is a jackpot in the first specified reservation is displayed. After the second specific suspension performance, as shown in FIG. 148(I), a suspension series failure performance may be executed. In this hold consecutive failure effect, even if the player presses the effect button 63, the light image E33 is not displayed in the place where the button image E31 was, and the text image suggests that there is no jackpot in the first specific hold. Display E34.
Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 148(A) to (I) are effects with the same variation.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the suspended connection suggestion effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the holding combination suggestion performances A and C, after the first specific holding performance, success in holding combination, or failure in holding combination, the second specific holding performance, success in holding combination, or failure in holding combination is executed. Ru. In addition, in the holding combination suggestion performance B, after the first holding performance, the success of the holding sequence, or the failure of the holding sequence, the second holding performance, the success of the holding sequence or the failure of the holding sequence, is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest two or more pending combinations, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the holding combination suggestion performance is executed in the same variation. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify a plurality of pending combinations with a single change, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in addition to a plurality of pending combination suggestions, in the holding combination suggestion performance C, if the fluctuation is a jackpot, a performance suggesting that the fluctuation is a jackpot is executed. ing. According to this configuration, in addition to the notification of a plurality of pending series, it is possible to notify the jackpot of the fluctuation, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the holding series suggestion performance is performed within a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game. According to this configuration, when the lingering feeling after a jackpot is strong, it is possible to suggest a pending series, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the holding series suggestion performance is performed during the jackpot game. According to this configuration, the jackpot game can be made more interesting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the suspended connection suggestion performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the suspended combination suggestion performances A to C are performances with the same fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and part of the suspension combination suggestion performance is performed with future fluctuations. You can do it like this. For example, in the suspended combination suggestion performance A, FIGS. 146(A) to 146(C) may be performed with the corresponding variation, and FIGS. 146(D) to 146(F) may be performed with the next variation.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the holding combination suggestion effects A to C may be performed within a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game. Moreover, the pending series suggestion performances A to C may be performed during a jackpot game.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the holding combination suggestion effect B is an example of the effect when there are four holds, but when there are three holds, the processes shown in FIGS. 148(A) to (I) are performed. 148(A) to (F) when there are two holds, or perform the steps in FIGS. 148(A) to (C) when there is one hold. ).

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that performs a first hold combination suggestion performance that suggests whether or not there is a jackpot in the first hold;
The second display performance is a performance that performs a second hold combination suggestion performance that suggests whether there is a jackpot in a second hold different from the first hold,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The combination performance is performed in the same variation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is a performance that, in the case of a jackpot in the fluctuation, performs a fluctuation jackpot suggesting performance that suggests that the fluctuation is a jackpot;
The combination effect includes the fifth display effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The first hold suggestion performance or the second hold suggestion performance is performed within a predetermined number of fluctuations after the jackpot game;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The first hold suggestion performance or the second hold suggestion performance is performed during a jackpot game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The area display effects will be explained below using FIGS. 149 to 151. This area display effect may be executed, for example, at the start of variable display of special symbols.

[Area display effect A]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining area display effect A.
First, in area display effect A, as shown in FIG. 149(A), a variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to vary, and the pending display area C41 is displayed. The pending display area C41 shows a pending image 9A and a pending digested image 9C. Next, as shown in FIG. 149(B), a first area display effect is executed. In this first area display effect, the first area E41 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 149(C), a second area display effect is executed. In this second area display effect, the second area E42 is displayed on the right periphery of the display screen 7a. In this second area display effect, the state of the first area E41 is the same as in the first area display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(D), a second area movement effect is executed. In this second area movement effect, the second area E42 is moved upward. Specifically, the second area E42 moves based on the hold display area C41. However, the second area E42 is not limited to this, and the second area E42 can also be used for other reference positions (for example, the second reservation icon 9C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, corners of the display screen 7a, reference points appearing on the display screen 7a). You can move to the standard. In this second area display effect, the state of the first area E41 is the same as in the first area display effect. Next, as shown in FIG. 149(E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a chance-up display is performed within the second area E42. This chance-up display is expressed as "super hot," suggesting that there is a high expectation of a jackpot.

[Area display effect B]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining area display effect B.
First, in area display effect B, as shown in FIG. 150(A), a variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to vary, and the pending display area C41 is displayed. The pending display area C41 shows a pending image 9A and a pending digested image 9C. Next, as shown in FIG. 150(B), the first area display effect is executed. In this first area display effect, the first area E41 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(C), a second area display effect is executed. In this second area display effect, the second area E42 is displayed on the right periphery of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, in this second area display performance, the first area E41 is reduced in size compared to the first area display performance. Next, as shown in FIG. 150(D), a second area movement effect is executed. In this second area movement effect, the second area E42 moves upward while expanding. Specifically, the second area E42 moves based on the hold display area C41. However, the second area E42 is not limited to this, and the second area E42 can also be used for other reference positions (for example, the second reservation icon 9C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, corners of the display screen 7a, reference points appearing on the display screen 7a). You can move to the standard. In this second area display effect, the state of the first area E41 is reduced compared to the second area display effect. Next, as shown in FIG. 150(E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a chance-up display is performed within the second area E42. This chance-up display is expressed as "super hot," suggesting that there is a high expectation of a jackpot. In this chance-up effect, the first area E41 is completely destroyed.

[Area display effect C]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining area display effect C.
First, in area display effect C, as shown in FIG. 151(A), a variation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to vary, and the pending display area C41 is displayed. The pending display area C41 shows a pending image 9A and a pending digested image 9C. Next, as shown in FIG. 151(B), a first area display effect is executed. In this first area display effect, the first area E41 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 151(C), a second area display effect is executed. In this second area display effect, the second area E42 is displayed on the right periphery of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this second area display performance, the first area E41 rotates counterclockwise about the hold display area C41 as the rotation axis, and a part of it disappears from the display screen 7a, so that during the first area display performance will be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(D), a second area movement effect is executed. In this second area movement effect, the second area E42 rotates counterclockwise about the hold display area C41 as the rotation axis, and the area of the second area E42 is expanded. In this second area display effect, the first area E41 rotates counterclockwise about the hold display area C41 as the rotation axis, and a part of the area disappears from the display screen 7a, so that the first area E41 is further moved than in the second area display effect. Reduced. Next, as shown in FIG. 151(E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a chance-up display is performed within the second area E42. This chance-up display is expressed as "super hot," suggesting that there is a high expectation of a jackpot. In this chance-up effect, the first area E41 is completely destroyed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of area display effects is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the area display effect, a first area display effect is performed, then a second area display effect is performed, then a second area movement effect is performed, and then a chance up effect is performed. It becomes. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a predetermined sense of anticipation by changing the area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in area display effects B and C, after the second area display effect that displays the second area E42, a second area movement effect that enlarges the second area E42 is executed. . According to this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the second area E42, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the area display effects B and C, after the second area display effect that displays the second area E42, the second area movement effect that reduces the first area E41 is executed. . According to this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention more to the second area E42, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the area display effects B and C, after the second area display effect to display the second area E42, the second area movement effect to reduce the first area E41 is executed, and further, the second area movement effect to reduce the first area E41 is executed. A chance-increasing performance to eliminate one area E41 is executed. According to this configuration, the second area E42 can be emphasized, that is, the effect using the second area E42 can be further emphasized. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when moving the second area E42 in the area display performance C, the second area E42 is rotated and moved using the hold display area C41 as the rotation axis. According to this configuration, the movement of the second area E42 can be performed dynamically, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, modified examples of area display effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the area display effects A to C, after the second area movement effect, the second area E42 is used to perform the chance-up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, after the second region movement performance, the second area E42 may be used to perform various performances such as a mode suggestion performance, a look-ahead performance, a jackpot suggestion performance, a reach preview performance, and a hold change suggestion performance.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect that causes a first area to be displayed on the display screen of the display means,
The second display performance is a performance that displays a second area on the display screen of the display means,
The third display performance is a performance that moves the second area with respect to a certain standard,
The fourth display performance is a performance that performs a predetermined performance in the second area,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, then the third display effect is performed, and then the fourth display effect is performed. It is carried out,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display performance is a performance for enlarging the second area,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display performance is a performance that reduces the first area,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the sixth display performance,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect 3,
A seventh display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The seventh display performance is a performance that causes the first area to disappear,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the seventh display performance,
In the combination effect, the seventh display effect is performed after the sixth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The third display performance is a performance that rotates and moves the second area with respect to a certain reference axis,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The time-saving mode effect will be explained below using FIGS. 152 to 154. This time-saving mode performance may be executed, for example, at the start of the variable display of special symbols.

[Time-saving mode production A]
FIG. 152 is a diagram for explaining time-saving mode effect A. This time-saving mode performance A represents the performance when the two fluctuations are off. When the gaming state is in the time saving state, such performance at the time of loss continues to be performed. First, in the time-saving mode performance A, as shown in FIG. 152(A), the variable performance is executed. This variation performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed. Next, as shown in FIG. 152(B), a losing symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This missed pattern array stop performance is a performance that uses the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to stop the missed symbol array that represents a miss. In FIG. 152(B), 7 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8L and 6 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8C and the decorative symbol 8R as a mismatched symbol arrangement.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(C), the next variation effect is executed. This next variation performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed. Next, as shown in FIG. 152(D), a losing symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This missed pattern array stop performance is a performance that uses the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to stop the missed symbol array that represents a miss. In FIG. 152(D), 7 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8L and 6 symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8C and the decorative symbol 8R as a mismatched symbol arrangement. In this way, in the time-saving mode performance A, the failure notification is performed in a relatively short period of time after the fluctuation is started, without intervening time-consuming performances such as reach performance.

[Time-saving mode production B]
FIG. 153 is a diagram for explaining time-saving mode effect B. This time-saving mode performance B is a performance performed when the gaming state is a time-saving state, and represents a variation performance in which the player wins a jackpot after a loss performance by one variation. First, in time-saving mode performance B, as shown in FIG. 153(A), the variable performance is executed. This variation performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(B), a losing symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This missed pattern array stop performance is a performance that uses the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to stop the missed symbol array that represents a miss. In FIG. 153(B), seven symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8L, and six symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8C and the decorative symbol 8R as a mismatched symbol arrangement. Next, as shown in FIG. 153(C), the next variation effect is executed. This next variation performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(D), a jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern array stop performance is a performance that uses the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to stop the jackpot pattern array that represents a jackpot. In FIG. 153(D), a row of seven symbols is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as a jackpot symbol arrangement. In this manner, in the time-saving mode performance B, even if the fluctuation is a jackpot, the jackpot notification is performed in a relatively short time after the fluctuation is started without intervening time-consuming performances such as reach performance.

[Normal mode performance]
FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the normal mode effect. This normal mode performance is a performance performed when the gaming state is the normal state, and represents a performance when the game loses by one variation. First, in the normal mode performance, the variable performance is executed as shown in FIG. 154(A). This variation performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(B), a reach effect is executed. In this Li performance, a reach state is formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the ally character CRA performs various performances. Next, as shown in FIG. 154(C), a losing symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This missed pattern array stop performance is a performance that uses the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to stop the missed symbol array that represents a miss. In FIG. 154(C), seven symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8L, and six symbols are used for the decorative symbol 8C and the decorative symbol 8R as a mismatched symbol arrangement. In addition, when the gaming state is the normal state, when a jackpot is achieved, a jackpot notification is performed via a reach effect. In addition, when the gaming state is the normal state, in the case of a loss, relatively short effects such as those shown in FIGS. 152 (A), (B) and 152 (C), (D) are also included.

When the game state is in the time saving state (time saving), the time saving mode performance A shown in FIGS. 152(A) and 152(B) and FIGS. 152(C) and 152(D) continues to be performed until a jackpot is achieved. That is, in the variation in the case of a loss in the time-saving state (loss variation), the time-consuming effect such as a reach effect is not executed, so the variation time is relatively short. On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation when the gaming state is the normal state, as shown in the normal mode performance in FIG. 154, a relatively long performance such as a reach performance may be performed, and the fluctuation time is relatively long.
In addition, in the case of a jackpot in a time-saving state (jackpot variation), since time-consuming effects such as reach effects are not executed, the variation time is relatively short. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation when the gaming state is the normal state, a relatively long performance such as a reach performance may be performed, and the fluctuation time is relatively long. In other words, in the out-of-time fluctuations in the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time is relatively short. On the other hand, the average fluctuation time is relatively long for fluctuations outside the normal state.
In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation in the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time is relatively short. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot fluctuation, the average fluctuation time is relatively long.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of time-saving mode performance and normal mode performance are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the time-saving mode performance, in the case of a miss, after the decorative symbols start to fluctuate, a performance is performed in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol arrangement without going through the reach state, and normally In the mode performance, in the case of a miss, after the decorative symbols start changing, a performance is performed in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a symbol arrangement through a reach state. According to this configuration, in the time-saving mode performance, it becomes possible to perform the game at high speed, and it becomes possible to quickly obtain the next jackpot. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the time-saving mode performance continues the loss fluctuation performance of FIGS. (See Modification 1 below). According to this configuration, it becomes possible to perform high-speed consumption up to a predetermined number of fluctuations after a jackpot, and it becomes possible to quickly obtain the next jackpot. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the time-saving mode performance continues to perform the losing fluctuation performance of the time-saving mode performance A shown in FIGS. 152(A), (B) and 152(C), (D) until a jackpot is achieved. . According to this configuration, it becomes possible to perform high-speed digestion until the jackpot is reached, and it becomes possible to quickly obtain the next jackpot. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the normal mode production includes a production in which after the decorative symbols start to fluctuate, the decorative symbols go through the ready-to-reach state and are stopped and displayed in the pattern array, and after the decorative symbols start to fluctuate, the ready-to-win state is displayed. One of a plurality of performances is performed, including a performance in which decorative patterns are removed without passing through the display and stopped and displayed in the pattern arrangement. According to this configuration, in the normal mode performance, it is possible to provide a performance that can be enjoyed by a player with a short time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the time-saving mode performance is shorter than the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the normal mode performance. According to this configuration, in the time-saving mode performance, it becomes possible to perform the game at high speed, and it becomes possible to quickly obtain the next jackpot. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, modified examples of the time-saving mode performance and the normal mode performance are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the gaming state is in the time-saving state (time-saving mode), the time-saving mode performance A shown in FIGS. Although the configuration is such that the deviation variation effect is continuously performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the gaming state is in the time-saving state (during time-saving), unless there is a jackpot, the deviation fluctuations in FIGS. 152(A), (B) and 152(C), (D) The performance may be continued.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that performs a first mode performance that enters after the first jackpot,
The second display performance is a performance that performs a second mode performance that enters after a second jackpot that is different from the first jackpot,
In the first mode production, after the decorative symbols start to fluctuate, a loss variation production is performed in which the loss symbols are confirmed and stopped without going through the reach state,
In the second mode performance, after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, a reach variation performance is performed in which the winning pattern is confirmed and stopped via the reach state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
In the first mode production, the loss variation production continues until a predetermined number of variations after the first jackpot.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
In the first mode performance, the loss fluctuation performance continues until the next jackpot after the first jackpot.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
In the second mode production, one of a plurality of variation productions including the reach variation production and the loss variation production is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
In the first mode production, the variation time in the jackpot variation is shorter than the variation time in the reach variation production.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, using FIGS. 155 to 157, a performance without a suspended sequence, a performance with a suspended sequence, and a resurrection performance will be explained. These performances are executed, for example, after a predetermined number of rotations have passed after a jackpot game during time saving, the last variation in a time saving state, the first variation after a jackpot game, or the last variation in a probability variable state. obtain.

[Production without hold sequence]
FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating the no-retention effect.
First, in the no-suspension effect, a fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 155(A). This variation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed. Next, a suggestion effect is performed that suggests the presence or absence of a pending jackpot (see FIG. 146(A) and the like described above). Next, as shown in FIG. 155(B), a no-holding series suggestion effect is executed. In this no-retention suggestion effect, a button image E61 and a character image E62A are displayed. The button image E61 is an image that does not include a light image E64, which will be described later, and is an image that suggests that there is no jackpot on hold. The character image E62A is also an image that suggests that there is no jackpot in the hold, and is an image that represents the word "failure". Next, as shown in FIG. 155(C), a result effect is executed. In this result performance, a result screen E63 is displayed. This result screen E63 is an image that suggests the end of the time-saving state, and represents the number of RUSHs (number of consecutive attempts) and the number of balls acquired during RUSH (during time-saving and consecutive attempts).
When this performance without a pending series ends, the time saving state (RUSH) ends.
Note that FIGS. 155(A), (B), and (C) are effects of the same variation.

[Production with pending series]
FIG. 156 is a diagram for explaining the effect with a series of reservations.
First, in the holding series effect, as shown in FIG. 156(A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. This variation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed. Next, a suggestion effect is performed that suggests the presence or absence of a pending jackpot (see FIG. 146(A) and the like described above). Next, as shown in FIG. 156(B), the presence of a pending series suggestion effect is executed. In this suspension series suggestion effect, a button image E61, a character image E62B, and a light image E64 are displayed. The light image E64 is an image showing a shining state, and is an image suggesting that there is a jackpot in the hold. Further, the character image E62B is also an image that suggests that there is no jackpot in the hold, and is an image representing the character "success". Next, as shown in FIG. 156(C), a jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern array stop performance is a performance that uses the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to stop the jackpot pattern array that represents a jackpot. In FIG. 156(C), a row of seven symbols is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as a jackpot symbol arrangement. Note that FIGS. 156(A) and 156(B) are effects of this variation, and FIG. 156(C) is a subsequent variation, which is a variation that is a jackpot in the hold.
When this performance with a series of reservations ends, the game becomes a jackpot game, and thereafter, the time saving state (RUSH) continues.

[Resurrection performance]
FIG. 157 is a diagram for explaining the revival effect.
First, in the revival effect, as shown in FIG. 157(A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. This variation start performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, various characters appear, and various displays are performed.

Next, a suggestion effect is performed that suggests the presence or absence of a pending jackpot (see FIG. 146(A) and the like described above). Next, as shown in FIG. 157(B), a no-holding series suggestion effect is executed. In this no-retention suggestion effect, a button image E61 and a character image E62A are displayed. The button image E61 is an image that does not include a light image E64, which will be described later, and is an image that suggests that there is no jackpot on hold. The character image E62A is also an image that suggests that there is no jackpot in the hold, and is an image that represents the word "failure".

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(C), a result effect is executed. In this result performance, a result screen E63 is displayed. This result screen E63 is an image that suggests the end of the time saving state, and represents the number of RUSHs (number of consecutive attempts), and the number of balls acquired during RUSH (during time saving, during consecutive attempts). Next, as shown in FIG. 157(D), a movable accessory effect is performed. This accessory movable performance is a performance in which a display suggesting that there is a jackpot in the hold is displayed, and the second movable accessory 15 moves to become the second mode (see FIG. 48). As a display suggesting that there is a jackpot in the hold, a special symbol is stopped at the decorative pattern 8C in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a jackpot suggestion image E65 in the hold is displayed. This on-hold jackpot suggestion image E65 has a description of "It's coming soon." In this accessory movable performance, a lamp performance is performed using the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66. These performances can suggest that there is a big hit on hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(E), a jackpot symbol arrangement stop effect is executed. This jackpot pattern array stop performance is a performance that uses the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to stop the jackpot pattern array that represents a jackpot. In FIG. 157(E), as a jackpot pattern arrangement, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to form a grid of 7 patterns.
When this revival performance ends, the game becomes a jackpot game, and thereafter, the time saving state (RUSH) continues. Note that FIGS. 157(A) to 157(D) are effects of this variation, and FIG. 157(E) is a subsequent variation, which is a variation that is a jackpot in the hold.
When this performance with a series of reservations ends, the game becomes a jackpot game, and thereafter, the time saving state (RUSH) continues.

[Effect example]
Below, examples of effects of a performance without a suspended sequence, a performance with a suspended sequence, and a revival performance are shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the revival performance, a suggestion performance is performed that suggests the presence or absence of a pending jackpot, then a result performance is performed, and then a display (accessories) suggesting that there is a pending jackpot is performed. Movable performance) is executed. According to this configuration, the player is disappointed by the result performance, but afterwards, the player is able to experience great joy when the accessory movable performance is performed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, in the revival performance, when a display suggesting that there is a jackpot on hold is displayed, a performance that moves the second movable accessory 15 is executed. According to this configuration, by moving the second movable accessory 15, it is possible to emphasize that there is a jackpot on hold, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, when a display suggesting that there is a jackpot on hold is displayed in the revival performance, a lamp performance is executed using the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize that there is a jackpot on hold by the lamp effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after a display suggesting that there is a jackpot on hold is displayed in the revival performance, a jackpot symbol arrangement stop performance is executed. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the jackpot soon after recognizing the pending series, and can improve the interest of the game.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when forming a jackpot pattern array with the jackpot pattern arrangement stop effect in the revival effect, a special pattern is used for at least one of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to create the jackpot pattern. form an array (see Variation 2 above). According to this configuration, the player can obtain the reserved series from the resurrection after the result presentation, and therefore can obtain great pleasure and improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, modified examples of a performance without a suspended sequence, a performance with a suspended sequence, and a resurrection performance are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot game is performed in FIGS. 155(B) and (C) without a pending series, in FIG. 156(B) with a pending series, and in FIGS. 157(B) to (D) with a revived production. It may be executed during

[Modification 2]
In the revival production of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol arrangement stop production shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there is a jackpot in the hold, a special symbol may be used for at least one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to form a jackpot symbol arrangement.

[Modification 3]
In the no-suspension effect or the revival effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the color of the result screen E63 is changed in the result effect shown in FIG. 155(C) or the result effect shown in FIG. 157(C), By making a predetermined character appear, the degree of expectation for continuation of the time saving state (RUSH) (hereinafter also referred to as the degree of expectation for revival) may be suggested. For example, in the result presentation shown in FIG. 155(C), the probability of setting the color of the result screen E63 to blue, which has low expectations for revival, is set high, and in the result presentation shown in FIG. By setting a high probability of making the result screen E63 red, the player can recognize that if it is blue when the result screen E63 appears, the player has low expectations for revival, and if the result screen E63 is red, can be recognized as having high expectations for revival.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing multiple types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that performs a suggestive performance that suggests the presence or absence of a pending jackpot,
The second display performance is a performance that displays a result image when it is suggested in the suggestion performance that there is no jackpot on hold;
The third display performance is a performance that displays an image suggesting that there is a jackpot on hold,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance that performs a moving role model,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is being performed, the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a lamp effect using a decorative lamp,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the fifth display performance,
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is being performed, the fifth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display performance is a performance that displays a jackpot pattern arrangement using decorative patterns,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the sixth display performance,
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is performed, the sixth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect 4,
The jackpot pattern arrangement using the decorative pattern includes a specific pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The right hit holding effect will be explained below using FIGS. 158 to 160. This right hit hold performance is a game state in which it is easier to win a specific winning hole such as a starting hole or a big winning hole by hitting right, and includes a normal state, a jackpot state, a high probability state, a time saving state, and a power saving state. This can be executed during chew support (a state in which the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it becomes easier to win at the second starting port 21, hereinafter also referred to as "electric support").

[Right-handed holding performance A]
FIG. 158 is a diagram for explaining the right-handed play holding effect A.
In the right-handed hold performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 158(A), a time-saving (electronic support) start performance that is performed when a jackpot game due to a specific jackpot ends is executed. In this time saving (electronic support) start effect, the characters "Start time saving!" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and below the characters "Start time saving!" A right-handed arrow YAR is displayed to encourage hitting. In the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR, a message MGU consisting of the words "Right-handed" is displayed. By hitting right when prompted by the right-hand arrow YAR, the player easily places the game ball into the second starting opening 21 (electric support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it is easier to win. You can win the prize. Note that when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, the display screen 7a starts to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner that is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(B), a right-handed hold charge effect is executed. This right-hitting holding charge performance is a performance that prompts the occurrence of a hold related to the second starting port 21 by winning a game ball by hitting right into the second starting port 21 which is in the power support state in a time-saving state. In this right-handed hold charging effect, the characters "Start time saving!" are erased, and instead, a predetermined character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and an effect that urges the occurrence of a hold is performed. A right-handed arrow YAR is displayed on the right side and slightly below the character CRA. Here, the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 158(B) is larger and displayed closer to the right than that shown in FIG. 158(A). Furthermore, the message MGU for "right-handed hitting" shown in FIG. 158(B) is larger than that shown in FIG. 158(A), and its display position is in the upper left corner from the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. It is displayed protruding from the screen. In other words, the "right-handed hitting" message MGU shown in FIG. 158(B) is displayed so as to partially overlap the display area of the right-handed hitting arrow YAR from the front side. A message MG1 consisting of the characters "CHARGE" is displayed within the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. That is, in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 158(B), a message MG1 of "CHARGE" is displayed instead of the "right-handed" message MGU shown in FIG. 158(A). This "CHARGE" message MG1 is a display that prompts the occurrence of a hold, and more specifically, the message MG1 of "CHARGE" is a display that prompts the occurrence of a hold, and more specifically, the occurrence of a hold related to the second start hole 21 by placing a game ball into the second start hole 21 during electric support. This is a prompting display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(C), a right hit holding MAX effect is executed. This right-handed hold MAX performance is a performance that suggests that the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum. That is, the right-hand hit pending charge effect shown in FIG. 158(B) is executed, and then, when the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 reaches the maximum, the display screen 7a is switched from the right-hand hit held charge effect to be performed. It's a performance. That is, the right-handed hold charge performance shown in FIG. 158(B) is a performance that is continuously displayed until the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 reaches the maximum. In this right-handed hold MAX effect, the character CRB is displayed to the right of the character CRA, and these characters CRA and CRB perform effects that suggest that the number of holds has reached the maximum. A right-handed arrow YAR is displayed on the lower right side of these characters CRA and CRB. Here, the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 158(C) is smaller than those shown in FIGS. 158(A) and (B), and its display position is displayed closer to the lower right. There is. Furthermore, the message MGU for "right-handed hitting" shown in FIG. 158(C) is displayed smaller than those shown in FIGS. 158(A) and (B). Note that the display mode of the message MGU for "Right-handed batting" shown in FIG. 158(C) is the same as that of FIG. 158(B), and it protrudes from the display area of the right-handed batting arrow YAR to the upper left, and a portion of the "Right-handed batting arrow YAR" is displayed. They are displayed so as to overlap from the front side of the YAR display area. A message MG2 consisting of the characters "MAX" is displayed within the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. That is, in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 158(C), a message MG2 of "MAX" is displayed instead of the message MG1 of "CHARGE" shown in FIG. 158(B). This "MAX" message MG2 is a display to notify that the number of reservations has reached the maximum, and more specifically, it is a display to notify that the number of reservations related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum. .

In other words, in the right-hand hit holding effect A shown in FIG. A production that prompts the occurrence of a hold related to the second starting port 21 by placing a game ball in a prize (right hit pending charging performance), and then suggests that the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum. The effect (right play pending MAX effect) is executed by displaying messages in various manners in association with the game state in the display area of the right play arrow YAR.

[Right-handed holding performance B]
FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the right-handed play reservation effect B.
In the right-handed hold performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 159(A), a time-saving (electronic support) start performance that is performed when a jackpot game due to a specific jackpot ends is executed. In this time saving (electronic support) start effect, the characters "Start time saving!" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and below the characters "Start time saving!" A right-handed arrow YAR is displayed to encourage hitting. In the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR, a message MGU consisting of the words "Right-handed" is displayed. By hitting right when prompted by the right-hand arrow YAR, the player easily places the game ball into the second starting opening 21 (electric support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it is easier to win. You can win the prize. Note that when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, the display screen 7a starts to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner that is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(B), a hold promotion notification effect is executed. In this hold promotion notification performance, the characters "Time saving start!" and the right arrow YAR are deleted, and instead, a message MGL consisting of the characters "TRY CHARGE" is displayed on the display screen 7a. This hold promotion notification performance is a performance that urges the occurrence of a hold related to the second starting port 21. The hold promotion notification effect is displayed in a large size to almost fill up the display screen 7a, and no other images are displayed at all. Note that the hold promotion notification performance is a performance that is notified in a relatively short period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) in consideration of the time required for the hold to occur.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(C), a right-handed hold charge effect is executed. This right-hitting holding charge performance is a performance that prompts the occurrence of a hold related to the second starting port 21 by winning a game ball by hitting right into the second starting port 21 which is in the power support state in a time-saving state. In this right-handed hold charge effect, the message MGL of "TRY CHARGE" is erased, and instead, a predetermined character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and an effect that urges the occurrence of hold is performed. Before the right-handed hold charge effect shown in FIG. 159(C) is executed, the hold promotion notification effect shown in FIG. This makes it possible to more reliably encourage the occurrence of reservations. A right-handed arrow YAR is displayed to the right and slightly below the character CRA. Here, the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 159(C) is larger and displayed closer to the right than that shown in FIG. 159(A). Furthermore, the message MGU for "right-handed hitting" shown in FIG. 159(C) is larger than that shown in FIG. 159(A), and its display position is in the upper left corner from the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. It is displayed protruding from the screen. That is, the message MGU for "right-handed hitting" shown in FIG. 159(C) is displayed so as to partially overlap the display area of the right-handed hitting arrow YAR from the front side. A message MG1 consisting of the characters "CHARGE" is displayed within the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. That is, in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 159(C), a message MG1 of "CHARGE" is displayed instead of the "right-handed" message MGU shown in FIG. 159(A). This "CHARGE" message MG1 is a display prompting the occurrence of a hold, and has almost the same meaning as the "TRY CHARGE" message MGL shown in FIG. 159(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(D), a pending non-MAX notification effect is executed. In this pending non-MAX notification performance, a message MGN consisting of the words "NO FULL CHARGE" is displayed on the display screen 7a. This message MGN of "NO FULL CHARGE" is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds after the message MGL of "TRY CHARGE" shown in FIG. This is displayed when the hold related to the second starting port 21 has not reached the maximum even after 10 seconds) have elapsed. In other words, when the hold reaches the maximum before the predetermined time elapses, this hold non-MAX notification effect is not executed. By displaying the message MGN of "NO FULL CHARGE" by this hold non-MAX notification performance, the player is informed that the hold related to the second starting port 21 has not reached the maximum yet.
Next, as shown in FIG. 159(E), a right hit holding MAX effect is executed. This right-handed hold MAX performance is a performance that suggests that the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum. That is, the right-hand hit pending charge effect shown in FIG. 159(C) is executed, and then, when the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 reaches the maximum, the display screen 7a is switched from the right-hand hit held charge effect to be performed. It's a performance. That is, the right-handed hold charge performance shown in FIG. 159(C) is a performance that is continuously displayed until the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 reaches the maximum. In this right-handed holding MAX production, the character CR is placed to the right of the character CRA.
B is displayed, and these characters CRA and CRB perform a performance that suggests that the number of reservations has reached the maximum. A right-handed arrow YAR is displayed on the lower right side of these characters CRA and CRB. Here, the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 159(E) is smaller than those shown in FIGS. 159(A) and (C), and its display position is displayed closer to the lower right. There is. Furthermore, the message MGU for "right-handed hitting" shown in FIG. 159(E) is displayed smaller than those shown in FIGS. 159(A) and (C). Note that the display mode of the "Right-handed batting" message MGU shown in FIG. 159(E) is the same as that of FIG. 159(C), and it extends to the upper left from the display area of the right-handed batting arrow YAR, and a portion of the "Right-handed batting" message MGU extends beyond the display area of the right-handed batting arrow YAR. They are displayed so as to overlap from the front side of the YAR display area. A message MG2 consisting of the characters "MAX" is displayed within the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. That is, in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 159(E), a message MG2 of "MAX" is displayed instead of the message MG1 of "CHARGE" shown in FIG. 159(C). This "MAX" message MG2 is a display to notify that the number of reservations has reached the maximum, and more specifically, it is a display to notify that the number of reservations related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum. .

In other words, in the right-hand hit holding effect B shown in FIG. A production that prompts the occurrence of a hold related to the second starting port 21 by placing a game ball in a prize (right hit pending charging performance), and then suggests that the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum. The effect (right play pending MAX effect) is executed by displaying messages in various manners in association with the game state in the display area of the right play arrow YAR. Furthermore, by performing a performance that prompts the occurrence of a hold related to the second starting port 21 (a holding promotion notification performance) before the right hit pending charge performance is executed, the player is alerted and the second starting port 21 The system is designed to more reliably encourage the occurrence of reservations related to

[Right-handed holding performance C]
FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining the right-handed hold effect C.
In the right-handed hold effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 160(A), a time-saving (electronic support) start effect is executed when a jackpot game due to a specific jackpot ends. In this time saving (electronic support) start effect, the characters "Start time saving!" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and below the characters "Start time saving!" A right-handed arrow YAR is displayed to encourage hitting. In the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR, a message MGU consisting of the words "Right-handed" is displayed. By hitting right when prompted by the right-hand arrow YAR, the player easily places the game ball into the second starting opening 21 (electric support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it is easier to win. You can win the prize. Note that when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, the display screen 7a starts to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner that is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(B), a hold promotion notification effect is executed. In this hold promotion notification performance, the characters "Time saving start!" and the right arrow YAR are deleted, and instead, a message MGL1 consisting of the characters "TRY CHARGE" is displayed on the display screen 7a. This hold promotion notification performance is a performance that urges the occurrence of a hold related to the second starting port 21. The hold promotion notification effect is displayed in a large size to almost fill up the display screen 7a, and no other images are displayed at all. Note that the hold promotion notification performance is a performance that is notified in a relatively short period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) in consideration of the time required for the hold to occur.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(C), a right-handed hold charge effect is executed. This right-hitting holding charge performance is a performance that prompts the occurrence of a hold related to the second starting port 21 by winning a game ball by hitting right into the second starting port 21 which is in the power support state in a time-saving state. In this right-handed hold charge effect, the message MGL1 of "TRY CHARGE" is erased, and instead, a predetermined character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a to perform an effect that urges the occurrence of hold. Before the right-handed hold charge effect shown in FIG. 160(C) is executed, the hold promotion notification effect shown in FIG. This makes it possible to more reliably encourage the occurrence of reservations. A right-handed arrow YAR is displayed to the right and slightly below the character CRA. Here, the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 160(C) is larger and displayed closer to the right than that shown in FIG. 160(A). Furthermore, the message MGU for "right-handed hitting" shown in FIG. 160(C) is larger than that shown in FIG. 160(A), and its display position is in the upper left corner from the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. It is displayed protruding from the screen. In other words, the "right-handed hitting" message MGU shown in FIG. 160(C) is displayed so as to partially overlap the display area of the right-handed hitting arrow YAR from the front side. A message MG1 consisting of the characters "CHARGE" is displayed within the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. That is, in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 160(C), a message MG1 of "CHARGE" is displayed instead of the "right-handed" message MGU shown in FIG. 160(A). This "CHARGE" message MG1 is a display prompting the occurrence of a hold, and has almost the same meaning as the "TRY CHARGE" message MGL1 shown in FIG. 160(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(D), a right hit holding MAX effect is executed. This right-handed hold MAX performance is a performance that suggests that the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum. That is, the right-hand hit pending charge effect shown in FIG. 160(C) is executed, and then, when the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 reaches the maximum, the display screen 7a is switched from the right-hand hit held charge effect to be performed. It's a performance. In other words, the right-handed hold charge performance shown in FIG. 160(C) is a performance that is continuously displayed until the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 reaches the maximum. In this right-handed hold MAX effect, the character CRB is displayed to the right of the character CRA, and these characters CRA and CRB perform effects that suggest that the number of holds has reached the maximum. A right-handed arrow YAR is displayed on the lower right side of these characters CRA and CRB. Here, the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 160(D) is smaller than those shown in FIGS. 160(A) and (C), and its display position is displayed closer to the lower right. There is. Furthermore, the “right-handed hitting” message MGU shown in FIG. 160(D) is displayed smaller than those shown in FIGS. 160(A) and (C). Note that the display mode of the "Right-handed player" message MGU shown in FIG. 160(D) is the same as that in FIG. 160(C), and it protrudes from the display area of the right-handed player arrow YAR to the upper left, and a portion of the message MGU indicates "Right-handed player". They are displayed so as to overlap from the front side of the YAR display area. A message MG2 consisting of the characters "MAX" is displayed within the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. That is, in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 160(D), a message MG2 of "MAX" is displayed instead of the message MG1 of "CHARGE" shown in FIG. 160(C). This "MAX" message MG2 is a display to notify that the number of reservations has reached the maximum, and more specifically, it is a display to notify that the number of reservations related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(E), the maximum pending notification effect is executed. In this maximum pending notification performance, the characters CRA, CRB and the right arrow YAR are deleted, and instead, a message MGL2 consisting of the characters "FULL CHARGE" is displayed on the display screen 7a. This maximum hold notification performance is a performance to notify that the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum. The maximum pending notification effect is displayed in a large size to almost fill the entire display screen 7a, and no other images are displayed at all. Note that the hold promotion notification performance is a performance that is notified in a relatively short period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds). After the right-handed hold MAX effect shown in FIG. 160(D) is executed and it is suggested that the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum, the hold maximum notification effect shown in FIG. 160(E) is executed. This makes it possible to alert the player and more reliably notify that the number of reservations related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum.

In other words, in the right-handed hold performance C shown in FIG. A production that prompts the occurrence of a hold related to the second starting port 21 by placing a game ball in a prize (right hit pending charging performance), and then suggests that the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum. The effect (right play pending MAX effect) is executed by displaying messages in various manners in association with the game state in the display area of the right play arrow YAR. Furthermore, by performing a performance that prompts the occurrence of a hold related to the second starting port 21 (a holding promotion notification performance) before the right hit pending charge performance is executed, the player is alerted and the second starting port 21 The system is designed to more reliably encourage the occurrence of reservations related to Furthermore, by performing a performance to notify that the number of reservations related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum (maximum reservation notification performance) after executing the right-handed reservation MAX performance, the player is alerted. It becomes possible to more reliably notify that the number of reservations related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum.

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of the right-handed hold performance.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, the first display that can be displayed when the ball is in a gaming state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the predetermined starting hole by hitting the ball to the right. It is possible to display a display that prompts you to hit the ball to the right, and a second display that notifies you that the number of reservations has reached the maximum. The configuration is such that it can be displayed on the first display when the number of reservations related to the mouth reaches the maximum. According to this configuration, the second display can be displayed in various manners in association with the first display. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the second display is configured to be displayed larger than when displayed on the first display after the first display is erased. ing. According to this configuration, since the notification is made after indicating that the number of reservations related to the predetermined starting opening has reached the maximum, it is possible to alert the player to this fact. As a result, it becomes possible to more reliably notify that the number of reservations related to a predetermined starting port has reached the maximum.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, it is possible to display a display prompting the occurrence of a hold as a third display, and when the first display is displayed, a second display is displayed. The configuration is such that a third display can be displayed on the first display before displaying the display. According to this configuration, it becomes possible to display the third display in various manners in association with the first display. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, the third display is displayed larger than when it is displayed on the first display before the first display is displayed. It is structured so that you can get it. According to this configuration, by displaying the display prompting the occurrence of a hold related to the predetermined starting opening before the display prompting the player to hit right, it is possible to alert the player to this effect. As a result, it becomes possible to more reliably prompt the occurrence of suspension related to a predetermined starting port.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, the second display or the third display is configured to be displayed within the display area of the first display. According to this configuration, the display area of the first display can be effectively utilized, and the second display or the third display can be displayed in various manners in association with the first display. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the right-handed hold presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, in the right-handed play pending charge performance, a message MG1 consisting of the characters "CHARGE" and a character CRA are displayed in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the right-handed hold charge performance, the message MG1 of "CHARGE" may be displayed as if the character CRA is speaking. Furthermore, in this case, "CHARGE" may be pronounced audibly. Similarly, even in the case of the right-hand hit holding MAX effect, it may be performed in accordance with this.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, in the right-hand play reservation MAX effect, when the number of reservations reaches the maximum, a "MAX" message MG2 is displayed within the display area of the right-hand play arrow YAR. In addition to displaying the character CRA, which was one character in the right-handed hold charge performance, another character CRB was added to make it two characters, suggesting that the number of holds was maximized, The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of characters may change depending on the number of reservations. Specifically, the number of characters is increased according to the number of pending characters, such as one character when the number of pending characters is 1, and two characters when the number of pending characters is 2. Then, when the number of pending characters reaches the maximum of four, the message MG2 of "MAX" may be displayed within the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR, and the number of characters may be set to four.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, in the hold promotion notification performance after the time saving (electricity support) start effect is executed, the characters "TRY CHARGE" are displayed and the hold is announced. Although the present invention is designed to promote the occurrence of such occurrence, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to perform a hold promotion notification effect in relation to the last change in time reduction. That is, a predetermined number of variable displays are performed after the start of time saving, and when the number of changes in time saving is one remaining, the hold promotion notification effect is performed. In this case, in the hold promotion notification effect, the characters ``LAST CHARGE'' may be displayed instead of ``TRY CHARGE'' to encourage the occurrence of a hold. By displaying the words "LAST CHARGE" in this manner, it is possible to appeal to the player that the number of reservations should be maximized at the time of the last change in time saving, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, the display position of the "Right-handed player" message MGU extends beyond the display area of the right-handed player arrow YAR to the upper left, and a portion of the message MGU indicates "Right-handed player". Although the display area is displayed so as to overlap from the front side of the display area indicated by the arrow YAR, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position where the "Right-handed player" message MGU protrudes from the display area of the right-handed player arrow YAR is arbitrary as long as it does not overlap with the message within the display area of the right-hander arrow YAR. In addition, the shape, size, and display position of the right-handed arrow YAR are not limited to the above-mentioned examples, and various messages displayed in relation to the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR depending on the gaming state may also be They may be different messages with similar meanings.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first display is a display encouraging right-handed hitting,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display notifying that the number of pending items has reached the maximum,
The first display is a display that can be displayed when in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the ball is easily entered into a predetermined starting hole by hitting the ball to the right,
The second display may be displayed on the first display when the first display is displayed and the number of reservations related to the predetermined starting port reaches a maximum.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E7-2]
The second display may be displayed larger than when displayed on the first display after the first display is erased.
The gaming machine according to aspect E7-1.
[Aspect E7-3]
One of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The third display is a display prompting the occurrence of suspension,
When the first display is displayed, the third display may be displayed on the first display before displaying the second display.
The gaming machine according to aspect E7-1 or aspect E7-2.
[Aspect E7-4]
The third display may be displayed larger than when displayed on the first display before the first display is displayed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E7-3, characterized in that:
[Aspect E7-5]
The second display or the third display is displayed within a display area of the first display,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-3.

Instruction image rendering will be explained below using FIGS. 161 to 163. This instruction image performance is performed during the display of fluctuating decorative symbols, during reach performance (super reach performance), or in game states where it is easier to win in specific winning openings such as starting openings and big winning openings by hitting right. There is a normal state, a jackpot state, a high probability state, a time saving state, and an electric chew support (a state in which the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it is easier to win at the second starting port 21, hereinafter also referred to as "electric support"). ), etc.

[Instruction image production A]
FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining instruction image rendering A.
In instruction image performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 161(A), a button display performance that is performed during variable display of decorative symbols or during a ready-to-reach performance (super reach performance) is executed. In this button display effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a button image BOG indicating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center, and the word "READY" is displayed above the button image BOG. This button image BOG and the display of "READY" give the player a feeling that a performance using the performance button 63 will be executed from now on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(B), a button operation instruction effect is executed. This button operation instruction performance is an image for prompting the player to operate the performance button 63. In other words, it is an image indicating that the performance button 63 is in a valid operation period. Specifically, the button operation instruction performance is such that a downward arrow YAD is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the words "Button PUSH!" are displayed above the downward arrow YAD. . The downward arrow YAD is displayed so as to partially overlap the display area of the button image BOG from the front side, as shown in FIG. 161(B). By this button operation instruction performance, an operation instruction performance that causes the player to press the performance button 63 is executed. Note that a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the valid operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the flange at the bottom of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross hatched part) increases with the elapsed time after the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and when the remaining valid operation period of the effect button 63 runs out, the meter value increases. is displayed as if it is full.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(C), a button operation OK effect is executed. This button operation OK performance is a performance performed when the performance button 63 is operated during the valid operation period of the performance button 63. In this button operation OK effect, the button image BOG is displayed larger than that shown in FIGS. 161(A) and 161(B). Furthermore, within the display area of the button image BOG, a message MG1 of "OK!" is displayed. The large displayed button image BOG and the "OK!" message MG1 suggest to the player that the button operation instruction has been carried out (mission success).

On the other hand, when the performance button 63 is not operated during the valid operation period of the performance button 63, a button operation NO performance is executed as shown in FIG. 161(D). In this button operation NO effect, the button image BOG is displayed smaller than those shown in FIGS. 161(A) and (B), and significantly smaller than that shown in FIG. 161(C). . Furthermore, within the display area of the button image BOG, a message MG2 of "NO!" is displayed. This small displayed button image BOG and the "NO!" message MG2 suggest to the player that the button operation instruction was not carried out (mission failure).

In other words, the instruction image effect A shown in FIG. 161 is executed by displaying messages in various ways in association with the game status in the display area of the button image BOG as an instruction image for instructing the game. It is supposed to be done.

[Instruction image production B]
FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining instruction image rendering B.
In instruction image effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 162(A), a time saving (electricity support) start effect that is performed when a jackpot game due to a specific jackpot ends is executed. In this time-saving (electric support) start effect, the words "Start time-saving!" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and below the words "Start time-saving!" A right-handed arrow YAR is displayed to encourage hitting. In the display area of this right-handed arrow YAR, a message MGU consisting of the characters "Right-handed" is displayed. By hitting right when prompted by the right-hand arrow YAR, the player easily places the game ball into the second starting opening 21 (electric support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it is easier to win. You can win the prize. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, the display screen 7a starts to display a variable display of decorative symbols that is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(B), a right-handed hold charge effect is executed. This right-hitting holding charge performance is a performance that prompts the occurrence of a hold related to the second starting port 21 by winning a game ball by hitting right into the second starting port 21 which is in the power support state in a time-saving state. In this right-handed hold charging effect, the characters "Start time saving!" are erased, and instead, a predetermined character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and an effect that urges the occurrence of a hold is performed. A right-handed arrow YAR is displayed on the right side and slightly below the character CRA. Here, the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 162(B) is larger and displayed closer to the right than that shown in FIG. 162(A). Furthermore, the message MGU for "right-handed hitting" shown in FIG. 162(B) is larger than that shown in FIG. 162(A), and its display position is in the upper left corner from the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. It is displayed protruding from the screen. In other words, the “right-handed hitting” message MGU shown in FIG. 162(B) is displayed so as to partially overlap the display area of the right-handed hitting arrow YAR from the front side. Then, in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR, there is “C”.
A message MG1 consisting of the characters "HARGE" is displayed. That is, in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 162(B), a message MG1 of "CHARGE" is displayed instead of the "right-handed" message MGU shown in FIG. 162(A). This "CHARGE" message MG1 is a display that prompts the occurrence of a hold, and more specifically, the message MG1 of "CHARGE" is a display that prompts the occurrence of a hold, and more specifically, the occurrence of a hold related to the second start hole 21 by placing a game ball into the second start hole 21 during electric support. This is a prompting display. Further, in the left center of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically side by side. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In addition, in the right-handed hold charge effect shown in FIG. 162(B), H1 indicates "0" and H2 indicates "0". That is, it is suggested that the number of reservations for the first special symbol is "0" and the number of reservations for the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(C), a right hit hold icon effect is executed. This right-hitting pending icon performance is performed when the player performs a right-handed hitting in the right-hitting pending charging performance shown in FIG. This figure shows that one item is on hold. In this right-hitting pending icon presentation, images of the pending icon are switched and displayed in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR, starting with the message MG1 of "CHARGE." This hold icon is a hold related to the second starting port 21, and is displayed as "○", with A1 indicating the first hold, A2 the second hold, A3 the third hold, and A4 the fourth hold. There is. In the right-handed hold icon production, one hold related to the second starting port 21 has occurred, so the hold count H1 shows "0", but the hold count H2 changes from "0" to "1". The first reservation A1 is changed from "○" to "●", and the second, third, and fourth reservations A2, A3, and A4 are changed to "○". In other words, the hold icon changes from "○" to "●" to indicate the occurrence of a hold. Note that the right-handed arrow YAR and the "Right-handed shot" message MGU shown in FIG. 162(C) are shown in the same size and at the same display position as those shown in FIG. 162(B). In addition, the character CRA performs a performance that urges the occurrence of a hold, similar to the right-handed hold charge effect shown in FIG. 162(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(D), a right hit pending icon change effect is executed. This right-hand play pending icon change production is based on the right-hand play pending icon display shown in FIG. It shows how it was done. In this right-handed hold icon change production, three holds related to the second starting port 21 have occurred, so the hold number H1 shows "0", but the hold number H2 changes from "1" to "3". , the first pending A1 shows "●", the second pending A2 is changed from "○" to "●", the third pending A3 is changed from "○" to "■", The fourth pending A4 indicates "○". Here, the third reservation A3, which is normally indicated by "●", changes to "■", suggesting that the third reservation A3 is content that can be expected to be a big hit. Specifically, this pending change includes, for example, a change from a white icon to a blue, green, red, or gold icon. Note that the right-handed arrow YAR and the "Right-handed shot" message MGU shown in FIG. 162(D) have the same size and are shown in the same display position as those shown in FIGS. 162(B) and (C). Further, the character CRA performs a performance that urges the occurrence of a hold, similar to the right-hand hit hold charge performance and the right-hand hit hold icon performance shown in FIGS. 162(B) and 162(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(E), a right hit holding MAX effect is executed. This right-handed hold MAX performance is a performance that suggests that the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum. In other words, this is a performance that is performed when the right-handed hold charge effect shown in FIG. 162(B) is executed, and thereafter, the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 reaches the maximum. In this right-handed hold MAX effect, a message MGL consisting of the words "FULL CHARGE" is displayed above the character CRA. This message MGL is produced as if the character CRA is speaking, that is, the character CRA performs a production that suggests that the number of reservations has reached the maximum. A right-handed arrow YAR is displayed on the lower right side of the character CRA. Here, the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 162(E) is smaller and its display position is smaller than that shown in FIGS. 162(A), (B), (C), and (D). , is displayed near the bottom right. Furthermore, the “right-handed hitting” message MGU shown in FIG. 162(E) is displayed smaller than those shown in FIGS. 162(A), (B), (C), and (D). Note that the display mode of the "Right-handed batting" message MGU shown in FIG. 162(E) is the same as that of FIGS. It protrudes and is displayed so as to partially overlap the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR from the front side. A message MG2 consisting of the characters "MAX" is displayed within the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. In other words, this "MAX" message MG2 is not shown, but when all the pending icons (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th pending A1, A2, A3, A4) become "●" , this message is displayed as a hold icon. Therefore, in this right-handed hold MAX effect, four holds related to the second starting port 21 occur, so the hold number H1 shows "0" and the hold number H2 shows "4". In other words, in the right-handed hold MAX production, the number of holds is maximized due to the messages MGL and MG2 of "FULL CHARGE" and "MAX", and more specifically, the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 is maximized. This is a display to inform you that something has happened.

In other words, the instruction image production B shown in FIG. 162 displays messages in various ways in association with the gaming state in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR as an instruction image for instructing the game. It is set to run.

[Instruction image production C]
FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining instruction image rendering C.
In instruction image performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 163(A), a time saving (electricity support) start performance that is performed when a jackpot game due to a specific jackpot ends is executed. In this time-saving (electric support) start effect, the words "Start time-saving!" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and below the words "Start time-saving!" A right-handed arrow YAR is displayed to encourage hitting. In the display area of this right-handed arrow YAR, a message MGU consisting of the characters "Right-handed" is displayed. By hitting right when prompted by the right-hand arrow YAR, the player easily places the game ball into the second starting opening 21 (electric support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it is easier to win. You can win the prize. Further, in FIG. 163(A), a time saving number display ZTC indicating the number of time saving times is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This time saving number display ZTC represents the remaining number of time saving times, and is "5 times" in this example. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 21, the display screen 7a starts to display a variable display of decorative symbols that is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(B), a time-saving final fluctuation suggestion effect is executed. In this time-saving final change suggestion performance, the characters "Start time-saving!" and the right arrow YAR are deleted, and instead, the characters "Last time!" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Therefore, the time saving number display ZTC indicates "one time". That is, the time-saving final variation suggestion performance is a performance that is displayed when the variation display of the decorative pattern related to the second special symbol is performed four times and only one time remains after the time-saving game is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(C), a right-handed hold charge effect is executed. This right-handed hold charge performance is designed to maximize the hold related to the second starting port 21 at the time of the final change in time saving, by hitting the game ball right to the second starting port 21 that is under power support in the time saving state. This is an effect that encourages the winning of a prize and the occurrence of a reservation related to the second starting port 21. In other words, this right-handed hold charge performance suggests that this is the last chance to maximize the hold related to the second starting port 21. In this right-handed hold charge effect, the characters "Last charge!" are erased, and instead, a predetermined character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and an effect is performed to encourage the occurrence of a hold charge. A right-handed arrow YAR is displayed on the right side and slightly below the character CRA. Here, the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 163(C) is larger and displayed closer to the right than that shown in FIG. 158(A). Furthermore, the message MGU for "right-handed hitting" shown in FIG. 158(B) is larger than that shown in FIG. 163(A), and its display position is in the upper left corner from the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. It is displayed protruding from the screen. In other words, the "right-handed hitting" message MGU shown in FIG. 163(C) is displayed so as to partially overlap the display area of the right-handed hitting arrow YAR from the front side. A message MG1 consisting of the characters "CHARGE" is displayed within the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. That is, in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 163(C), a message MG1 of "CHARGE" is displayed instead of the "right-handed" message MGU shown in FIG. 158(A). This "CHARGE" message MG1 is a display that prompts the occurrence of a hold, and more specifically, the message MG1 of "CHARGE" is a display that prompts the occurrence of a hold, and more specifically, the occurrence of a hold related to the second start hole 21 by placing a game ball into the second start hole 21 during electric support. This is a prompting display.
Further, in the left center of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed vertically side by side. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. Here, in the right-handed hold charge effect shown in FIG. 163(C), H1 indicates "0" and H2 indicates "4". That is, it is suggested that the number of reservations for the first special symbol is "0" and the number of reservations for the second special symbol is "4". For example, while the time saving final fluctuation suggestion performance is being executed, a game ball enters the second starting port 21 due to a right hit, and before the right hitting pending charge performance starts, the second starting port 21 has already entered the game ball. This is because the number of reservations related to may reach the maximum. That is, the right-handed pending charge performance shown in FIG. 163(C) is executed even though the number of pending second special symbols has already reached the maximum.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(D), a right hit holding MAX effect is executed. This right-handed hold MAX performance is a performance that suggests that the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 has reached the maximum. In other words, this is a performance that is performed when the right-handed hold charge effect shown in FIG. 162(B) is executed, and thereafter, the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 reaches the maximum. However, in this example, the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 has already reached the maximum before this right-hand ball holding MAX effect is performed, so the right-hand ball holding MAX effect is different from the right-hand ball holding charge effect. This will be done after a short period of time. In this right-handed hold MAX effect, a message MGL consisting of the words "FULL CHARGE" is displayed above the character CRA. This message MGL is produced as if the character CRA is speaking, that is, the character CRA performs a production that suggests that the number of reservations has reached the maximum. A right-handed arrow YAR is displayed on the lower right side of the character CRA. Here, the right-handed arrow YAR shown in FIG. 163(D) is smaller than those shown in FIGS. 163(A) and (C), and its display position is displayed closer to the lower right. There is. Furthermore, the message MGU for "right-handed hitting" shown in FIG. 163(D) is displayed smaller than those shown in FIGS. 162(A) and (C). Note that the display mode of the "Right-handed player" message MGU shown in FIG. 163(D) is the same as that in FIG. 163(C), and it protrudes from the display area of the right-handed player arrow YAR to the upper left, and a portion of the message MGU shows the "Right-handed player" arrow. They are displayed so as to overlap from the front side of the YAR display area. A message MG2 consisting of the characters "MAX" is displayed within the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR. In other words, this "MAX" message MG2 is a message that is displayed in place of the "CHARGE" message MG1. In addition, in the right-hand hit holding MAX performance, the hold number H1 shows "0" and the hold number H2 shows "4", similarly to the right-hand hit hold charge performance. In other words, in the right-handed hold MAX production, the number of holds is maximized due to the messages MGL and MG2 of "FULL CHARGE" and "MAX", and more specifically, the number of holds related to the second starting port 21 is maximized. This is a display to inform you that something has happened.

In other words, the instruction image production C shown in FIG. 163 displays messages in various ways in association with the gaming state in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR as an instruction image for instructing the game. It is set to run. In particular, in the instruction image production C, the instruction image is displayed even when the instruction has already been fulfilled.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the instruction image presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 to 163, it is possible to display an instruction image instructing a game as a first display, and the first effect is a display area of the first display. It is configured to perform performances using . According to this configuration, it is possible to perform various effects related to game instructions using the display area of the first display. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 to 163, the first effect is configured to display a message according to the gaming state on the display area of the first display. According to this configuration, it is possible to perform various effects by associating messages according to the gaming state on the display area of the first display. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 to 163, the message is displayed within the display area of the first display or so as to partially overlap the display area of the first display. It has become. According to this configuration, messages depending on the gaming state can be displayed in various manners in association with each other on the display area of the first display. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the first display is an arrow instructing right-handed play, and the message is configured to display a message related to suspension. According to this configuration, it becomes possible to display messages related to the hold in various manners in association with the display area of the arrow instructing right-handed hitting. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 163, the message is a message prompting the generation of the number of reservations, and the message prompting the generation of the number of reservations is sent even when the number of reservations has already reached the maximum. The configuration is such that it may be displayed even if it exists. According to this configuration, regardless of the number of reservations, it is possible to perform an effect that encourages the generation of the number of reservations on the display area of the arrow instructing right-handed hitting. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 to 163, the display area of the first display is configured to change in size or display position depending on the gaming state. According to this configuration, the display mode of the first display can be variously changed depending on the gaming state. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the instruction image presentation will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 to 163, as instruction images for instructing a game, an image for instructing to operate the effect button 63 and an image for instructing to play right are exemplified. The invention is not limited to this. For example, an image that instructs the user to operate the select button 68 when selecting one from multiple characters or images, or an image that instructs a predetermined mission such as "Reach within 10 minutes!" It may be.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161(C), in the button operation OK effect, the message MG1 of "OK!" is displayed within the display area of the button image BOG. is not limited to this. For example, the "OK!" message MG1 may be displayed so that a part thereof protrudes from the display area of the button image BOG and overlaps the display area of the button image BOG from the front side. Further, in this case, instead of the message "OK!", a message such as "success" or "completed" may be used. In short, any message that suggests the intended meaning is sufficient. Furthermore, in this case, the font, color, etc. may be changed. Note that these modifications may be applied to the button operation NO effect shown in FIG. 161(D).

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 163(B), in the time-saving final change suggestion effect, in order to make the words "Last one time!" that appeal to the player about the final change in time-saving stand out, Although the arrow YAR is not displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the right-handed arrow YAR may be displayed the same as or smaller than that shown in FIG. 163(A). In this case, the display position may be placed at a corner of the display screen 7a or the like so as to be as inconspicuous as possible.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161(B), a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the valid operation period of the production button 63 is displayed on the flange at the bottom of the button image BOG. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, instead of displaying the meter MAT, a timer may be displayed and counted down. Alternatively, instead of displaying the meter MAT on the flange at the bottom of the button image BOG, a meter separate from the button image BOG may be displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 163(D), in the right-handed hold MAX effect, a message MGL of "FULL CHARGE" is displayed above the character CRA, and this message MGL is displayed as if it were a character. Although the effect is made to look like the CRA is talking, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the right-hand hit hold MAX effect, the message MGL of "FULL CHARGE" is not displayed, but the screen of the right-hand hit hold MAX effect is switched, and only the message MGL of "FULL CHARGE" is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. You can also do this.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E8-1]
A production means capable of performing multiple productions,
a display means capable of displaying multiple displays;
A gaming machine comprising:
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first display is a display of an instruction image for instructing a game,
One of the plurality of performances is a first performance,
The first performance is a performance using the display area of the first display,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E8-2]
The first performance displays a message according to the gaming state on the display area of the first display.
The gaming machine according to aspect E8-1.
[Aspect E8-3]
the message is displayed within a display area of the first display;
The gaming machine according to aspect E8-2, characterized in that:
[Aspect E8-4]
The message is displayed so as to partially overlap the display area of the first display.
The gaming machine according to aspect E8-2, characterized in that:
[Aspect E8-5]
The first display is an arrow indicating right-handed hitting,
The message is a message related to suspension;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-2 to E8-4.
[Aspect E8-6]
The message is a message prompting the generation of a pending number, and the message prompting the generation of a pending number may be displayed even when the pending number has already reached the maximum.
The gaming machine according to aspect E8-5.
[Aspect E8-7]
The display area of the first display changes in size or display position depending on the gaming state.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-6.

The V winning remaining time notification effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 164 to 166. This V winning remaining time notification effect is a game state in which it is easier to win a prize in a variable winning hole with a V area by hitting right, and includes a normal state, a jackpot state, a high probability state, a time saving state, and an electric chew support state. (The state in which the electric chew 22 is frequently opened and it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 21, hereinafter also referred to as "electric support"), etc. can be executed.

[V Prize Remaining Time Announcement Performance A]
FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining V winning remaining time notification effect A.
In the V winning remaining time notification performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 164(A), in the above-mentioned V passing scheduled jackpot, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long and goes to the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30. At the start of the round game when it is easy to pass, a right-handed V winning instruction performance is performed. In this right-handed V winning instruction performance, a message MGL consisting of the characters "Aim for V!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and this message MGL has the characters "V" and The text is displayed larger (about twice as large) than the text. Above the message MGL, a right-handed arrow YAR1 is displayed to encourage the player to play right-handed, and within the display area of this right-handed arrow YAR1, a message MGU1 consisting of the words "Right-handed" is displayed. . The player can win the game ball into the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 by hitting the ball to the right as prompted by the display of the right hitting arrow YAR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(B), a remaining time display effect is executed. In this remaining time display effect, the message MGL that says "Aim for V!", the right-handed arrow YAR1, and the message MGU that says "right-handed hit" are erased, and instead, the message "Remaining time 5.00 seconds" is displayed all over the display screen 7a. A remaining time suggestion image NZT is displayed. In this remaining time suggestion image NZT, the number "5.00" is displayed larger (about three times) than other characters. Here, the timing at which the remaining time display effect is executed, that is, the timing at which the remaining time suggestion image NZT is switched and displayed is that the first grand prize opening 30 as a variable winning opening is the first one in which a game ball can enter. This is the timing 5 seconds before the state changes to the second state in which no ball enters the V area 39 even after entering the first state, and no ball enters the V area 39. More specifically, in a round game where it is easy to pass to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30, the time elapsed after the first big prize opening 30 was opened is measured, and this measured time is When reaching 5 seconds before the opening time of the first big prize opening 30, if no ball has entered the V area 39 yet, the remaining time display effect is executed at this timing. In addition, the setting of 5 seconds in this remaining time display performance means that the game ball fired by the player with a right hit when the remaining time display performance is executed passes through the V area 39 in the first grand prize opening 30. However, the time has been set to give you plenty of time to arrive in time. That is, the switching display to the remaining time suggestion image NZT is timed in time for the shot game ball to enter the V area 39.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(C), a remaining time countdown effect is performed. This remaining time countdown effect is an effect in which the remaining time (5 seconds) of the remaining time suggestion image NZT shown in FIG. 164(B) is counted down. In this remaining time countdown effect, the time is counted down in increments of 0.01 seconds, and in this example, the remaining time suggestion image NZT is shown when the time has been counted down to 2.50 seconds. Here, the remaining time suggestion image NZT shown in FIG. 164(C) is displayed smaller than that shown in FIG. 164(B), and the remaining time suggestion image NZT shown in FIG. " has been changed to "Remain until end." Note that in this remaining time suggestion image NZT, the number "2.50" is displayed larger (about twice) than other characters. Further, above and below the remaining time suggestion image NZT, a horizontal band LIN extending to the left and right to fill the display screen 7a is displayed, and within the display area of the band LIN, a right-handed arrow YAR2 and a right-handed arrow YAR2 are displayed. A message MGU2 consisting of the words "Right-handed hitter" is displayed on the left side. That is, the remaining time suggestion image NZT that is performing the countdown is displayed in the upper and lower bands LIN, in other words, between the upper and lower right arrow YAR2 and the message MGU2. The band LIN, right-handed arrow YAR2, and message MGU2 displayed at the top and bottom are the same display, and the right-handed arrow YAR2 and message MGU2 shown in FIG. 164(C) are displayed in the right-handed arrow YAR2 and message MGU2 shown in FIG. The remaining time suggestion image NZT shown in FIG. 164(C) is displayed smaller than the arrow YAR1 and the message MGU1, and especially the numbers in the countdown display are smaller than the arrow YAR1 and the message MGU1. and is displayed in a larger size.

[V winning time remaining time notification performance B]
FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining V winning remaining time notification effect B.
In the V winning remaining time notification performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 165(A), in the above-mentioned V passing scheduled jackpot, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long and goes to the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30. At the start of a round game where it is easy to pass, a right-handed V winning instruction performance is performed. In this right-handed V winning instruction performance, a message MGL consisting of the characters "Aim for V!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The text is displayed larger (approximately twice as large) than the text. Above the message MGL, a right-handed arrow YAR1 is displayed to encourage the player to play right-handed, and within the display area of this right-handed arrow YAR1, a message MGU1 consisting of the words "Right-handed" is displayed. . The player can win the game ball into the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 by hitting the ball to the right as prompted by the display of the right hitting arrow YAR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(B), a remaining time meter display effect is executed. In this remaining time meter display effect, the message MGL "Aim for V!", the right-handed arrow YAR1, and the message MGU "Right-handed" are deleted, and instead, "Remaining time 5.00 seconds" is displayed completely on the display screen 7a. A remaining time suggestion image NZT is displayed. In this remaining time suggestion image NZT, the number "5.00" is displayed larger (about three times) than other characters. Furthermore, a meter image MAT is displayed below the remaining time suggestion image NZT. The meter image MAT has a meter frame MAW and a meter area MAR (the cross-hatched part shown in FIG. 165(C)), and the meter area MAR is a meter that moves within the meter frame MAW. It represents the meter value. The meter frame MAW has a memory (5 to 0) attached above it that represents the remaining time displayed in the remaining time suggestion image NZT, and the meter area MAR has a memory 5 (5.00 seconds) that is the starting point. It moves from there toward memory 0 (0.00 seconds), which is the end point. Note that in the remaining time meter display effect shown in FIG. 165(B), the meter area MAR does not move from "5", which is the starting point. Further, the meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged horizontally below the remaining time suggestion image NZT. Note that the MAN in the meter image MAT will be described later. Here, the timing at which the remaining time meter display effect is executed, that is, the timing at which the remaining time suggestion image NZT is switched and displayed is when the first big prize opening 30 as a variable winning opening is open to which game balls can enter. Even in the first state, no ball enters the V area 39, and the timing is 5 seconds before the state changes to the second state in which no game balls can enter. More specifically, in a round game where it is easy to pass to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30, the time elapsed after the first big prize opening 30 was opened is measured, and this measured time is When reaching 5 seconds before the opening time of the first big prize opening 30, if no ball has entered the V area 39 yet, the remaining time meter display effect is executed at this timing. The setting of 5 seconds in this remaining time meter display effect means that the game ball fired by the player right-handed when the remaining time meter display effect is executed hits the V area 39 in the first grand prize opening 30. The time has been set to give you plenty of time to get through. That is, the switching display to the remaining time suggestion image NZT is timed in time for the shot game ball to enter the V area 39.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(C), a remaining time countdown meter effect is executed. This remaining time countdown meter effect is an effect in which the remaining time (5 seconds) of the remaining time suggestion image NZT shown in FIG. 165(B) is counted down, and the meter value of the meter image MAT moves in accordance with the countdown. There is. In this remaining time countdown meter effect, the countdown is made in increments of 0.01 seconds, and in this example, the remaining time suggestion image NZT and meter image MAT are shown at the time when the countdown is down to 2.00 seconds. ing. That is, in this example, the counted down time is 3.00 seconds, and the meter area MAR has reached a point where the memory of the meter frame MAW is 2.00. Therefore, MAN indicating the portion of the meter frame MAW other than the meter area MAR (the white portion shown in FIGS. 165(B) and 165(C)) matches the remaining time displayed in the remaining time suggestion image NZT. That is, MAN indicates the same time as the remaining time displayed in the remaining time suggestion image NZT. Here, the remaining time suggestion image NZT shown in FIG. 165(C) is displayed smaller than that shown in FIG. 165(B), and the remaining time suggestion image NZT shown in FIG. " has been changed to "Remain until end." Note that in this remaining time suggestion image NZT, the number "2.00" is displayed larger (about twice) than other characters. Additionally, above and below the remaining time suggestion image NZT, a right-handed arrow YAR2 and a message MGU2 consisting of the words "Right-handed" are displayed horizontally on the left side of the right-handed arrow YAR2. In other words, the remaining time suggestion image NZT that is performing the countdown is displayed between the upper and lower right arrows YAR2 and the message MGU2. The right-handed arrow YAR2 and message MGU2 displayed at the top and bottom are the same display, and the right-handed arrow YAR2 and message MGU2 shown in FIG. 165(C) are the same as the right-handed arrow YAR1 shown in FIG. 165(A). In the remaining time suggestion image NZT shown in FIG. 165(C), which is displayed smaller than the message MGU1 and the message MGU1, the numbers in the countdown display are smaller than the up and down arrows YAR1 and the message MGU1. It is displayed large.

[V winning time remaining time announcement production C]
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the V winning remaining time notification effect C.
In the V winning remaining time notification effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 166(A), in the above-mentioned V passing planned jackpot, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long and goes to the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30. At the start of the round game when it is easy to pass, a right-handed V winning instruction performance is performed. In this right-handed V winning instruction performance, a message MGL consisting of the characters "Aim for V!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and this message MGL has the characters "V" and The text is displayed larger (about twice as large) than the text. Above the message MGL, a right-handed arrow YAR1 is displayed to encourage the player to play right-handed, and within the display area of this right-handed arrow YAR1, a message MGU1 consisting of the words "Right-handed" is displayed. . The player can win the game ball into the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 by hitting the ball to the right as prompted by the display of the right hitting arrow YAR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(B), a remaining time display effect is executed. In this remaining time display performance, the message MGL "Aim for V!" is deleted, and instead, the remaining time suggesting image NZT "Remaining time 5.00 seconds" is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this remaining time suggestion image NZT, the number "5.00" is displayed larger (about three times) than other characters. Additionally, above the remaining time suggestion image NZT, there are the right-handed arrow YAR1 and the message MGU1 of "right-handed batter" shown in FIG. 166(A), and the newly added right-handed arrow YAR2 and the "right-handed batter" message. MGU2 is displayed. The newly added right-handed arrow YAR2 and the "right-handed batter" message MGU2 are displayed so as to overlap from the front side of the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR1 and the "right-handed batter" message MGU1. By displaying in this way, it is possible to appeal to the player that he/she plays right-handed. Note that the message MGU2 consisting of the characters "Right-handling" is displayed horizontally adjacent to the left side of the right-handling arrow YAR2. Further, the right-handed arrow YAR2 and the message MGU2 are displayed smaller than the right-handed arrow YAR1 and the message MGU1. Here, the timing at which the remaining time display effect is executed, that is, the timing at which the remaining time suggestion image NZT is switched and displayed is that the first grand prize opening 30 as a variable winning opening is the first one in which a game ball can enter. This is the timing 5 seconds before the state changes to the second state in which no ball enters the V area 39 even after entering the first state, and no ball enters the V area 39. More specifically, in a round game where it is easy to pass to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30, the time elapsed after the first big prize opening 30 was opened is measured, and this measured time is When reaching 5 seconds before the opening time of the first big prize opening 30, if no ball has entered the V area 39 yet, the remaining time display effect is executed at this timing. In addition, the setting of 5 seconds in this remaining time display performance means that the game ball fired by the player with a right hit when the remaining time display performance is executed passes through the V area 39 in the first grand prize opening 30. However, the time has been set to give you plenty of time to arrive in time. That is, the switching display to the remaining time suggestion image NZT is timed in time for the shot game ball to enter the V area 39.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(C), a remaining time countdown meter effect is executed. This remaining time countdown meter effect is an effect in which the remaining time (5 seconds) of the remaining time suggestion image NZT shown in FIG. 166(B) is counted down, and the meter value of the meter image MAT moves in accordance with the countdown. There is. The meter image MAT has a meter frame MAW and a meter area MAR (the cross-hatched part shown in FIG. 166(C)), and the meter area MAR is a meter that moves within the meter frame MAW. It represents the meter value. The meter frame MAW has a memory (5 to 0) attached above it that represents the remaining time displayed in the remaining time suggestion image NZT, and the meter area MAR has a memory 5 (5.00 seconds) that is the starting point. It moves from there toward memory 0 (0.00 seconds), which is the end point. In this remaining time countdown meter effect, the countdown is made in increments of 0.01 seconds, and in this example, the remaining time suggestion image NZT and meter image MAT are shown at the time when the countdown is down to 2.00 seconds. ing. That is, in this example, the counted down time is 3.00 seconds, and the meter area MAR has reached a point where the memory of the meter frame MAW is 2.00. Therefore, MAN (the white part shown in FIG. 166(C)) indicating the part of the meter frame MAW other than the meter area MAR matches the remaining time displayed in the remaining time suggestion image NZT. That is, MAN indicates the same time as the remaining time displayed in the remaining time suggestion image NZT. Here, the remaining time suggestion image NZT shown in FIG. 166(C) is displayed smaller than that shown in FIG. 166(B), and the remaining time suggestion image NZT shown in FIG. " has been changed to "Remain until end." Note that in this remaining time suggestion image NZT, the number "2.00" is displayed larger (about twice) than other characters. Additionally, above the remaining time suggestion image NZT, the right-handed arrow YAR2 and the "right-handed" message MGU2 shown in FIG. 166(B) are similarly displayed, and furthermore, in this remaining time countdown meter effect, A right-handed arrow YAR2 and a "right-handed" message MGU2 are also displayed below the remaining time suggestion image NZT.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the V winning remaining time notification effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 164 to 166, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a variable winning opening that can be changed between a first state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the V area and a second state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the V area. However, if the first display prompting the ball to enter the V area and the predetermined time before the variable winning hole changes from the first state to the second state, the ball does not enter the V area, the V area is displayed. The configuration is such that it can display a second display indicating the remaining time during which the ball can be entered. According to this configuration, even if the player overlooks the first display, by checking the second display, the player can reliably bring the game ball into the V area. . As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 164 to 166, it is possible to display a third display that urges players to play right, and the third display is the third display that is displayed in conjunction with the first display. The configuration includes one mode and a second mode displayed in relation to the second display. According to this configuration, the third display can change between the first mode and the second mode depending on the gaming state. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 164 to 166, the second aspect has a first right-handed game display and a second right-handed game display, and the second display has a first right-handed game display. between the right-hand hitting display and the second right-hand hitting display, and is configured to be displayed larger than the first right-hand hitting display and the second right-hand hitting display. According to this configuration, since the second display is emphasized between the first right-handed hitting display and the second right-handed hitting display, the player does not forget the remaining time in which the ball can enter the V area. It becomes possible to suppress this. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 164 to 166, the switching display to the second display is configured to be performed in time for the shot game ball to enter the V area. ing. According to this configuration, even if the player confirms the second display and shoots the game ball, he or she can reliably cause the game ball to enter the V area. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 164 to 166, the second display is configured to be a countdown display. According to this configuration, the player can grasp the remaining time in which the ball can enter the V area in real time. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the V winning remaining time notification effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 164 to 166, the timing at which the remaining time suggestion image NZT is switched and displayed is that the first big winning hole 30 as a variable winning hole is opened when the game ball enters. Although the game ball is set to the predetermined time (5 seconds) before changing to the second state in which no ball enters the V area 39 even when the first state is possible, no ball enters the V area 39, the present invention is limited to this. It's not something you can do. For example, the timing at which the remaining time suggestion image NZT is displayed may be determined when no ball enters the V area even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable winning hole entered the first state.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 164 to 166, the V winning remaining time notification effect is a V passing scheduled jackpot, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long, and the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time, It was designed to be performed at the start of a round game when it is easier to pass to the V area 39. In other words, the V winning time remaining notification effect was performed on a gaming machine commonly known as a V-ST machine, but the actual The invention is not limited to this. For example, the V winning remaining time notification effect is performed when a variable start opening (special 2) is won and a 2nd type attacker with a V area opens, that is, it is performed in a gaming machine commonly known as a 1 type and 2 type mixed machine. You can do it like this.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 164 to 166, in the remaining time countdown effect or the remaining time countdown/meter effect, the meter value moves by counting down in the remaining time suggestion image NZT. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the remaining time indicated by the countdown or meter value reaches a preset time (for example, 2 seconds remaining), the countdown display can be blinked, the color scheme can be changed (for example, from white to red), or even , a siren sound, or other sound may be emitted. Further, in the meter image MAT, a portion of the meter frame MAW (2 to 0 seconds) that is less than or equal to a preset time may be displayed conspicuously as a red zone.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 164 to 166, the right-handed arrow YAR2 and the message MGU2 arranged above and below the remaining time suggestion image NZT are displayed in the same manner. is not limited to this. For example, the right-handed arrow YAR2 and the message MGU2 may be displayed with different shapes, colors, sizes, etc. at the top and bottom.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 166(B), in the remaining time display effect, the right-handed arrow YAR2 and the message MGU2 of "right-handed" are replaced by the right-handed arrow YAR1 and the "right-handed" message. Although the display area of the MGU 1 is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, conversely, the right-handed hitting arrow YAR1 and the "right-handed hitting" message MGU1 may be displayed so as to overlap from the front side of the display area of the right-handed hitting arrow YAR2 and the "right-handed hitting" message MGU2. Alternatively, the right-handed arrow YAR1 and the "right-handed" message MGU1 and the right-handed arrow YAR2 and the "right-handed" message MGU2 may be displayed above and below the remaining time suggestion image NZT without overlapping. It's okay.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E9-1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple displays;
A variable winning hole that has a V area and can change between a first state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the V area and a second state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the V area;
A gaming machine comprising:
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first display is a display encouraging the ball to enter the V area,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display indicating the remaining time during which the ball can enter the V area,
The second display is switched from the first display when a predetermined gaming state is reached;
The predetermined gaming state is a case where no ball enters the V area even after a predetermined time before the variable winning hole changes from the first state to the second state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E9-2]
One of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The third display is a display encouraging right-handed hitting,
The third display has a first mode displayed in relation to the first display and a second mode displayed in relation to the second display.
The gaming machine according to aspect E9-1.
[Aspect E9-3]
The second aspect has a first right-handed display and a second right-handed display,
The second display is between the first right-handed hitting display and the second right-handed hitting display, and is displayed larger than the first right-handed hitting display and the second right-handed hitting display. be done,
The gaming machine according to aspect E9-2.
[Aspect E9-4]
The switching display to the second display is the timing in time for the fired game ball to enter the V area,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E9-1 to E9-3, characterized in that:
[Aspect E9-5]
the second display is a countdown display;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E9-1 to E9-4.

The jackpot symbol display performance will be explained below using FIGS. 167 to 169. This jackpot symbol display performance may be executed during a fluctuating display of decorative symbols (for example, at the end of a reach performance (super reach performance)).

[Jackpot symbol display effect A]
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining jackpot symbol display effect A.
In the jackpot symbol display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 167(A), a ready-to-reach effect is executed. This ready-to-win performance is performed during a ready-to-win state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same design. The reach performance includes a normal reach performance with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot and a super reach performance with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot. A super reach performance is a performance that may be developed and executed from a normal reach performance. In addition, in this reach effect, the "5" symbol is in the reach state. Further, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(B), a jackpot normal notification effect is executed. In this jackpot normal notification performance, a jackpot pattern arrangement using decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. This jackpot pattern arrangement is displayed as if the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R were viewed from the front. Hereinafter, the jackpot normal notification performance will also be referred to as a front view display performance. In addition, in FIG. 167(B), the jackpot symbol arrangement is a set of 5 symbols with zeros. Further, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Jackpot~!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(C), a diagonal right direction display effect is executed. In this diagonal right direction display performance, the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed in the right diagonal direction. In other words, this jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed as if the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were viewed from diagonally forward to the right, looking down a little. This diagonal right direction display effect makes it possible to notify that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are three-dimensional.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(D), a rear view display effect is executed. In this rear view display effect, a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed in the rear view. That is, this jackpot pattern arrangement is displayed as if the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R were viewed from the front and the opposite side.
When the rear view display effect is executed, the front view display effect shown in FIG. 167(B) in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are viewed from the front is executed again, and then the jackpot game is started. The performance related to is executed.

[Jackpot symbol display performance B]
FIG. 168 is a diagram for explaining jackpot symbol display effect B.
In the jackpot symbol display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 168(A), a ready-to-win effect is executed. This ready-to-win performance is performed during a ready-to-win state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same design. The reach performance includes a normal reach performance with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot and a super reach performance with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot. A super reach performance is a performance that may be developed and executed from a normal reach performance. In addition, in this reach effect, the "5" symbol is in the reach state. Further, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(B), a jackpot normal notification effect (front view display effect) is executed. In this jackpot normal notification performance, a jackpot pattern arrangement using decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. This jackpot pattern arrangement is displayed as if the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R were viewed from the front. In addition, in FIG. 168(B), the jackpot symbol arrangement is a combination of 5 symbols on both sides. Further, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Jackpot!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(C), a diagonal right direction display effect is executed. In this diagonal right direction display performance, the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed in the right diagonal direction. In other words, this jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed as if the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were viewed from diagonally forward to the right, looking down a little. This diagonal right direction display effect makes it possible to notify that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are three-dimensional.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(D), a right side view display effect is executed. In this right side view display performance, a jackpot symbol array is displayed in the right side view. That is, this jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed as if the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were viewed from the right side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(E), a rear view display effect is executed. In this rear view display effect, a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed in the rear view. That is, this jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed as if the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were viewed from the front and the opposite side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(F), a left side view display effect is executed. In this left side view display performance, a jackpot symbol array is displayed in the left side view. In other words, this jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed as if the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were viewed from the left side.
When the left side view display effect is executed, the front view display effect shown in FIG. 165(B) in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are viewed from the front is executed again, and then the jackpot game is started and this jackpot A performance related to the game is executed.

[Jackpot symbol display performance C]
FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining jackpot symbol display effect B.
In the jackpot symbol display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 169(A), a ready-to-win effect is executed. This ready-to-win performance is performed during a ready-to-win state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same design. The reach performance includes a normal reach performance with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot and a super reach performance with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot. A super reach performance is a performance that may be developed and executed from a normal reach performance. In addition, in this reach effect, the "5" symbol is in the reach state. Further, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Reach!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(B), a jackpot normal notification effect (front view display effect) is executed. In this jackpot normal notification performance, a jackpot pattern arrangement using decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. This jackpot pattern arrangement is displayed as if the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R were viewed from the front. In addition, in FIG. 169(B), the jackpot symbol arrangement is a combination of 5 symbols on both sides. Further, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the words "Jackpot~!" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(C), a diagonal right direction display effect is executed. In this diagonal right direction display performance, the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed in the right diagonal direction. In other words, this jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed as if the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were viewed from diagonally forward to the right, looking down a little. This diagonal right direction display effect makes it possible to notify that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are three-dimensional.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(D), a right side view display effect is executed. In this right side view display performance, a jackpot symbol array is displayed in the right side view. That is, this jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed as if the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were viewed from the right side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(E), a rear view display effect is executed. In this rear view display effect, a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed in the rear view. That is, this jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed as if the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were viewed from the front and the opposite side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(F), a front view enlarged display effect is executed. In this front view enlarged display performance, the jackpot symbol array is displayed in a front view, and the jackpot symbol array is displayed in a larger size than the jackpot symbol array shown in FIGS. 169(B) to 169(E). .

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(G), a front view reduction display effect is executed. In this front view reduced display performance, the jackpot symbol array is displayed in front view, and the jackpot symbol array is displayed in a smaller size than the jackpot symbol array shown in FIGS. 169(B) to 169(E). . In addition, in this front-view reduced display performance, the reduced jackpot symbol array is displayed at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a in the left-right direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(H), a front view moving display effect is executed. In this front-view moving display performance, in the front-view reduced display performance shown in FIG. It moves upward and is displayed in a state where it is stopped at the upper left-right center of the display screen 7a.
When the front view moving display effect is executed, the front view display effect shown in FIG. 169(B) in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are viewed from the front is executed again, and then the jackpot game is started and this jackpot A performance related to the game is executed.

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of the jackpot symbol display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 169, it is possible to display a first display in which the decorative pattern is viewed from the front, and a second display in which the decorative pattern is viewed from the opposite side. The first performance is configured to perform the second display after the first display is performed. According to this configuration, the first display can be performed, for example, by rotating the decorative pattern in the horizontal direction and displaying the second display after the first display. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, it is possible to display a second display in which the decorative pattern is viewed from the side, and the second display is performed after the first display is executed. The third display is executed, and after the third display is executed, the second display is executed. According to this configuration, the second display is, for example, after the first display, the decorative pattern is rotated in the horizontal direction to display the third display, and then further rotated to display the second display. It becomes possible to do this. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169, it is possible to display a fourth display that reduces or enlarges the decorative pattern, and the third display is performed after the second display is executed. It is configured to display. According to this configuration, the third display is, for example, after the first display, the decorative pattern is rotated in the horizontal direction to display the third display, and then further rotated to display the second display, Thereafter, it becomes possible to perform an effect of reducing or enlarging the decorative pattern. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169, the fourth effect is configured to move the display position of the decorative pattern after the third effect is executed. According to this configuration, the fourth effect is, for example, after the first display, the decorative pattern is rotated in the horizontal direction to display the third display, and then further rotated to display the second display, Thereafter, the decorative pattern can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner, and then the reduced or enlarged decorative pattern can be moved to a desired position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 169, the first display, second display, third display, and fourth display are configured to be a jackpot symbol arrangement. According to this configuration, the jackpot symbol arrangement can be displayed in various ways, so that the jackpot can be further emphasized and congratulations can be shown to the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the jackpot symbol display performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 169, in the jackpot symbol display performances A, B, and C, front view display performance, right diagonal direction display performance, rear view display performance, right side view display performance, A display effect, a left side view display effect, a front view enlarged display effect, a front view reduced display effect, or a front view moving display effect are executed, but the notification order of these display effects is jackpot symbol display effects A to D. It is not limited to the display order, but can be executed in various display orders. For example, in the jackpot symbol display performance A, first, a front view display performance may be performed, then a rear view display performance may be performed, and then a right diagonal view display performance may be performed. In addition, in jackpot symbol display performance B, first, a front view display performance is performed, then a left side view display performance is performed, then a rear view display performance is performed, and then a right side view display performance is performed. may be executed, and then a diagonal right direction display effect may be executed. Furthermore, in jackpot symbol display performance C, first, a front view display performance is performed, then a front view reduction display performance is performed, then a front view moving display performance is performed, and then a rear view display performance is performed. is executed, then a left side view display effect is executed, then a right diagonal view display effect is executed, and then a front view enlarged display effect may be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 169, in the jackpot symbol display performances A, B, and C, front view display performance, right diagonal direction display performance, rear view display performance, right side view display performance, Although a display performance, a left side view display performance, a front view enlarged display performance, a front view reduced display performance, or a front view movement display performance is executed, the present invention is not limited to these. For example, in the jackpot symbol display performance, a diagonal left view display performance may be performed in which the jackpot symbol array is displayed as if viewed from diagonally to the left, or a jackpot symbol array may be displayed as if viewed from diagonally downward. A downward diagonal viewing display effect may be performed. Further, a symbol rotation display performance may be performed in which decorative symbols constituting the jackpot symbol array are rotated and displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 169, in the jackpot symbol display performances A to C, when the jackpot is notified using the jackpot symbol arrangement, in the jackpot symbol display performances A, B, and C, when viewed from the front, A display effect, a diagonal right direction display effect, a rear view display effect, a right side view display effect, a left side view display effect, a front view enlarged display effect, a front view reduced display effect, or a front view moving display effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, these effects may be applied to effects that temporarily stop the decorative symbols, such as a pseudo continuous effect, a reach effect, and the like. In this case, using the pattern arrangement when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the front view display effect, right diagonal view display effect, rear view display effect, right side view display effect, left side view display effect, and front view enlargement are used. A display effect, a front view reduced display effect, or a front view moving display effect may be executed.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169(F), in the front view enlarged display effect, the jackpot symbol arrangement is larger than the jackpot symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 169(B) to FIG. 169(E). Although the display is enlarged, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the front view enlarged display performance, at least one decorative pattern (at least one of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R) of the jackpot pattern arrangement is the jackpot pattern shown in FIGS. 169(B) to 169(E). It may be displayed larger than the array. Alternatively, the front view symbol enlargement display performance may be configured such that the jackpot symbol array is displayed in a manner that is enlarged more than any of the symbol arrays shown in FIGS. 169(B) to 169(E).

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169(G), in the front view reduced display effect, the jackpot symbol arrangement is larger than the jackpot symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 169(B) to FIG. 169(E). Although the image is displayed in a reduced size, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the front view reduction display performance, at least one decorative pattern (at least one of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R) of the jackpot pattern arrangement is the jackpot pattern shown in FIGS. 169(B) to 169(E). It may be displayed in a smaller size than the array. Alternatively, the front view symbol reduction display performance may be configured such that the jackpot symbol array is displayed in a smaller size than any of the symbol arrays shown in FIGS. 169(B) to 169(E).

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169(H), in the front view moving display performance, the jackpot symbol array moves straight upward as shown by the arrow YAG, and in the horizontal direction on the upper side of the display screen 7a. Although the image is displayed while stopped at the center, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot symbol arrangement may be displayed in a winding manner, or while rising and falling, while stopping at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a (for example, on the upper left or upper right side of the display screen 7a). good.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E10-1]
A production means capable of performing multiple productions,
a display means capable of displaying multiple displays;
A gaming machine comprising:
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first display is a display of the decorative pattern viewed from the front,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display of the decorative pattern viewed from the front and the opposite side,
One of the plurality of performances is a first performance,
The first effect is to execute the second display after executing the first display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E10-2]
One of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The third display is a display of the decorative pattern viewed from the side,
One of the plurality of performances is a second performance,
The second display includes executing the third display after executing the first display, and executing the second display after executing the third display.
The gaming machine according to aspect E10-1.
[Aspect E10-3]
One of the plurality of displays is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a reduced or enlarged display of the decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of performances is a third performance,
The third effect executes the fourth display after executing the second effect,
The gaming machine according to aspect E10-2.
[Aspect E10-4]
One of the plurality of performances is a fourth performance,
The fourth performance moves the display position of the decorative pattern after executing the third performance.
The gaming machine according to aspect E10-3.
[Aspect E10-5]
The first display, the second display, the third display and the fourth display are jackpot symbol arrangements;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E10-1 to E10-4.

[Other variations]
Among the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include some effects or effects other than those described above may be included.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel type game machine such as a slot machine, an arranged ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

Although the game machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with the effect button 63 as an operation section to be operated by a player, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, etc. may be used as an operation section to be operated by a player. . Further, in the display performance in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display performance may be executed using a button image representing the performance button 63, but instead of this, the display performance may be executed using an image representing the sword member 64. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1 described above, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

Furthermore, two or more of the above-mentioned production examples and/or modifications may be combined. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the above-described display effect may be executed on the sub display device.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modified examples, the embodiments of the above-described aspect are for facilitating understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

1...Game machine 3...Game area 7...Image display device 9A, 9B...Pending image (pending icon)
9C...The suspended image 14...First movable accessory 15...Second movable accessory 20...First starting port (first ball entrance)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
81...Microcomputer for game control 91...Microcomputer for performance control 101...Microcomputer for image control

Claims (2)

a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine equipped with an accessory,
The accessory can visually recognize an image displayed on the display means located on the back side of the accessory through the accessory,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
The specific image can transition between a first state in shape and a second state in which the length in a predetermined direction is longer than the first state,
When the specific image is displayed on the display means, a portion of the specific image on one side in the predetermined direction becomes visible through the accessory, and a portion of the specific image on the other side in the predetermined direction becomes visible. It is possible to perform a first effect in which at least a portion of the remaining part of the specific image located at is visible without using the accessory,
In the first effect, the shape of the specific image changes from the first state to the second state, so that the specific image extends toward one side in the predetermined direction, and extends through the accessory. The area of the part that becomes visible through the accessory changes, and the area of the part that becomes visible without the aid does not change .
A gaming machine characterized by: a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A game machine equipped with an accessory,
The accessory can visually recognize an image displayed on the display means located on the back side of the accessory through the accessory,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
The specific image can transition between a first state in shape and a second state in which the length in a predetermined direction is longer than the first state,
When the specific image is displayed on the display means, a portion of the specific image on one side in the predetermined direction becomes visible through the accessory, and a portion of the specific image on the other side in the predetermined direction becomes visible. It is possible to perform a first effect in which at least a portion of the remaining part of the specific image located at is visible without using the accessory,
In the first effect, the shape of the specific image changes from the first state to the second state, so that the specific image expands toward one side in the predetermined direction, and the accessory object After the area of the part that becomes visible through increases, the shape of the specific image changes from the second state to the first state, so that the specific image moves toward the other side in the predetermined direction. By shrinking, the area of the part that becomes visible through the accessory decreases.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images